Owner's Manual

6JA012720BL

Owner’s manual

Toledo Inglés (11.18) SEAT Toledo

6JA012720BL (11.18)

Inglés SEAT Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. Service advisor: All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18 Introduction

Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- WARNING hicle. Read and always observe safety infor- With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy mation concerning the passenger's a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology front airbag ››› page 75, Important in- and top quality features. formation regarding the front passenger's airbag. We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving. Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring. SEAT, S.A. ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- CAUTION About this manual sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. Texts after this symbol indicate possible This manual describes the features of the ve- damage to the vehicle. hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of  It indicates that the section continues on the features described below will be intro- the next page. For the sake of the environment duced in the future or will only be available in  Important warnings on the page. certain markets. Texts after this symbol contain informa- More in-depth content on the page. tion about the protection of the environ- Some of the features described here are  ment. not included in all the types or variations  General information on page indicated. of the model and they can be varied or modified based on technical or marketing  Emergency information on the page. Note requirements without it being considered Texts after this symbol contain addition- You can access the information in this manual misleading advertising. al information. using: Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Thematic table of contents that follows the standard representation. manual’s general chapter structure. The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics backwards) in this manual refer to the travel to indicate the pages containing “essential” direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- information, which is detailed in the corre- ted. sponding chapters. The audiovisual material is only meant to ● Alphabetical index with many terms and help the users better understand some fea- synonyms to help you find information. tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the instruction manual. Access the instruction WARNING manual to see the complete information and Texts after this symbol contain informa- warnings. tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.  The features marked with an asterisk are included by default only in certain versions of the model, supplied as optional only for certain versions or only offered in certain countries. Printed Instruction Manual Digital Version of the Infotainment Related videos The printed instruction manual contains rele- System Manual vant information about the use of the vehicle and the Infotainment System. The digital version of the manuals contains more in-depth information.

Fig. 2 SEAT website

Fig. 1 SEAT website The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- The digital version is available on SEAT's offi- tures can be shown as an instruction video:

cial website. ● scan the QR code Fig. 2 ››› To view the digital version of the manual: ● OR enter the following address in the navi-

gator website: ● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1

● OR enter the following address in the navi- http://www.seat.com/owners/your- gator website: seat/manuals-offline.html

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”. seat/manuals-offline.html Note choose your vehicle and then “Infotainment”. Video instructions are only available in certain languages.

How do you open the bonnet? page 13 How do you check and top up the engine cool- Frequently Asked Ques- ››› ant? ››› page 43 How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 54 tions How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? Where is the vehicle tool kit located? ››› page 44 Before driving ››› page 48 How do you check and top up the brake fluid? How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 14 ››› page 43 kit? ››› page 47 How do you adjust the steering wheel? How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-

››› page 16 How do you change a wheel? ››› page 48 ues? ››› page 256 How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? How do you change a fuse? ››› page 45 Vehicle washing tips ››› page 265

››› page 15 How do you change a light? ››› page 46 How do you turn on the exterior lights? Functions of interest How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 52 ››› page 21 Easy Connect, CAR menu ››› page 24 How does the automatic gearbox selector lever Useful tips How does the START-STOP system work?

work? ››› page 36 ››› page 215 How do you set the time? ››› page 99 How do you refuel? ››› page 41 What parking assistants are available? When should the vehicle inspection should be How do you activate the windscreen wipers and ››› page 222 performed? ››› page 33 windscreen washer system? ››› page 23 How does the rear assist work? page 227 What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on ›››

the steering wheel perform? ››› page 103 How does tyre pressure monitoring work? Emergency situations page 260 How do you drive in an economical and environ- ››› A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does mentally-friendly way? ››› page 211 How do you open the vehicle without a key this mean? ››› page 34 (Keyless Access)? page 113 How do you check and top up the engine oil? ››› Where are the first-aid kit and the warning trian- ››› page 42 gle in the vehicle? ››› page 78 Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 126 Table of Contents

Safety ...... 57 Operation ...... 97 Table of Contents Safe driving ...... 57 Controls and displays ...... 97 The essentials ...... 7 Advice about driving ...... 57 General instrument panel ...... 96 Exterior view ...... 7 Correct position of the vehicle occu- Instruments and warning lamps ...... 98 pants ...... 58 Exterior view ...... 8 Instruments ...... 98 Pedal area ...... 62 Interior view (left-hand drive) ...... 9 Control lamps ...... 103 Seat belts ...... 63 Interior view (steering wheel on the Multi-function steering wheel* ...... 103 right) ...... 10 The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 63 Opening and closing ...... 108 How it works ...... 11 How to properly adjust your seat belt ...... 66 Remote control ...... 108 Unlocking and locking ...... 11 Seat belt tensioners ...... 67 Keys ...... 109 Before driving ...... 14 Airbag system ...... 68 Central locking system ...... 110 Airbags ...... 16 Brief introduction ...... 68 Anti-theft alarm* ...... 116 Child seats ...... 19 Airbag safety instructions ...... 70 Rear lid ...... 117 Starting the vehicle ...... 20 Deactivating airbags ...... 72 Controls for the windows ...... 119 Lights and visibility ...... 21 Transporting children safely ...... 75 Lights and visibility ...... 120 Easy Connect ...... 24 Safety for children ...... 75 Lights ...... 120 Driver information system ...... 27 Child seats ...... 76 Interior lights ...... 126 Visibility ...... 127 Status display ...... 31 Emergencies ...... 78 Windscreen wipers and windscreen wash- Cruise control ...... 34 Self-help ...... 78 ers ...... 128 Warning lamps ...... 34 Emergency equipment ...... 78 Mirrors ...... 130 Gearbox lever ...... 36 Changing a wheel ...... 78 Seats and head restraints ...... 131 Air conditioning ...... 37 Tyre repairs ...... 79 Adjusting seats and head restraints ...... 131 Fluid level control ...... 41 Towing the vehicle ...... 81 Seat functions ...... 132 Emergencies ...... 45 Fuses and bulbs ...... 83 Transport and practical equipment ...... 135 Fuses ...... 45 Fuses ...... 83 Practical equipment ...... 135 Bulbs ...... 46 Changing bulbs ...... 86 Storing objects ...... 141 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 46 Changing the fog light bulbs ...... 90 Luggage compartment ...... 142 Changing a wheel ...... 48 Changing the rear lights (on the side pan- Roof rack* ...... 145 Snow chains ...... 52 el) ...... 90 Air conditioning ...... 146 Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 52 Changing tail lights (on the rear lid) ...... 92 Heating and air conditioning ...... 146 How to jump start ...... 54 Changing the side and number plate Heating and fresh air ...... 148 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 56 bulbs ...... 94 Air conditioning (manual)* ...... 149 Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) ...... 151 5 Table of Contents

Infotainment System ...... 154 Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* ...... 227 Information for the user ...... 271 Introduction ...... 154 Fatigue detection (break recommenda- Information for the user ...... 271 Safety warnings ...... 154 tion)* ...... 230 Important information ...... 271 Overview of the unit ...... 156 Towing bracket device ...... 232 Information about the EU Directive General instructions for use ...... 158 Driving with a trailer ...... 232 2014/53/EU ...... 271 Connectivity ...... 163 Towing bracket device ...... 234 Technical data ...... 275 Data transfer ...... 163 Practical tips ...... 240 Technical specifications ...... 275 Full Link* ...... 163 Accessories and modifications to the ve- Important information ...... 275 Operating modes ...... 171 hicle ...... 240 Information on fuel consumption ...... 276 Radio ...... 171 Accessories and modifications to the vehi- Driving with a trailer ...... 277 Media ...... 172 cle ...... 240 Wheels ...... 277 Navigation ...... 178 Checking and refilling levels ...... 241 Engine data ...... 279 Vehicle Menu ...... 188 Fuel ...... 241 Vehicle data ...... 281 Telephone ...... 189 Engine compartment ...... 244 Multimedia ...... 195 Engine oil ...... 247 Index ...... 283 Driving ...... 196 Coolant ...... 248 Start and driving ...... 196 Brake fluid ...... 250 Starting and stopping the engine ...... 196 Window washer system ...... 251 Brakes and brake servo systems ...... 199 Battery ...... 251 Braking and stability systems ...... 201 Wheels and tyres ...... 255 Manual gearbox ...... 203 Tyres ...... 255 Automatic gearbox ...... 203 Spare wheel ...... 259 Gear-change indicator ...... 208 Tyre monitoring system ...... 260 Steering ...... 209 Winter service ...... 261 Run-in and economical driving ...... 210 Maintenance ...... 262 Engine management and emission control Service ...... 262 system ...... 213 Service intervals ...... 262 Driving tips ...... 214 Additional service offers ...... 264 Driver assistance systems ...... 215 Warranty ...... 265 Start-Stop system* ...... 215 Vehicle maintenance ...... 265 Cruise control (CCS)* ...... 217 Maintenance and cleaning ...... 265 Emergency braking assistance system (Front Assist)* ...... 219 Parking aid ...... 222

6 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 12 5 ››› page 52 2 ››› page 41 6 ››› page 13 3 ››› page 11 7 ››› page 46 4 ››› page 41 7 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 43 5 ››› page 44 9 ››› page 20 2 ››› page 42 6 ››› page 42 10 ››› page 48 3 ››› page 44 7 ››› page 43 11 ››› page 47 4 ››› page 45 8 ›››  page 141 8 The essentials

Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 15 5 ››› page 34 9 ››› page 24 13 ››› page 36 17 ››› page 14 2 ››› page 21 6 ››› page 23 10 ››› page 17 14 ››› page 14 18 ››› page 14 3 ››› page 21 7 ››› page 27 11 ››› page 37 15 ››› page 13 19 ››› page 16 4 ››› page 34 8 ››› page 22 12 ››› page 20 16 ››› page 45

9 The essentials

Interior view (steering wheel on the right)

1 ››› page 21 5 ››› page 23 9 ››› page 15 13 ››› page 36 17 ››› page 20 2 ››› page 34 6 ››› page 27 10 ››› page 17 14 ››› page 16 18 ››› page 45 3 ››› page 22 7 ››› page 34 11 ››› page 37 15 ››› page 14 19 ››› page 14 4 ››› page 24 8 ››› page 21 12 ››› page 13 16 ››› page 14

10 The essentials

How it works Locking and unlocking the vehicle using Unlocking or locking of driver door the key ●  Unlocking and locking Locking: press the button ››› Fig. 3. ● Unlocking: press the button  ››› Fig. 3. Doors ● Unlock rear lid: press the  ››› Fig. 3 button until all the turn signals on the vehicle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central locking switch ● Locking: press the button  ››› Fig. 4. The warning lamp on the button will light up. None Fig. 5 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder. of the doors can be opened from the outside. The doors can be opened from the inside by If the central locking system should fail to op- pulling the inside door handle. erate, the driver door can still be locked and ● Unlocking: press the button  ››› Fig. 4. The unlocked by turning the key in the lock. Fig. 3 Remote control key: keys. warning lamp on the button will switch off. ● Unfold the vehicle key shaft. ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in ››› in Unlocking and locking the  vehicle on page 109 the cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 5 (arrow) then remove the cover upwards.  ››› page 108 ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle. ››› page 11, ››› page 12  Special characteristics ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, it is not triggered ›››  page 110. Fig. 4 Centre console: central locking switch. ● After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. »

11 The essentials

● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- ● Replace the cap. ››› in Opening and closing on bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-  page 118 activates the anti-theft alarm system. Once the door has been locked, it can no longer be opened from the outside. The door ››› page 117 Note can be opened again from the inside by pull-  ing the door handle. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when ››› page 12 the vehicle is locked manually using the  key shaft ›››  page 110. Rear lid Manual release mechanism for the Locking manually rear lid

Fig. 7 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

● Opening the rear lid: pull on the release lev- Fig. 6 Rear door: emergency lock. Fig. 8 Luggage compartment: access to man- er and lift it up ››› Fig. 7. The rear lid opens ual release. On the front of a door with no lock cylinder automatically. there is an emergency locking device that is ● Close the rear lid: hold it by one of the han- The rear lid can be unlocked manually from only visible when the door is open. dles on the interior lining and close it by push- inside in the event of an emergency. ing gently. Locking ● Insert the key in the opening in the lining of the rear lid and move the key in the direction ● Remove the cap A Fig. 6. ››› of the arrow until the lock is released. ● Insert the key in the slot B and turn it in the direction of the arrow until horizontal (on the other direction on the right-hand door).

12 The essentials

Bonnet ● Open the door and pull the lever under the dashboard ››› Fig. 9 1 . ● To lift the bonnet: press the release catch under the bonnet upwards 2 . The arrester hook under the bonnet is released. ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the bonnet stay in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 10 3 and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet 4 .

Closing the bonnet ● Slightly lift the bonnet. ● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. ● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall so it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

Fig. 9 Unlocking the bonnet. ››› in Working in the engine com-  partment on page 245 Fig. 10 Locking the bonnet. ››› page 244 Opening the bonnet  The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

13 The essentials

Controls for the windows* Before driving Adjusting the head restraints

Manually adjusting the front seats

Fig. 11 Detail of the driver door: controls for Fig. 13 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint. the windows. Fig. 12 Front seats: manual seat adjustment. Grab the sides of the head restraints with ● Opening the window: press the button . both hands and push upwards to the desired ● Closing the window: pull the button . 1 Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and position. To lower it, repeat the same action, move the seat. pressing the 1 button on the side. Buttons on the driver door 2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. 1 Window on the front left door 3 Tilt backrest: pull the lever back.  ››› in Head restraints on page 132 2 Window on the front right door ››› page 61, ››› page 132 3 Window on the rear left door  ››› in Introduction on page 131  4 Window on the rear right door 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

››› in Operation of the electric win-  dows on page 119  ››› page 119

14 The essentials

Adjustment of the seat belt Seat belt tensioners

During a collision, the seat belts on the front seats are retracted automatically. The tensioner can be triggered only once.

››› in Maintenance and disposal of  belt tensioners on page 68  ››› page 67 Fig. 15 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders, Adjusting the exterior mirrors adjust the height of the seats. The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat Fig. 14 Positioning and removing the seat belt belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel- buckle. vis.

››› page 64 Fig. 16 Detail of the driver door: control for the  exterior mirror.  ››› page 66 Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to the corresponding position:

L/R Turning the knob to the desired position, adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, »

15 The essentials

left) and the passenger side (R, right) to ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel Airbags the direction desired.  position on page 59  Depending on the equipment fitted on Front airbags the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature.

 ››› in Exterior mirrors on page 130  ››› page 130

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 17 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.

Adjusting the position of the steering wheel: Fig. 18 Driver airbag in the steering wheel and pull the ››› Fig. 17 1 lever down, move the front passenger airbag in the dash panel steering wheel to the desired position and lift the lever back up until it locks.

16 The essentials

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front To deactivate the front passenger front airbag system gives the driver and the front airbag: passenger additional protection for the head ● Open the glove compartment on the front and chest in the event of a severe frontal col- passenger side. lision. ● Insert the key blade into the slot provided in Their special design allows the controlled es- the deactivation switch. cape of the propellant gas when an occu- ● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the blade remains inserted (the maximum). head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi- ● Turn the key blade, changing its position to ciently to allow visibility. . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. ››› in Front airbags on page 70  ● Finally, check the control lamp on the instrument panel where it shows      the following should appear . Deactivating the front passenger ››› in Switch front passenger front front airbag  airbag on and off on page 73  ››› page 73 Fig. 19 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags are triggered.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 18  and the front passenger airbag is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 18 . Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbags Fig. 20 Front passenger front airbag switch. are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dashboard, respectively ››› Fig. 19. 17 The essentials

Side airbags* In conjunction with the seat belts, the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision ›››  page 63, The whys and wherefores of seat belts. In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to the normal protection from the front seat belts, passengers are also held fast in the event of a Fig. 24 Deployed head-protection airbags. side collision, and this is how these airbags provide maximum protection. The head-protection airbags are located on Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat. both sides in the interior above the doors ››› in Side airbags* on page 71 ››› Fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIR-  BAG”. In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the vehicle Head-protection airbags* occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision ››› page 18.

››› in Head-protection airbags* on  page 71 Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver's seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 21. The locations are identified by the ››› Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags. text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

18 The essentials

Child seats ››› in Important information re- Seat locations garding the front passenger's airbag  on page 75 Weight Front Rear Rear Important information regarding group passen- outer centre the front passenger's airbag  ››› page 75 gera) Group II/III Ub) U U 15-36 kg

Possible ways to secure child seats U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age category (universal retention You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or systems are those fitted using the adult seat belt). front passenger seat in the following ways: L: Suitable for retention systems using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* anchors. ● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured a) Compliance with current national legislation and with a seat belt. the manufacturer's instructions is required when using ● Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be or installing child seats. Fig. 25 Passenger side sun blind. fastened without seat belts, using the “ISO- b) Move the front passenger seat as far back as possi- FIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISO- ble, as high as possible and always disable the air- FIX” and Top Tether* securing rings bag. ››› page 20. The systems include the child restraint system mounting with an upper retaining Seat locations strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat. Weight Front Rear Rear group passen- outer centre a) ››› in Safety instructions on ger  page 76 Group 0 Ub) U/L U <10 kg Fig. 26 On the rear frame of the passenger side door: adhesive in relation to the airbag. Group 0+ Ub) U/L U <13 kg A sticker with important information about the Group I Ub) U/L U passenger airbag is located on the passeng- 9-18 kg er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame. 19 The essentials

Securing child seats with “ISOFIX” ● Move the rear seat as far to the rear as it Starting the vehicle and Top Tether* will go. ● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re- Ignition lock taining rings until the child seat can be heard to engage. If the child seat is equipped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the correspondent ring. Observe the manufacturer's instructions. ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on both outermost rear seats. In some vehicles, the Fig. 27 ISOFIX securing rings. rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. Ac- cess to the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear Fig. 29 Ignition key positions. seat backrest and the seat cushioning. The Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni- Top Tether* rings are located at the rear of tion and start the engine. the backrests of the rear seats (behind the seat backrest or in the boot). Locking and unlocking the steering wheel Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* ● Lock the steering wheel: remove the key attachment system are available from Tech- from the ignition and turn the wheel until it nical Services. locks. In vehicles with automatic transmission, in order to remove the key, move the gear Fig. 28 Top Tether* securing ring. ››› in Safety instructions on shift to the P position. If necessary, press the  page 76 gear shift blocking key and release it. Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* ● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into system can be secured quickly, easily and the ignition and turn it at the same time as the safely on the rear outer seats. steering wheel in the direction indicated by When removing or fitting the child seat, the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer- please be sure to follow the manufacturer's ing wheel, it may be because it is locked. instructions.

20 The essentials

Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Lights and visibility  Fog lights: move the switch to the first po- plugs reheating sition, from positions ,  or . ● Turn on the ignition: turn the key to the 2 Light switch  Rear fog light: move the switch complete- position. ly from positions ,  or . ● Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the 1 Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it to position. the  position. ● Diesel vehicles : the glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on.  ››› in Introduction on page 120 Starting the engine ››› page 120 ● Manual transmission: press the clutch ped-  al all the way down and move the gearbox lever into neutral.

● Automatic transmission: press the brake Fig. 30 Instrument console: light panel. Turn signal and main beam lever pedal and move the selector lever to the P position or into N. Turn the switch to the required position ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- ››› Fig. 30. tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not press the accelerator. Sym- Ignition Ignition is bol switched off switched on Start-Stop system* Fog lights, dipped Light off or daytime beam and side When you stop and release the clutch pedal,  driving light on. the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. lights off. The ignition remains switched on. The “Coming Automatic control of home” and “Leav- dipped beam and ing home” guide Fig. 31 Turn signal and main beam lever.  daytime running ››› in Introduction on page 196 lights may be  light. switched on. More the lever to the required position: ››› page 196   Side light on. 1 Right turn light: right-hand parking light (ignition switched off). » Dipped beam Dipped beam  headlight off switched on. 21 The essentials

2 Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig- ● When towing or being towed Knob Function nition switched off).  Switches interior lights off. 3 Main beam on: control lamp  lit up on ››› page 125 the instrument panel.   Switches interior lights on. 4 Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con- trol lamp  lit up. Switches door contact control on Interior lights (central position). Lever all the way down to switch it off. The interior lights come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a  door is opened or the key is removed ››› page 122 from the ignition.  The lights go off a few seconds after all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the ignition is switched on. Hazard warning lights  Turning the reading light on and off

 ››› page 126

Fig. 33 Detail of headliner: variant 1

Fig. 32 Dashboard: switch for hazard warning lights.

Switched on, for example:

● When approaching a traffic jam Fig. 34 Detail of headliner: variant 2 ● In an emergency ● The vehicle has broken down

22 The essentials

Windscreen wipers and window More the lever to the required position: More the lever to the required position: wiper blade 0  Windscreen wipers off. Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer function is activated by pushing the 5 Windscreen wipers interval wipe.  lever forwards, and simultaneously the Using the control ››› Fig. 35 A adjust windscreen wipers start. 1  the interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor. Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper 6  will wipe the window approximately ev- 2  Slow wipe. ery six seconds.

3  Continuous wipe. The rear window wash function is acti- 7  vated by pressing the lever, and the Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. rear wiper starts simultaneously. 4  Hold the lever down for more time to increase the wipe frequency. Fig. 35 Operating the windscreen wiper and ››› in Introduction on page 128 rear wiper.   ››› page 128  ››› page 56

23 The essentials

Easy Connect

Menu settings: Vehicle

Fig. 36 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 37 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

The actual number of menus available and or, press the Infotainment button  to go to Pressing the menu button  will always take the name of the various options in these me- the Vehicle menu ››› Fig. 37. you to the last menu used. nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open Any changes made using the settings menus and equipment. the Vehicle settings menu. are automatically saved on closing those ● Switch the ignition on. ● To select a function in the menu, press the menus. desired button. ● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on. ● Press the Infotainment button  and When the function button check box is activa- then the Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 36, ted , the function is active.

24 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 201

Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 260

Tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning Winter tyres ››› page 261 value

Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touch Light assist ››› page 120 signalling.

Lights Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 127

“Coming home/Leaving home” Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 124 function

Front Assist (emergency brak- Activation/deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis- ››› page 219 ing assistance system) play Driver assistance Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 230

Parking and ma- Parking and manoeuvring set- Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound ››› page 227 noeuvring tings treble

Ambient lighting – Background lighting, switch-off, colour ››› page 127

Rear view mirrors Activate/deactivate folding after parking page 130 Mirrors and wind- ››› screen wipers Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipe in case of rain, wipe when reversing ››› page 23

Electric windows control Convenience open function, all, only driver page 119 Opening and clos- ››› ing Central locking Unlocking doors, automatic lock when driving, interior monitoring ››› page 110

Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Advice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed dis- Instrument panel – ››› page 28 play, speed warning, oil temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset data for “total calculation”

Date and time – Time source, time, time zone, time format, date, date format ››› page 100 »

25 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, pressure –

Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change Service – ››› page 33 service

All Restore all settings Factory settings – Individual Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could distract you from traffic.

26 The essentials

Driver information system ■ Since refuelling ■ Long-term Introduction Assistance systems ››› page 30 Navigation  page 178 With the ignition switched on, it is possible to ››› read the different functions of the display by Audio ›››  page 171 scrolling through the menus. Telephone ›››  page 189 In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Vehicle status ››› page 31 the multifunction display can only be operated with the steering wheel buttons. WARNING Fig. 39 Right side of the multifunction steering The number of menus displayed on the in- wheel: control buttons. Any distraction may lead to an accident, strument panel will vary according to the ve- with the risk of injury. hicle electronics and equipment. The driver information system is controlled ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- with the multifunction steering wheel buttons A specialised workshop will be able to pro- trols when driving. ››› Fig. 39 or with the windscreen wiper lever gramme or modify additional functions, ac- ››› Fig. 38 (if the vehicle is not equipped with cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- multifunction steering wheel). ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service. Operating the instrument panel Some menu options can only be read when menus Enabling the main menu the vehicle is at a standstill. ● Switch the ignition on. As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it ● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, will not be possible to read the menus press button ››› Fig. 38 1 on the windscreen ››› page 32. Some warning messages can wiper lever or button  on the multifunction be confirmed and made to disappear with steering wheel ››› Fig. 39. the windscreen wiper lever button or the mul- ● If using the wiper lever: to display the main tifunction steering wheel button. screen or to return to the main menu from an- The information system also provides the fol- other menu, hold down the rocker button lowing information and displays (depending ››› Fig. 38 2 . on the vehicle's equipment): ● If handled with the multi-function steering wheel: the main menu list will not be dis- Driving data ››› page 28 Fig. 38 Windscreen wipers lever: control buttons. played. To go from point to point in the main » ■ Since start 27 The essentials

menu, press button   or   several Selection menu Menu Function times ››› Fig. 39. Display of the current warning or in- Menu Function Select a submenu Vehicle formation texts and other system status components, according to equip- Information and possible configura- ● Press the rocker switch Fig. 38 2 on the Driving ment page 31. ››› tions of the multifunction display ››› data windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn the (MFD) ››› page 28. thumbwheel of the multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 39 until the desired option ap- Assis- Information and possible configura- Driving data pears marked on the menu. tance tions of the driver assistance systems systems ››› page 30. ● The selected option is displayed between The multifunction display (MFA) shows differ- two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is Information of the enabled navigation ent values for the journey and the consump- displayed on the right:  system: when a route guidance is activated, the turning arrows and prox- tion. ● To consult the submenu option, press but- imity bars are displayed. The appear- ton ››› Fig. 38 1 on the windscreen wiper Naviga- ance is similar to the Easy Connect Changing between display modes on the lever or button  on the multifunction steer- tion system. MFD If route guidance is not activated, the ing wheel Fig. 39. ››› direction of travel (compass) and the ● In vehicles without multifunction steering name of the street along which you wheel: press the rocker switch  on the Making changes according to the menu are driving are shown ››› page 178. windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 38. ● With the rocker switch on the windscreen Station display on the radio. ● In vehicles with multi-function wheel: rotate wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi- Track name on the CD. the thumbwheel Fig. 39. Audio ››› function steering wheel, make the desired Track name in Media mode changes. To increase or decrease the values ››› page 172. Multifunction display memory more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. Information and possible pre-instal- Tele- The multifunction display is equipped with ● lation settings for mobile phone Mark or confirm the selection with button phone three memories that work automatically: ››› Fig. 38 1 on the windscreen wiper lever or ››› page 189.  ● button on the multifunction steering wheel In a racing circuit, measurement and since start ››› Fig. 39. Lap tim- memorisation of lap times by the ve- ● since refuelling er* hicle and comparison with previously measured best times ››› page 30. ● total value. On the screen display, you can read which memory is currently displayed.

28 The essentials

Toggle between memories with the igni- Erasing a memory manually Menu Function tion on and the memory displayed ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. Approximate distance in km that ● Press the  button on the windscreen ● Hold the  button of the multifunction can still be travelled with the fuel  wiper lever or the button of the multifunc- steering wheel or the  button of the multi- Operating remaining in the tank, assuming tion steering wheel. function wheel pressed down for about 2 range the same style of driving is main- seconds. tained. This is calculated using Menu Function the current fuel consumption. Personalising the displays This indicates the hours (h) and Display and storage of the values for Travelling minutes (min) since the ignition the journey and the consumption time In the Easy Connect system you can adjust was switched on. from when the ignition is switched on which of the possible displays of the multi- to when it is switched off. Distance covered in km (m) after If the journey is continued in less function display (MFD) can be shown on the Journey Since switching on the ignition. than 2 hours after the ignition is instrument panel display with the  button start switched off, the new data is added and the SETTINGS function button The average speed will be shown to the data already stored in the ››› page 24. after a distance of about 100 me- memory. The memory will automati- tres has been travelled. Other- Average cally be deleted if the journey is in- wise horizontal lines are dis- Data summary speed terrupted for more than 2 hours. played. The value shown is updated approximately every 5 sec- Display and storage of the values for Menu Function onds. Since re- the journey and the consumption. By The current fuel consumption dis- fuelling refuelling, the memory will be erased Digital Current play operates throughout the Current speed displayed in digi- automatically. display of fuel con- journey, in litres/100 km; and with tal format. speed The memory records the values for a sumption the engine running and the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. specific number of partial trips, up to Speed warn- If the stored speed is exceeded a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or ing at --- (between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 - 99 hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 After turning on the ignition, average fuel consumption in li- km/h or Speed 155 mph), an audible warning is Long-term km or 9999 km, depending on the warning at given together with a visual warn- model of instrument panel. On tres/100 km will be displayed after travelling about 100 metres. --- mph ing. reaching either of these limitsa), the Average Otherwise horizontal lines are memory is automatically erased and fuel con- Oil temper- Updated engine oil temperature displayed. The value shown is up- starts to count from 0 again. sumption ature digital display dated approximately every 5 sec- a) It varies according to the instrument panel version. onds. Coolant ® Digital display of the current tem- ACT *: Depending on the equip- temperature perature of the liquid coolant. » ment, number of active cylinders. gauge

29 The essentials

Menu Function Assistance systems menu ● Vehicles with multi-function wheel: press the key  or  . Information about the vehicle’s Menu Function Convenience main convenience consumers. It Menu “Stop” consumers is displayed by means of a con- Front As- Switching the monitoring system sumption indicator bar. sist on and off ››› page 219. The timer starts. If there are existing laps and they are Eco tips Tips on how to save fuel. Switching the fatigue detection on included in the statistics, it will begin Fatigue or off (pause recommendation) Start with the number of laps in question. Reset data detection* Reset journey data when setting It is only possible to begin with a new “when set- ››› page 230. off. first lap if the statistics have been re- ting off” set first in the Statistics menu. Reset data The timer begins when the vehicle for “total Timer* Reset travel journey to zero. sets off. calcula- Since If the vehicle is already moving, the tion” You can access the timer via the selection start timer begins once the vehicle has menu ››› page 28. stopped. Storing a speed with the speed warning It allows you to manually time lap times on a Statis- The Statistics menu is displayed ● Select the display Speed warning at racing circuit, memorise them and compare tics on the screen. --- km/h (--- mph) them to the vehicle's previous best times. ● Press the button  on the windscreen The following menus can be displayed: Menu “Lap” wiper lever or the button  on the multifunction steering wheel to store the current speed ● Stop The timer of the current lap stops and a new lap starts immediately. The New lap and activate the warning. ● Lap time for the lap you have just comple- ● Activate: adjust to the desired speed within ● Pause ted is included in the statistics. 5 seconds using the rocker switch  on the ● Partial time For approx. 5 seconds a partial time Partial windscreen wiper lever or by turning the is displayed. The timer continues in ● Statistics time thumbwheel on the multifunction steering parallel. wheel. Next, press the button  or  again or wait several seconds. The speed is Change from one menu to another The current lap timer will be interrup- Stop ted. The lap does not end. The Pause stored and the warning activated. ● Vehicles without multifunction steering menu is displayed. ● Deactivate: press the button  or  wheel: press the rocker switch  on the The stored speed is deleted. windscreen wiper lever.

30 The essentials

Menu “Pause” Menu “Statistics” Status display

Continue The interrupted timer continues. View of the latest lap times: – total time Bonnet, rear lid and doors open A new timer starts. The halted lap New lap – best lap time ends and is included in the statistics. – worst lap time – average lap duration The timer of the current lap ends and Interr. A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and is cancelled. It is not included in the lap a total duration of 99 hours, 59 mi- statistics. nutes and 59 seconds. If one of the 2 limits is reached, you The current timer ends. The lap is in- End will have to reset the statistics in order cluded in the statistics. to begin a new timer.

Menu “Partial time” Back This returns to the previous menu.

For approx. 5 seconds a partial time is Reset- Partial All the memorised statistical data are displayed. The timer continues in par- ting to time reset. allel. zero

The timer of the current lap stops and WARNING a new lap starts immediately. The New lap time for the lap you have just comple- Do your best to avoid handling the timer ted is included in the statistics. while driving. The current lap timer will be interrup- ● Only set the timer or consult statistics Stop ted. The lap does not end. The Pause when the vehicle is stationary. menu is displayed. ● While driving, do not handle the timer in complicated driving situations. Fig. 40 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: left front door open; D: right back door open (only in 5-door vehicles).

When the ignition is switched on or when driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are »

31 The essentials

open will be indicated on the instrument pan- Priority 1 warning (red symbols) windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- el display, and, as applicable, this will be indi- ing wheel*. cated audibly. The display may vary accord- Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible ing to the type of instrument panel fitted. warnings. Note  Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Control and warning lamps on page 103! ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af- Illustra- Key to ›››Fig. 40 Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If nec- ter you switch the ignition on again. tion essary, request assistance from specialised person- ● The saving tips do not appear in all situa- nel.  Do not continue driving! tions, but rather with a large separation of A The bonnet is open or is not properly time. closed ››› page 244. Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

 Do not continue driving! Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible B The rear lid is open or is not properly warnings. Speed warning device closed ››› page 12. A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in The speed warning device warns the driver  Do not continue driving! Control and warning lamps on page 103 C, D A vehicle door is open or is not proper- Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If nec- when they have exceeded the pre-set speed ly closed ››› page 110. essary, request assistance from specialised person- limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning nel. signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and the driver message Speed limit excee- ››› page 99  Informative text ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the instrument panel. The warning lamp  Information relating to different vehicle processes. switches off after reducing speed below the stored maximum limit. Warning and information messages Speed warning programming is recommen- The system runs a check on certain compo- Saving tips ded if you wish to be reminded of a maximum nents and functions when the ignition is speed, such as when travelling in a country Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in switched on and while the vehicle is moving. with different speed limits or for a maximum conditions that increase fuel consumption. Faults in the operation are displayed on the speed for winter tyres. Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- screen using red and yellow symbols and cations appear automatically only with the The warning limit can be set from 30 to 250 messages on the instrument panel display efficiency programme. After a time, the tips km/h (19 to 155 mph) ››› page 30. The adjust- (››› page 34, ››› page 34) and, in some ca- will disappear automatically. ment is made at 5 km/h (3 mph) intervals. ses, with audible warnings. The display may vary according to the type of instrument pan- If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately el fitted. after it appears, press any button on the 32 The essentials

Note SEAT distinguishes between services with en- Vehicles without text messages, a spanner gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and symbol  is displayed on the instrument ● Please bear in mind that, even with the services without engine oil change (e.g. In- panel and a figure given in km. speed warning function, it is still important spection). to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with The kilometres indicated are the maximum the speedometer and to observe the legal In vehicles with Services established by number of kilometres that can be travelled speed limits. time or mileage, the service intervals are al- until the next service. After a few seconds, the ● The speed limit warning function in the ready pre-defined. display mode changes. A clock symbol appears and the number of days until the next version for some countries warns you at a In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- speed of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a facto- service is due. vals are determined individually. Thanks to ry-set speed limit. technological progress, maintenance work Vehicles with text messages, Service in has been greatly reduced. Because of the --- km (miles) or --- days is displayed technology used by SEAT, with this service on the instrument panel. Service intervals you only need to change the oil when the vehicle so requires. To calculate this variation Service due (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use When the service date is due, an audible and individual driving styles are considered. warning is given when the ignition is switched The advance warning first appears 20 days on and the spanner displayed on the screen before the date established for the corre- flashes for a few seconds . sponding service. The kilometres (miles) remaining until the next service are always Vehicles with text messages, Service in rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and --- km or --- days is displayed on the in- the time is given in complete days. The cur- strument panel. rent service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on- Check a service warning ly lines are visible on the display. With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current Inspection reminder service notification can be read: When the Service date is approaching, when Fig. 41 Instrument panel Press and hold the button 0.0/SET for more the ignition is switched on a Service remind- than 5 seconds to consult the service mes- The service interval indication appears on the er is displayed. sage ››› Fig. 41 2 . » instrument panel display ››› Fig. 41 1 .

33 The essentials

When the service date has passed, a minus Cruise control ● Increasing stored speed during CCS regu- sign is displayed in front of the number of kilo- lation: press button 2 in . The vehicle metres or days. accelerates until the new stored speed. Operating the cruise control sys- ● Reducing stored speed during CCS regula- Vehicles with text messages: Service since tem (CCS)* --- km or --- days ago will be shown on tion: press button 2 in  to lower the the display. speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). Speed is reduced until reaching the new stored speed. Resetting service interval display ● Switching off the CCS: Move switch If the service was not carried out by a SEAT ››› Fig. 42 1 to . The system is disconnec- dealership, the display can be reset as fol- ted and the memorised speed is deleted. lows: ››› in Cruise control operation on ● Switch off the ignition, press and hold the  page 218 button 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 41 2 . ››› page 217 ● Switch ignition back on.  ● Release the button 0.0/SET and press it Fig. 42 Left of the steering column: CCS again for the next 20 seconds. switch and controls.

Note ● Switching on the CCS: Move switch Warning lamps ››› Fig. 42 1 to . The system is on. If no ● The service message disappears after a speed has been programmed, the system will few seconds, when the engine is started or Control and warning lamps not control it. when OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper lever, or OK on the multifunc- ● Activate the CCS: Press button ››› Fig. 42 Red warning lamps tion steering wheel. 2 in the  area. The current speed is Notification central lamp: additional infor- ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in memorised and controlled.  mation on the instrument panel display which the battery has been disconnected ● Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move Parking brake on page 200. for a long period of time, it is not possible to switch ››› Fig. 42 1 to  or push the  ››› calculate the date of the next service. brake. The cruise control system is switched  Fault in the brake system ››› page 200. Therefore the service interval display may off temporarily. not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the ● Reactivating the CCS: Press button  Fault in the steering system ››› page 209. maximum service intervals permitted Fig. 42 2 in . The memorised speed is ›››  page 262. ››› Driver or passenger has not fastened seat saved and controlled again.  belt ››› page 63.

34 The essentials

Yellow warning lamps Fault in the lighting of the vehicle  Mobile telephone battery charge status  ››› page 120. ››› page 189.  Notification central lamp: additional information on the instrument panel display Windshield cleaning fluid too low  Risk of freezing ››› page 100.  ››› page 128.  Front brake pads worn ››› page 200.  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 215.  Low engine oil level ››› page 247. Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by Start-Stop system unavailable the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation .  Fault in the gearbox page 207. ››› page 215. ››› page 201.  ›››  Low consumption driving status  ASR manually deactivated ››› page 201. Other warning lamps ››› page 100.

 Fault in the ABS ››› page 201. Turn lights or emergency lights on ››› in Control and warning lamps  ››› page 120.  Rear fog light switched on ››› page 120.  on page 103  Trailer turn signals ››› page 120.  Fault in the emission control system ››› page 103 ››› page 213.  Press the foot brake ››› page 204.  Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault  Cruise control ››› page 217.  in the management of the diesel engine ››› page 213.  Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 120. Fault in the petrol engine management  Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not  ››› page 213. properly closed ››› page 31.

 Particulate filter blocked ››› page 213.  Engine cooling fluid ››› page 248.

 Fault in the steering system ››› page 209.  Engine oil pressure ››› page 247.

 Tyre monitor system ››› page 260.  Fault in the battery ››› page 253.

 Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 102. Electronic immobiliser active  ››› page 197. Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten- Service interval display ››› page 33.  sioners ››› page 73.  Mobile telephone is connected via Blue- Front passenger front airbag is disa-   tooth® ››› page 189.  bled ››› page 73.

35 The essentials

Gearbox lever go and then forwards to select reverse +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards ››› Fig. 43 R . (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to go down a gear. Manual gearbox ● Release the clutch. ››› in Basic information on  ››› in Changing gears on page 203  page 204  ››› page 203  ››› page 203  ››› page 36 Automatic gearbox*

Manual release of the selector lever Fig. 43 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever ››› Fig. 43.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. ● Move the gearbox lever to the required position. Fig. 44 Automatic transmission: selector lever positions. ● Release the clutch. P Parking lock Fig. 45 Manual release of the selector lever. Selecting reverse gear R Reverse gear ● If there is a fault in the power system to the Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot N Neutral (idling) right down. electronic selector lever lock system (flat D Drive (forward) battery, blown fuse) or the system itself is ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it faulty, the selector lever cannot be moved downwards, move it to the left as far as it will S Sports program: drive (forward) from position P in the normal manner, which prevents the vehicle from being moved. The 36 The essentials selector lever must be unlocked using the ● Also loosen the cover at the rear. ● Press the interlock button on the selector manual release. ● Press the yellow plastic part with your fin- lever knob at the same time and move the se- ger in the direction indicated by the arrow lector lever to position N (if the selector lever ● Apply the handbrake. ››› Fig. 45. is moved back to position P, it will lock again). ● Pull gently on both sides at the front of the selector lever cover.

Air conditioning

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 46 In the centre console: Climatronic control panel.

Buttons/controls 4 Automatic air conditioning mode 9 Selected blower speed 1 Interior temperature setting 5 Defrost or demist windscreen Buttons/controls 6 Air flow direction Display 10 Set blower speed 7 Air recirculation 2 Selected interior temperature 11 Interior temperature sensor 8 Cooling on/off 3 Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit 12 Defrost or demist windscreen »

37 The essentials

13 Automatic mode 17 Air recirculation ››› in General notes on page 146 14 Air distribution to windows 18 Cooling on/off  15 Air distribution to upper body ››› page 151 16 Air distribution to footwells 

How does the manual air conditioning* work?

A Temperature 2 A/C: Switching the cooling system on B Blower C Air distribution  – Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist or defrost.  – Air distribution to upper body.  – Air distribution to footwell.  – Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell. Fig. 47 In the centre console: manual air con- 1 Air recirculation ditioning control panel.

Control position Button Basic positions Air vents 4 A B C 1 2

Windscreen and side window Switched on automati- Open and direct towards the Full right 3 or 4 Switched off defrost or demist  callya) side window

Required tempera- Mild heating 2 or 3 Do not switch on Do not switch on Opening ture  / 

Anti-clockwise as Briefly 4, then 2 It is switched on Cool as quickly as possible Switched on Opening far as it will go or 3  automaticallyb)

38 The essentials

Control position Button Basic positions Air vents 4 A B C 1 2

Required tempera- Open and direct towards the Optimum cooling 1 or 2 Do not switch on Switched on ture  roof

Anti-clockwise as Required posi- Fresh air mode - blower Do not switch on Switched off Opening far as it will go tion  a) The lamp in button 2 lights up, even if not all of the conditions for cooling system operations are met. Cooling is indicated as available once all of the conditions are met ›››  page 149, Manual operation. b) In certain conditions, air recirculation mode can switch on automatically ›››  page 150, a lamp illuminates in the  button.

 ››› in General notes on page 146  ››› page 149

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

A Temperature B Blower C Air distribution  – Air distribution towards the windscreen in order to demist or defrost.  – Air distribution to upper body.  – Air distribution to footwell.  – Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell. Fig. 48 Centre console: heating system and 1 Air recirculation » fresh air controls.

39 The essentials

Control position Basic positions Button 1 Air vents 4 A B C

Windscreen and side window Open and direct towards Full right 3 or 4 Switched off defrost or demist  the side window

Mild heating Required temperature 2 or 3  /  Do not switch on Opening

Anti-clockwise as far as it Fresh air mode - blower Required position Do not switch on Opening will go 

 ››› in General notes on page 146  ››› page 148

40 The essentials

Fluid level control Fuel ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. ● Rest it on the upper part of the fuel tank Filling capacities flap ››› Fig. 49 B.

Closing the fuel tank cap Capacities ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as 55 litres, of which 7 litres Fuel tank far as it will go. act as reserve. ● Close the lid. Windscreen washer fluid container in ver- 3.5 litres sion without headlight  ››› in Refuelling on page 242 washer Windscreen washer  ››› page 241 fluid container in ver- 5.4 litres sions with headlight washer

Fig. 49 Rear part of the vehicle, right side: tank lid/tank lid with unscrewed cap.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automatically using the central locking.

Opening the fuel tank cap ● Press the fuel tank flap in the direction of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 49 A and open it in the direction of the arrow 2 .

41 The essentials

Oil ● Zone A : do not add oil. If the engine oil level is too low ● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level You can get information about the correct en- in that zone. gine oil for your vehicle in your specialised ● Zone C : add oil until zone B . shop. If you have to change your engine oil, use this oil. Topping up engine oil If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening ble, in the event of an emergency you can ››› Fig. 51. change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L of the next oil until the next oil change: ● Add oil slowly. ● At the same time, check the level to ensure – Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, you do not add too much. VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or Fig. 50 Engine oil dipstick. API SN. ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. – Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4. Engine oil additives Have the oil changed by a specialised work- No type of additive should be mixed with the shop. engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty. Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW 504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00 Engine oil specifications could increase consumption and the vehicle’s CO2 emissions. Diesel engines  Type of Specifica- Fig. 51 In the engine compartment: Engine oil Engine type filler cap. Service tion Recommended by SEAT

The level is measured using the dipstick loca- Set Service SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to With particulate and Flexible ted in the engine compartment VW 507 00 guarantee high SEAT engine performance. filter (DPF)a) Service Inter- ›››  page 246. vals The oil indicator must be between zones A a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may C A ››› page 247 and . It can never go above zone . damage the engine. 

42 The essentials

Coolant even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- Brake fluid tection is not required. If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise antifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain optimal anti-corrosion protection. The mixture of G13 with G12 Fig. 52 Engine compartment: coolant expan- Fig. 53 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser- sion tank cap. plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green- voir cap. blue) engine coolants will significantly re- The coolant tank is located in the engine duce anti-corrosion protection and should The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- compartment ›››  page 246. therefore be avoided. gine compartment ›››  page 246. When the engine is cold, replace the coolant   ››› in Topping up the coolant level The level should be between the and when the level is below .  on page 250 marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical Service. Coolant specifications  ››› page 248 The engine cooling system is supplied from ››› in Checking brake fluid level on page 250 the factory with a specially treated mixture of  water and at least 40 % of the additive G13 ››› page 250 (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the  necessary frost protection down to -25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably rai- ses the boiling point of the coolant. To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %,

43 The essentials

Windscreen washer  ››› in Introduction on page 252  ››› page 251

Fig. 54 In the engine compartment: cap of the windscreen washer tank.

The windscreen washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 246. To top up, mix water with a product recommended by SEAT. In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.

 ››› page 251

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 246. It does not require maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

44 The essentials

Underneath the instrument panel Emergencies ››› in Introduction on page 83 ● Carefully tilt the cover in the direction indi-  cated by the arrow and remove it ››› Fig. 55. Fuses ››› page 83 ● After changing the fuse, replace the cover  on the dash panel in the direction opposite Fuse location that is indicated by the arrow so that the cover tabs fit into the slots on the dash panel. Replacing a blown fuse Subsequently, press down on the cover to close.

In the engine compartment Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box cover ››› Fig. 56.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash panel by colours Fig. 55 On the dashboard on the driver side: lid of the fuse box. Colour Amp rating Black 1 Fig. 57 Image of a blown fuse.

Purple 3 Preparation Light brown 5 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- Brown 7.5 cal equipment. ● Open the corresponding fuse box Red 10 ›››  page 84. Blue 15 Identifying a blown fuse Yellow 20 A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 56 In the engine compartment: lid of the White or transparent 25 ››› Fig. 57. fuse box. Green 30 Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown. » Orange 40 45 The essentials

To replace a fuse Full-LED main head- Type Action in the event of a punc- ● Remove the fuse. lights ture ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with identical amperage rating (same colour and LEDs What to do first markings) and identical size. ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse Front fog light Type ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and box lid. in a safe place as far away from traffic as Fog/cornering lights* H8 possible. ● Apply the handbrake. Rear bulb light Type Bulbs ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. Brake light/tail light P21/5W ● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. P21/5W (side panel) Bulbs (12 V) Side lights ● Automatic transmission: Move the selector R5W (rear lid) lever to position P. Full-LED headlights are designed to last the Turn signal PY21W lifetime of the car and cannot be replaced. If ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from the headlight becomes damaged, go to a Retro fog light P21W your vehicle. specialised workshop. ● Have the vehicle tool kit* ›››  page 78 Reverse lights P21W and the spare wheel ›››  page 259 ready. Below, the light source used for all functions is ● Observe the applicable legislation for each broken down. LED rear lights Type country (reflective vest, warning triangles, Halogen headlights. Type Turn signal PY21W etc.). ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and Daytime running light/side Retro fog light P21W P21W SLL wait in a safe place (for instance behind the light Reverse lights P21W roadside crash barrier). Dipped beam headlights H7 LL The remaining functions work with LEDs WARNING Main beam headlights H7 LL ● Always observe the above steps and pro- Turn signal PY21W  ››› page 86 tect yourself and other road users. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car

46 The essentials

with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 58 3 into ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is cle from moving. the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break distributed throughout the tyre. automatically. ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the ● Remove the lid from the filling tube valve. Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ››› Fig. 58 3 and screw the open end of the ● Repeat the inflation process. tube into the tyre valve. ture kit ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop the tyre with the contents of the sealant bot- and request assistance from an authorised tle. technician. ● Remove the bottle from the valve. ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ing the tool ››› Fig. 58 1 . ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding Inflating the tyre 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 58 2 to the in- ››› Fig. 58 5 into the tyre valve. strument cluster, within the driver's visual ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed field. ››› Fig. 58 7 . ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ● Start the engine and leave it running. ›››  page 81. Fig. 58 Standard display: contents of the anti- puncture kit. ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 58 9 into the vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 138. ››› in TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre The anti-puncture kit is located under the  Mobility System)* on page 80 ● Turn the air compressor on with the floor panel in the luggage compartment. ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 58 8 .  ››› page 79 Sealing the tyre ● Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use A maximum of 8 minutes. the ››› Fig. 58 1 tool to remove the insert. ● Place it on a clean surface. Disconnect the air compressor. ● ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. ››› Fig. 58 10 .

47 The essentials

Changing a wheel 7 Clip for wheel bolt cover Fitting 8 Spare set of bulbs ● Press the wheel trim onto the wheel at the cut out designed for the valve. Vehicle tool kit* Before stowing the jack again, screw down ● the arm as far as it will go. Press the wheel trim on both sides in the direction of the valve so that it fits correctly in place around all the perimeter.  ››› in What to do first on page 46 CAUTION  ››› page 78 ● Press down by hand, do not hit the wheel trim! Knocking it sharply, particularly at points where the wheel trim has not yet been inserted, could result in damage to Wheel cover the wheel trim guiding and centring elements. ● Before fitting the trim on a steel wheel at- Fig. 59 Vehicle tool kit. tached with an anti-theft wheel bolt, make sure the bolt is in the hole in the valve area The vehicle tool kit and the jack are stored in ››› page 49, Anti-theft wheel bolts*. a box on the spare wheel or in the spare ● Where trim is fitted at a later date, ensure wheel well. There is also enough space for enough air inflow is guaranteed in order to the towing bracket ball coupling. The box is cool the brake system. strapped to the spare wheel with tape.

The vehicle tool kit includes the following parts (depending on equipment): Fig. 60 Remove the wheel cover. 1 Screwdriver 2 Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts Removing 3 Towline anchorage ● Place the hook from the vehicle tool kit* on 4 Wire hook for removing hub caps the reinforced edge of the wheel trim. 5 Jack ● Insert the box spanner through the hook, supporting it on the tyre and remove the 6 Box spanner for wheel bolts wheel trim.

48 The essentials

Wheel bolt caps Anti-theft wheel bolts* ● Check the tightening torque as soon as possible with a torque wrench.

Note down the code number stamped on the front of the adapter or of the anti-theft wheel bolt. You will need this number to obtain a spare adapter from the SEAT original accessories programme. You should always have a wheel bolt adapter as part of your vehicle tools.

Fig. 61 Pull off the wheel bolt cap. Fig. 62 Anti-theft wheel bolt with adapter. Loosening and tightening wheel Removing Anti-theft wheel bolts (one bolt per wheel) bolts ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the can only be loosened or tightened using a cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 61. factory-supplied adapter. ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. ● Pull off the hub cap or bolt cover. ● Insert the adapter B ››› Fig. 62 with its Fitting toothed side as far as it will go on the interior ● Insert the caps as far as they will go over toothing of the anti-theft wheel bolt A so the wheel bolts. that only the outer hexagonal is protruding. ● Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over The wheel bolt caps are stored in a box on adapter B . the spare wheel or in the spare wheel well. ● Loosen or firmly tighten the wheel bolt Fig. 63 Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts. » ››› page 49. ● After removing the adapter, replace the hub cap or the anti-theft wheel bolt cover.

49 The essentials

Loosening wheel bolts Raising the vehicle ● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go1). ● Grip the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt about one turn anti-clockwise ››› Fig. 63.

Tightening wheel bolts ● Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go1). ● Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and tighten the bolt firmly by turning Fig. 64 Wheel change: support points of the jack. clockwise.

WARNING The wheel bolts should only be loosened slightly (about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!

Fig. 65 Fitting the jack.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slippery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slipping ››› .

1) The corresponding adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts ››› page 49. 50 The essentials

● Find the support point on the strut (sunken CAUTION the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- area) closest to the wheel to be changed ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ››› Fig. 64. The vehicle must not be raised on the ting the wheel. crossbar. Only place the jack* on the ● Turn the jack*, located below the strut sup- points designed for this purpose on the port point, to raise it until the tab is below the strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam- housing provided ››› Fig. 65 . aged. Tyres with compulsory direction of ● Align the jack* so that the tab “grips” onto rotation the housing provided on the strut and the mobile base is resting on the ground ››› Fig. 65 Removing and fitting a wheel A directional tread pattern can be identified . The base plate 2 should fall vertically with by the arrows on the sidewall that point in the respect to the support point. Change the wheel after loosening the wheel direction of rotation. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. wheel to guarantee optimum properties of slightly lifted off the ground. this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises, Taking off the wheel wear and aquaplaning. WARNING ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. spanner and place them on a clean surface. If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* ● Take off the wheel. could slip or sink, respectively, with the re- with care as this means the tyre does not of- sultant risk of injury. fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- Putting on the spare wheel ticular importance when the road surface is ● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* supplied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation wet. direction, observe the instructions in even those approved for other SEAT mod- Replace the punctured tyre as soon as possi- ››› page 51. els could slip, with the consequent risk of ble and restore the obligatory and correct di- injury. ● Mount the wheel. rection of rotation of all tyres. ● Only mount the jack* on the support ● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and points designed for this purpose on the tighten them loosely with a box spanner. strut, and always align the jack correctly. If Subsequent work you do not, the jack* could slip as it does ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. risk of injury! using the wheel brace. ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap ● The height of the parked vehicle can change as a result of variations in tempera- The wheel bolts should be clean and turn ››› page 48. » ture and loading. easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect 51 The essentials

● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- Rim size Rim offset Tyre size Emergency towing of the ve- tion. a) ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the 5J x 14 35 mm 175/70 hicle spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug- 6J x 15b) 38 mm 185/60 gage compartment ›››  page 141. Towing 6J x 15b) 38 mm 195/55 ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted tyre as soon as possible. a) Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater than 9 mm. ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica- b) tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock no greater than 13 mm. ›››  page 260. ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel Remove the wheel trims before fitting snow bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- chains. que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Meanwhile, drive carefully. CAUTION ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as Chains must be removed when roads are possible. free of snow. Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly. Snow chains

Use

Snow chains should only be used on the front wheels. In winter road conditions, snow chains not on- Fig. 66 Right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage screwed in. ly help to improve grip but also improve the braking capacity. For technical reasons snow chains may only be used on tyres with the following wheel rim/tyre combinations.

52 The essentials

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle The power steering only works when the igni- ● The tow rope must be taut before you drive tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving, off. provided that the battery is sufficiently charged. Otherwise, it will need more force. ● Release the clutch very carefully when starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac- Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all celerate gently (automatic gearbox). times.

Driving style  ››› page 81 Towing requires some experience, especially Fig. 67 Right side of the rear bumper: towline when using a tow rope. Both drivers should anchorage. realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex- perienced drivers should not attempt to tow. Tow-starting Towline anchorages Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle ● Attach the bar or rope to the towline an- If the engine will not start, first try starting it and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. chorages. using the battery of another vehicle When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- ››› page 54. You should only attempt to tow- It is located with the vehicle's tools ways a risk of overloading and damaging the start a vehicle if charging the battery does ›››  page 78. anchorage points. not work. This is done by leveraging wheel The towline anchorages are located under movement. ● Screw the front towline anchorage into the the floor panel in the luggage compartment. screw connection ››› Fig. 66 and tighten it When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- with the wheel brace. Switch on the ignition so that the turn signals, gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- windscreen wipers and windscreen washer tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the The rear towline anchorage is under the rear can work. Ensure that the steering wheel is catalytic converter. bumper, on the right ››› Fig. 67. unlocked and moves freely. ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off. Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles Tow rope or tow bar ● Press the clutch and hold the pedal down. with a manual gearbox. With an automatic The tow bar offers increased safety and a gearbox, place the lever in N. ● Switch the ignition on. lower risk of damage. ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The clutch. The tow rope is recommended when there is brake servo does not work when the engine is no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does switched off. ● As soon as the engine has started, press the not damage the vehicle. clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.

53 The essentials

How to jump start ● Please note the safety warnings referring ● The discharged battery must be properly to working in the engine compartment connected to the vehicle electrical system.  page 244. Jump leads ››› ● The jump leads should be checked in a ● The non-insulated parts of the battery specialist vehicle battery shop. The jump lead must have a sufficient wire clamps must not be allowed to touch. Addi- cross section. tionally, the jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal If the engine fails to start because of a dis- parts of the vehicle. Risk of short circuit! How to jump start: description charged battery, the battery can be connec- ● Do not connect the negative lead to the ted to the battery of another vehicle to start negative terminal of the discharged bat- the engine. tery. In the event of sparks when starting Both batteries need to have nominal voltage the engine, the explosive gas given off by of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the back-up bat- the battery could catch fire. tery should not be notably less than the ● Position the jump leads in such a way drained battery. that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compart- Jump leads must comply with standard DIN ment. 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- ● Do not bend over the battery. Risk of acid tions). The wire cross section must be at least 2 burns! 25 mm for petrol engines and at least Fig. 68 Diagram of connections for vehicles 35 mm2 for diesel engines. ● The screw plugs on the battery cells must without Start Stop system be screwed in firmly. Jump leads ● Keep sources of fire (flames, lit cigarettes, etc.) away from the battery) - Dan- Positive cable – usually red ger of explosion! Negative cable – usually black ● Never use the jump leads on batteries in which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk WARNING of explosion and acid burns. ● A flat battery can also freeze at temperatures slightly below 0°C (+32°F). Do not at- Note tempt to start the vehicle with a frozen bat- ● The vehicles must not touch each other, tery. Risk of explosion! as electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. Fig. 69 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start Stop system 54 The essentials

Jump lead terminal connections Starting ● The battery providing assistance must 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the have the same voltage as the flat battery ››› . boosting battery and let it run at idling (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to speed. ply could result in an explosion. the positive + terminal of the vehicle 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ● Never use jump leads when one of the with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 68. flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! until the engine is running. 3. Connect the other end of the red jump Even after the battery has thawed, battery lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- acid could leak and cause chemical burns. hicle providing assistance B . Removing the jump leads If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. 4a. In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: 9. Before you remove the jump leads, ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- connect one end of the black jump lead switch off the dipped beam headlights if rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- to the negative terminal – of the vehicle they are switched on. plosion. Failure to comply could result in an providing the current B ››› Fig. 68. 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated explosion. 4b. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: rear window in the vehicle with the flat ● Observe the instructions provided by the connect one end of the black jump lead battery. This helps minimise voltage manufacturer of the jump leads. X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol- peaks which are generated when the ● Do not connect the negative cable from id piece of metal in the engine block, or leads are disconnected. the other vehicle directly to the negative to the engine block itself ››› Fig. 69. 11. When the engine is running, disconnect terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- ted from the battery could be ignited by 5. Connect the other end of the black jump the leads in reverse order to the details sparks. Danger of explosion. lead X to a solid metal component bol- given above. ted to the engine block or to the engine ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient block itself of the vehicle with the flat system components or the brake lines in metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- battery. Do not connect it to a point near the other vehicle. minals. the battery A . ● The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The 6. Position the leads in such a way that If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- jump lead attached to the positive battery they cannot come into contact with any onds, switch off the starter and try again after terminal must not touch metal parts of the moving parts in the engine compart- about 1 minute. vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. ment. WARNING ● Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving ● Please note the safety warnings referring parts in the engine compartment. » to working in the engine compartment ›››  page 244. 55 The essentials

● Do not lean on the batteries. This could ● Switch the ignition on and off. Changing the rear window wiper result in chemical burns. ● Press the lever to position 4 blade* ›››  Fig. 140 ›››  page 129, the wind- Note screen wiper arms are set to the service position. The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as Taking off the wiper blade the positive terminals are connected. ● Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the glass moving the blade slightly in the direction of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 70. Changing the windscreen ● Hold the top of the windscreen wiper arm wiper blades with one hand. ● Unlock the catch 1 with the other hand Fig. 71 Rear window wiper blade. Changing the wiper blades and remove the blade in the direction of arrow B . Taking off the wiper blade ● Lift the rear window wiper arm away from Fitting the wiper blade the glass moving the blade slightly in the di- ● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi- rection of the arm – arrow A ››› Fig. 71. tion. ● Hold the top of the rear window wiper arm ● Check that the wiper is correctly secured. with one hand. ● Fold the windscreen wiper arm back down ● Unlock the catch 1 with the other hand onto the glass. and remove the blade in the direction of arrow B . ● Switch the ignition on and press the lever to position 4 ›››  Fig. 140 ›››  page 129, Fitting the wiper blade Fig. 70 Windscreen wiper blades. the windscreen wiper arms are set to the basic position. ● Slide the blade fully until it clicks into posi- Set the windscreen wiper arms to the service tion. position before changing the blades. ● Check that the wiper is correctly secured.

Service position ● Fold the rear window wiper arm back down onto the glass. ● Close the bonnet.

56 Safe driving

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn Factors influencing safety Safety signals are working properly. As a driver, you are responsible for yourself – Check tyre pressure. Safe driving and your passengers. When your concentra- – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- good view of the surroundings. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as Advice about driving – Make sure all luggage is secured others on the road ››› , for this reason: ››› page 141. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safety first! – Make sure that no objects can interfere with get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. This chapter contains important information, the pedals. – tips, suggestions and warnings that you – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors Never drive when your driving ability is im- should read and consider for both your own properly according to your size. paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). safety and for your passengers' safety. – – Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats Observe traffic laws and speed limits. WARNING always have the head restraints in the in- – Always reduce your speed as appropriate use position ››› page 62. for road, traffic and weather conditions. ● This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- – When travelling long distances, take breaks both for the driver and the passengers. The straints according to their height. regularly - at least every two hours. other sections of the on-board documenta- – Protect children with appropriate child tion also contain further information that – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired seats and properly applied seat belts you should be aware of for your own safety or stressed. and for the safety of your passengers. ››› page 75. WARNING ● Ensure that the on-board documentation – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- your passengers also to assume a proper When driving safety is impaired during a pecially important when lending or selling sitting position ››› page 58. trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa- the vehicle to another person. ses. – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly ››› page 63. Before setting off Safety equipment

For your own safety and the safety of your Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers, always note the following points passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- before every trip: dent, the safety equipment may reduce the » 57 Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part Correct position of the vehi- For your own safety and to reduce the risk of of the safety equipment in your SEAT: injury in the event of an accident, we recom- cle occupants mend the following adjustments for the driver: ● three-point seat belts, – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear Correct sitting position for the driv- distance of at least 25 cm between the side seats, er steering wheel and the centre of your chest ● Belt tensioners for the front seats, ››› Fig. 72. ● Belt height adjustment for the front seats – Move the driver's seat forwards or back- ● front airbags, wards so that you are able to press the ac- ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled ● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*, ››› . ● head-protection airbags, – Ensure that you can reach the highest point ● active front head restraints*, of the steering wheel. ● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in the – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system, edge is at the same level as the top of your ● height-adjustable front head restraints, Fig. 72 The proper distance between driver head, or as close as possible to the same ● rear head restraints with in-use position and and steering wheel. level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 73. non-use position, – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- ● adjustable steering column. tion so that your back rests completely against it. The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your pas- – Fasten your seat belt securely sengers with the best possible protection in ››› page 63. the event of an accident. However, these – Keep both feet in the footwell so that you safety systems can only be effective if you have the vehicle under control at all times. and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly. Adjustment of the driver's seat  page 14. Safety is everyone's business! ››› Fig. 73 Correct head restraint position for the driver.

58 Safe driving

WARNING ● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- mend the following adjustments for the front ieve optimal protection. passenger: ● An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries. – Move the front passenger seat back as far ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at as possible ››› . least 25 cm distance between the centre of Adjusting the steering wheel posi- – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- the chest and the centre of the steering tion tion so that your back rests completely wheel ››› Fig. 72. If you are sitting closer against it. than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro- Read the additional information carefully tect you properly. ›››  page 16. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper ● If your physical constitution prevents you edge is at the same level as the top of your from maintaining the minimum distance of WARNING head, or as close as possible to the same 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. level as the top of your head ››› page 61. ● Never adjust the position of the steering The workshop will help you decide if spe- wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this – Always keep both feet in the footwell in cial specific modifications are necessary. could cause an accident. front of the front passenger seat. ● When driving, always hold the steering ● Move the lever up firmly so the steering – Fasten your seat belt securely wheel with both hands on the outside of the wheel position does not accidentally ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- ››› page 63. change during driving. risk of accident! tions. This reduces the risk of injury when It is possible to deactivate the front passen- the driver airbag is triggered. ● Make sure you are capable of reaching and firmly holding the upper part of the ger airbag in exceptional circumstances ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 steering wheel: risk of accident! ››› page 72. o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it Adjusting the front passenger seat such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you points towards your face, the driver airbag ›››  page 14. may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and will not protect you properly in the event of head. an accident. Make sure that the steering WARNING wheel points towards your chest. ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver ● An incorrect sitting position of the front during sudden braking manoeuvres or an passenger can lead to severe injuries. accident, never drive with the backrest til- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that ted far back! The airbag system and seat Correct position for the front pas- there is at least 25 cm between your chest belts can only provide optimal protection senger and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer when the backrest is in an upright position than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro- and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt For your own safety and to reduce the risk of tect you properly. » correctly. injury in the event of an accident, we recom-

59 Safety

● If your physical constitution prevents you passengers on the rear seat bench must con- Examples of incorrect sitting posi- from maintaining the minimum distance of sider the following: tions 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. – Sit up straight. The workshop will help you decide if spe- Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- cial specific modifications are necessary. – Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- ly when the belt webs are properly posi- ● Always keep your feet in the footwell sition ››› page 62. tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially when the vehicle is moving; never rest them – Always keep both feet in the footwell in reduce the protective function of seat belts on the dash panel, out the window or on the front of the rear seat. and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes seat belt position. As the driver, you are re- – Fasten your seat belt securely you to an increased risk of injury in case of sponsible for all passengers, especially chil- page 63. a sudden braking or an accident. If the air- ››› dren. bag is triggered, you could sustain severe – Use an appropriate child restraint system injuries due to an incorrect sitting position. – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect when you take children in the vehicle sitting position in the vehicle while travelling ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front ››› page 75. passenger in events such as sudden brak- ››› . ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav- WARNING The following list contains examples of sitting el with the backrest tilted far back! The air- positions that could be dangerous for all ve- bag system and seat belts can only pro- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not hicle occupants. The list is not complete, but vide optimal protection when the backrest sitting properly, they could sustain severe is in an upright position and the front pas- injuries. we would like to make you aware of this issue. senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or- erly. The further the seat backrests are til- der to achieve maximum protection. Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo- ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury tion: ● Seat belts can only provide optimal pro- due to incorrect positioning of the belt web tection when seat backrests are in an up- ● Never stand in the vehicle. or to the incorrect sitting position! right position and the vehicle occupants ● Never stand on the seats. ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in or- are wearing their seat belts correctly. If ● der to achieve maximum protection. passengers In the rear seats are not sitting Never kneel on the seats. in an upright position, the risk of injury due ● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. to incorrect positioning of the seat belt in- ● Never lean against the dash panel. creases. Correct sitting position for rear ● Never lie on the rear bench. seat passengers ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a ● Never sit sideways. sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ● Never lean out of a window. 60 Safe driving

● Never put your feet out of a window. Correct adjustment of front head at the same time. This movement reduces the ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. restraints distance between the occupant's head and the head restraint, thus reducing the risk of in- ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. juries such as whiplash. ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell. WARNING ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. ● Travelling with the head restraints re- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- moved or improperly adjusted increases gage compartment. the risk of severe injuries. An improper adjustment of the head restraints may cause WARNING death in an accident and increase the risk of suffering injuries during abrupt braking ● Any incorrect sitting position increases actions or unexpected manoeuvres. the risk of severe injuries. ● The head restraints must always be ad- ● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes Fig. 74 Correctly adjusted head restraint as viewed from the front and the side. justed according to the height of the pas- the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if senger. airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. portant part of passenger protection and can Note reduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit- ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the The active head restraints* could also be uations. proper sitting position and maintain it triggered if a vehicle occupant applies a throughout the trip. Before every trip, in- – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper high level of pressure to the seat backrest struct your passengers to sit properly and edge is, as far as possible, at the same level (e.g. by “falling” back into the seat when to stay in this position during the trip as the top of your head, or at the very least, entering the vehicle) or if pressure is ap- ››› page 58, Correct position of the vehicle at eye level ››› Fig. 74. plied to a front seat head restraint from the occupants. rear. This accidental activation is, however, Adjusting the head restraints ››› page 132 not dangerous, as the active head restraints will return to the original position Active head restraints* immediately and are thus once again ready. Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. The resulting body pressure on the seat backrest activates the active head restraint* on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards

61 Safety

Correct adjustment of rear head Centre rear head restraint* Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them restraints – The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head restraint up) and non- from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor use (head restraint down). mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. WARNING If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be ● Under no circumstances should the rear pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the passengers travel while the head restraints vehicle. are in the non-use position. ● Do not swap the centre rear head re- Wear suitable footwear straint with either of the outer seat rear Always wear shoes which support your feet head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an properly and give you a good feeling for the accident! pedals. Fig. 75 Head restraints in the correct position.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- CAUTION WARNING portant part of passenger protection and can Note the instructions on the adjustment of ● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident reduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit- the head restraints ››› page 132. may occur. Risk of serious injuries. uations. ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This Rear outer seat head restraints would reduce the pedal area and could ob- – The rear outer seat head restraints have 4 Pedal area struct the pedals. Risk of accident. positions. ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. Pedals An object could move into the pedal area – Three positions for use ››› Fig. 75. In these and impair pedal operation. In the event of positions, the head restraints are used nor- – Ensure that you can always press the ac- a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, mally, and along with the rear seat belts, celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim- you will not be able to operate the brake, protect passengers in the rear seats. paired to the floor. clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident! – And one position for non-use. – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- – To fit the head restraints in position for use, paired to their initial positions. pull on the edges with both hands in the di- – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- rection of the arrow. tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals ››› . 62 Seat belts

Seat belts Before starting the vehicle: The protective function of seat ● Fasten your seat belt securely. belts The whys and wherefores of ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts seat belts properly before driving off. ● Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's height and weight. Number of seats When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened with a three-point seat belt. during the drive, a warning sound will be In some versions, your vehicle is approved heard for a few seconds. The warning light only for four seats. Two front seats and two will also flash . Fig. 76 Drivers with properly worn seat belts rear seats. The lamp  goes out when the driver and will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- passenger seat belts are fastened with the den braking. WARNING ignition switched on. ● Never transport more than the permitted Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants amount of people in your vehicle. in the proper position. They also help prevent uncontrolled movements that may result in ● Every vehicle occupant must properly serious injury and reduce the risk of being fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- with an appropriate child restraint system. dent. Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of Seat belt control lamp* the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features (such as the airbag sys-  It lights up red tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt. gy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic The control lamp illuminates to remind the energy and consequently, the risk of injury. driver to fasten his seat belt. This is why it is so important to fasten seat »

63 Safety

belts before every trip, even when "just driving – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as around the corner". at all times and are not damaged. an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the Ensure that your passengers wear their seat proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- WARNING belts as well. Accident statistics have shown ducing their capacity to protect. that wearing seat belts is an effective means ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not of substantially reducing the risk of injury and all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The be blocked with paper or other objects, as improving the chances of survival when in- optimal protection from seat belts can be this can prevent the latch plate from en- volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, achieved only if you use them properly. gaging securely. properly worn seat belts improve the protec- ● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings tion provided by airbags in the event of an even when driving in town. Other vehicle or similar items to alter the position of the accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt occupants must also wear the seat belts at belt webbing. is required by law in most countries. all times, otherwise they run the risk of be- ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to ing injured. the connections, belt retractors or parts of Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- the buckle could cause severe injuries in bags, the seat belts must be fastened and tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor- the event of an accident. Therefore, you worn. The front airbags, for example, are only rectly. must check the condition of all seat belts triggered in some cases of head-on collision. ● at regular intervals. The front airbags will not be triggered during Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt. ● Seat belts which have been worn in an minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- accident and have been stretched must be sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion. newal may be necessary even if there is no is not exceeded. apparent damage. The belt anchorage ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- Therefore, you should always wear your seat should also be checked. hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while have fastened their seat belts properly before belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- it is being worn. you drive off! moved or modified in any way. ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, the retractors may not work properly etc.) because this can cause injuries. Important safety instructions for ››› page 268. ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged the use of seat belts or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

– Always wear the seat belt as described in ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or this section. in any other incorrect position.

64 Seat belts

Head-on collisions and the laws of ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on Even at low speeds the forces acting on the physics both the vehicle and its passengers. body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of thrown forward and will make violent contact the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- the speed and the greater the weight, the screen or whatever else is in the way more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an ››› Fig. 77. accident. It is also important for rear passengers to The most significant factor, however, is the wear seat belts properly, as they could other- speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles wise be thrown forward violently through the from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- gy is multiplied by four. Fig. 77 A driver not wearing a seat belt is danger not only themselves but also the front thrown forward violently. Because the vehicle occupants in our exam- occupants ››› Fig. 78. ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the occupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed solely by said impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on Fig. 78 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driv- collision, they will move forward at the same er wearing a seat belt speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to The effects of the laws of physics in the case head-on collisions, but to all accidents and of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the collisions. moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-

65 Safety

How to properly adjust your shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep seat belt areas or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is Fastening and unfastening the seat locked. belt The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners ››› page 67.

Seat belt release ● Press the red button on the belt buckle Fig. 80 Placing the seat belt in the shoulder ››› Fig. 79 B. The latch plate is released and and pelvis area for pregnant women. springs out ››› . ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls Fasten your seat belt up easily and the trim is not damaged. The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly. Positioning seat belts ● Adjust the seat and head restraint correct- Seat belts offer their maximum protection only. ly when they are properly positioned. ● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch The following features are available to adjust plate and pull it slowly across your chest and the seat belt in the shoulder region: lap. ● belt height adjustment for the front seats. ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is ● front seat height adjustment*. securely locked with an audible click Fig. 79 Positioning and removing the seat belt ››› Fig. 79 A. WARNING buckle. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is ● The seat belts offer best protection only securely engaged in the buckle. when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened The seat belts are equipped with an auto- properly. matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the 66 Seat belts

● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of Belt height adjustment Seat belt tensioners another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of How the seat belt tensioner works injury is increased. ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- Read the additional information carefully hicle is in motion. If you do, you increase ›››  page 15. the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. The seat belts for the occupants in the front ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen- severe injuries in the event of an accident. sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur- ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end col- on the centre of the shoulder, never across lisions and only if the seat belt is worn. This the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit Fig. 81 Location of the belt height adjuster. retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing comfortably on the torso the forward motion of the occupants. ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the across the pelvis, never across the stom- be used to adjust the proper belt position at event of minor collisions, if the vehicle over- ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- the shoulder. fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if turns, or in accidents where no major forces necessary to take up any slack. – Press the upper part of the shoulder belt act on the vehicle. ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the guide and hold it in this position ››› Fig. 81. Note seat belt must lie as low as possible over – Move the shoulder belt guide up or down the pelvis, never across the stomach, and until you have adjusted the seat belt ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a always lie flat so that no pressure is exer- ››› page 66. fine dust is produced. This is normal and it ted on the abdomen ››› Fig. 80. is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. – After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharp- ● Always engage the retractor lock when ● ly to check that the catch on the shoulder The relevant safety requirements must be you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ observed when the vehicle or components belt guide is engaged securely. or 1 ››› page 75. of the system are scrapped. Specialised ● Read and observe the warnings workshops are familiar with these regula- ››› page 64. tions, which are also available to you.

67 Safety

Maintenance and disposal of belt pair work, must be performed by a special- Airbag system tensioners ised workshop only. ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- The belt tensioners are components of the tection for one accident and must be Brief introduction seat belts that are installed in the seats of changed if they have been activated. your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- Why is it so important to wear a ers or remove and install parts of the system seat belt and to sit correctly? when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence For the inflating airbags to achieve the best may be that, in the event of an accident, the protection, the seat belt must always be worn belt tensioners function incorrectly or may properly and the correct sitting position must not function at all. be assumed. So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- The airbag system is not a substitute for seat sioner is not reduced and that removed parts belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's do not cause any injuries or environmental overall passive safety system. Please bear in pollution, regulations, which are known to the mind that the airbag system can only work specialised workshops, must be observed. effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have WARNING adjusted the head restraints properly. There- ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by fore, it is most important to wear the seat qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- belts at all times, not only because this is re- vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners quired by law in most countries, but also for may fail to trigger or may trigger in the your safety ››› page 63, The whys and wrong circumstances. wherefores of seat belts. ● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so install parts of the belt tensioners or seat if you are not properly seated when the air- belts. bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. occupants assume a correct sitting position ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat while travelling. belts, including the removal and refitting of Sharp braking before an accident may cause system parts in conjunction with other re- a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be

68 Airbag system thrown forward into the area of the deploying gered. Children up to 12 years old should ● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may always travel on the rear seat. Never trans- front passenger airbag. inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. port children in the vehicle if they are not The airbag system operation is monitored This also applies to children. restrained or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight. electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- Always maintain the greatest possible dis- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if tance between yourself and the front airbag. nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). This way, the front airbags can completely you lean forward or to the side while travel- deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- ling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of in- There is a fault in the system if the control mum protection.  jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur- lamp : The most important factors for triggering the ther increased if you are struck by an inflat- ● does not light up when the ignition is airbag are the type of accident, the angle of ing airbag. switched on ››› page 73, impact and the vehicle speed. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- switched on, erly ››› page 63. pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration ● turns off and then lights up again after the ● rate resulting from the collision and detected Always adjust the front seats properly. ignition is switched on, by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is occurring during the collision and measured moving. by the control unit remains below the speci- Description of airbag system fied reference values, the front, side and/or The airbag system is not triggered if: curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into The airbag system mainly comprises (as account that the visible damage in a vehicle per vehicle equipment): ● the ignition is switched off involved in an accident, no matter how seri- ● an electronic control and monitoring sys- ● there is a minor frontal collision ous, is not a determining factor for the air- tem (control unit) ● there is a minor side collision bags to have been triggered. ● frontal airbags for driver and passenger, ● there is a rear-end collision WARNING ● side airbags, ● the vehicle turns over. ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- ● curtain airbags, suming an incorrect sitting position can WARNING ● a control lamp  on the dash panel lead to critical or fatal injuries. ››› page 73. ● The seat belts and airbags can only pro- ● All vehicle occupants, including children, vide maximum protection if the occupants ● key-operated switch for front passenger who are not properly belted can sustain are seated correctly ››› page 58, Correct critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig- airbag, position of the vehicle occupants. »

69 Safety

● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. tem, have the system checked immediately vation. by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, dur- The control unit analyses the collision trajec- ing a frontal collision the system might not tory and activates the respective restraint trigger correctly or may fail to trigger at all. Airbag safety instructions system. If the deceleration rate is below the prede- Front airbags fined reference value in the control unit the Airbag activation airbags will not be triggered, even though the Read the additional information carefully accident may cause extensive damage to the ›››  page 16. The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within car. thousandths of a second, to provide addition- WARNING al protection in the event of an accident. A The following airbags are triggered in seri- fine dust may develop when the airbag de- ● The deployment space between the front ous head-on collisions: ploys. This is normal and it is not an indication passengers and the airbags must not in of fire in the vehicle. ● Driver airbag. any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. The airbag system is only ready to function ● Front passenger front airbag ● The airbags provide protection for just when the ignition is on. one accident; replace them once they have The following airbags are triggered in seri- deployed. In special accidents instances, several air- ous side-on collisions: bags may activate at the same time. ● It is also important not to attach any ob- ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- jects such as cup holders or telephone In the event of minor head-on and side colli- dent. mountings to the surfaces covering the air- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- ● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- bag units. over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. dent. ● Do not attempt to modify components of Activation factors ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- the airbag system in any way. cident. ● When driving, always hold the steering The conditions that lead to the airbag system wheel with both hands on the outside part activating in each situation cannot be gener- In an accident with airbag activation: at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. alised. Some factors play an important role, Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior such as the properties of the object the vehi- o'clock position, or in any other manner cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle light switch is in the courtesy light position); (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In speed, etc. ● the hazard warning lights switch on; such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you ● all doors are unlocked; may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head. 70 Airbag system

Side airbags* airbags unless the covers have been ap- measure the pressure increase on the inte- proved for use in your vehicle. Because the rior of the doors, due to air escaping Read the additional information carefully airbag deploys from the side of the back- through the areas with holes or openings in ›››  page 18. rest, the use of conventional seat covers the door panel. would obstruct the side airbag, seriously ● Never drive the vehicle if the interior pan- WARNING reducing the airbag's effectiveness. els have been removed. ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean ● Any damage to the original seat uphols- ● Never drive if the interior door panels forward, or are not seated correctly while tery or around the seams of the side airbag have been removed or if the panels have the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater units must be repaired immediately by a not been correctly fitted. risk of injury if the side airbag system is specialised workshop. ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- triggered in an accident. ● The airbags provide protection for just ers in the door panels have been removed, ● In order for the side airbags to provide one accident; replace them once they have unless the holes left by the loudspeakers their maximum protection, the prescribed deployed. have been closed properly. sitting position must always be maintained ● Any work on the side airbag system or re- ● Always check that the openings are with seat belts fastened while travelling. moval and installation of the airbag com- closed or covered if loudspeakers or other ● Occupants of the outer seats must never ponents for other repairs (such as removal equipment are fitted inside the door pan- carry any objects or pets in the deploy- of the front seat) should only be performed els. ment space between them and the airbags, by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, ● Any work carried out to the doors should or allow children or other passengers to faults may occur during the airbag system be made in an authorised specialised work- travel in this position. It is also important operation. shop. not to attach any accessories (such as cup ● Do not attempt to modify components of holders) to the doors. This would impair the the airbag system in any way. protection offered by the side airbags. ● The side and head airbags are managed ● The built-in coat hooks should be used through sensors located in the interior of Head-protection airbags* only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the ation of the side and curtain (head) airbags Read the additional information carefully pockets. neither the doors nor the door panels ›››  page 18. ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- WARNING ster because the system may be damaged. aged, the airbag system may not work cor- ● In order for the head-protection airbags In this case, the side airbags would not be rectly. All work carried out on the front door to provide their maximum protection, the triggered. must be done in a specialised workshop. prescribed sitting position must always be ● Under no circumstances should protec- ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will maintained with seat belts fastened while tive covers be fitted over seats with side not work if the sensors do not correctly travelling. » 71 Safety

● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- The front passenger front airbag can be disa- must be disabled in those vehicles fitted ation of the side and curtain airbags nei- bled using the switch ››› page 73. with a screen dividing the interior of the ve- ther the doors nor the door panels should We recommend that you contact an author- hicle. See your technical service to make be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud- ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air- this adjustment. speakers). If the front door is damaged, the bags. ● There must be no other persons, animals airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be or objects between the occupants of the Airbag system control rear seats and the deployment space of done in a specialised workshop. the head-protection airbags so that the The airbag system availability is controlled head-protection airbag can deploy without electronically, regardless of whether an air- restriction and provide the greatest possi- bag is disabled. ble protection. Therefore, sun blinds which Deactivating airbags have not been expressly approved for use If an airbag was disabled using a diagnos- in your vehicle may not be attached to the Introduction tics system: side windows ● the airbag system warning lamp  illumi- ● The built-in coat hooks should be used The disabling of airbags is only carried out nates after switching on the ignition for about only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave in certain cases, i.e. if: 4 seconds, and then flashes for about 12 seconds. any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the ● a child seat is required in the front passen- pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on ger seat with the child facing in the opposite coat hangers. If the airbag has been disabled with the direction to the direction of travel (in some airbag switch on the side of the dash pan- ● The airbags provide protection for just countries, due to divergent legal require- el: one accident; replace them once they have ments, facing in the direction of travel) ● the airbag control lamp  will illuminate for deployed. ››› page 76; ● Any work on the head-protection airbag about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched ● despite the driver's seat being in the correct system or removal and installation of the on, position, a minimum distance of 25 cm can- airbag components for other repairs (such ● the airbag is disabled, signalled with the not be maintained between the centre of the as removal of the roof lining) should only warning lamp   which lights up with the steering wheel and the driver's torso, be performed by a specialised workshop. word      placed in the cen- Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- ● installation of special devices is required in tre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 82 3 . bag system operation. the steering wheel area due to a physical dis- ● Do not attempt to modify components of ability, Note the airbag system in any way. ● if you have special seats installed (e.g. an ● Follow the current legislation in your ● The side and head airbags are managed orthopaedic seat without side airbags). country regarding the disabling of airbags. through sensors located in the interior of 72 Airbag system

● At your authorised SEAT dealer you can Read the additional information carefully If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault find information on which vehicle airbags ›››  page 17. in the disabling of the airbag system ››› . Please go immediately to an Official Serv- can be disabled. The switch disables only the front passenger ice. front airbag. WARNING Switch front passenger front air- Switching on the airbag ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for bag on and off – Switch the ignition off. disabling or switching on the airbag. – Open the passenger side storage compart- ● Always switch off the ignition before dis- ment. abling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag – Insert the key into the slot of the switch for disabling system. deactivating the front passenger airbag ››› Fig. 82. About 3/4 of the key should en- ● Never leave the key in the airbag disa- ter, as far as it will go. bling switch as it could get damaged or enable or disable the airbag during driving. – Then turn the key gently to the position. ● If the   (airbag disabled) control Do not force it if you feel resistance, and lamp flashes, the front passenger front air- make sure you have inserted the key fully. bag will not trigger in the event of an acci- – Close the passenger side storage compart- dent! Have the system immediately ment. checked by an Official Service.

– Check, with the ignition switched on, that the   control lamp does not illuminate, with the words      in the Airbag and seat belt tensioner con- centre of the dash panel. trol lamp

Control lamp with the word    It lights up on the combi-instru-   (front passenger airbag disabled)  ment If the front passenger front airbag is disa- Fig. 82 Front passenger front airbag bled, after switching on the ignition, the con- Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners. Have the system checked immediately by a special- switch/warning lamp for disabling the front trol lamp will illuminate for several seconds, passenger airbag. ised workshop. » then it will switch off for about 1 s and then switch on again.

73 Safety

  It lights up on the dash panel approximately 10 seconds and a short audi- ● If a malfunction occurs, have the system ble warning is given. In this event, you should checked immediately by a specialised Front passenger front airbag disabled. have a specialised workshop check the sys- workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an ac- Check whether the airbag should remain disabled tem immediately. cident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be The airbag system availability is controlled The control lamp monitors all airbags and triggered correctly. seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including electronically, regardless of whether an air- control units and wiring connections. bag is disabled.

If the front airbag, side airbag, head pro- Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner tection airbag or the belt tensioner are system disabled using the diagnostics system: Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems ● After switching on the ignition, the  warn- operation is constantly monitored electroni- ing lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds and cally. Each time the ignition is switched on, flashes for another 12 seconds. the control lamp  illuminates for several seconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrument The informative display indicates: panel display* shows AIRBAG/TENSIONER. Airbag/belt tensioner disabled!

The system must be checked when the If the front passenger airbag has been dis- control lamp  : abled with the airbag switch located in the ● does not light up when the ignition is storage compartment side: switched on, ● When the ignition is turned on, the  warn- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is ing lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds. switched on, ● The airbag is disabled, signalled with the ● turns off and then lights up again after the warning lamp   which lights up with the ignition is switched on, word      placed in the centre part of the dash panel ››› Fig. 82 ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is ››› page 73. moving.

In the event of a malfunction, the warning WARNING lamp stays on continuously. In addition, de- ● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and pending on the malfunction, a fault message belt tensioner system cannot properly per- appears on the instrument panel display for form its protective function. 74 Transporting children safely

Transporting children These systems have been especially de- fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old signed and approved, complying with the should always travel on the rear seat. ECE-R44. regulation. safely Therefore we strongly recommend you to Follow the manufacturer's instructions and transport children on the rear seats. This is Safety for children observe any statutory requirements when in- the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- stalling and using child seats. Always read ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- Introduction and note ››› page 75. bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 72. When transporting children, use a child seat We recommend you always carry the manu- suitable for the age and size of each child For safety reasons, as we have learned from facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- ››› page 75. accident statistics, we recommend that chil- gether with the on-board documentation. dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear WARNING seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must Important information regarding ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- sons, the child seat should be installed in the the front passenger's airbag ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or accident increases. Read the additional information carefully in the centre back seat. ● An inflating front passenger airbag can ›››  page 19. strike the rear-facing child seat and project The physical laws involved and the forces Read and always observe the safety informa- it with great force against the door, the roof acting in a collision apply also to children tion included in the following chapters: or the backrest. ››› page 65. But unlike adults, children do not ● Never install a child seat facing back- have fully developed muscle and bone struc- ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- wards on the front passenger seat unless tures. This means that children are subject to ger airbag ››› page 68, Why is it so impor- the front passenger front airbag has been a greater risk of injury. tant to wear a seat belt and to sit correct- disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- ly?. the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex- ways use special child restraint systems ● Objects between the passenger and the ceptional cases, to transport a child in the when travelling in the vehicle. passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags front passenger seat, the front passenger on page 70. front airbag must always be disabled We recommend the use of child safety prod- ››› page 72. If the front passenger seat has ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- The passenger side front airbag, when ena- a height adjustment option, move it to the gramme, which includes systems for all ages bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing highest position. made by “Peke” (not for all countries). backward since the airbag can strike the seat ● For those vehicles that do not include a with such force that it can cause serious or key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, »

75 Safety

the vehicle must be taken to a technical ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall tening rings - this can result in potentially service. must not wear a normal seat belt without a fatal injuries to the child. ● All vehicle occupants, especially chil- child seat, as this could cause injuries to ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- dren, must assume the proper sitting posi- the abdominal and neck areas during a rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* tion and be properly belted in while travel- sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- securing rings. ling. dent. ● Never hold children or babies on your lap, ● Only one child may occupy a child seat ››› page 76, Child seats. this can result in potentially fatal injuries to Categorisation of child seats into the child! groups ● Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or Child seats Use only child seats that are officially ap- to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- proved and suitable for the child. ling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal Safety instructions Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- R 44. ECE-R stands for: European Economic cle occupants. Read the additional information carefully Commission. ›››  page 19. ● If children assume an improper sitting po- The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- sition when the vehicle is moving, they ex- ries: pose themselves to greater risk of injury in WARNING the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre ● When travelling, children must be se- Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 or in an accident. This is particularly impor- cured in the vehicle with a restraint system months) tant if the child is travelling on the front suitable for age, weight and size. passenger seat and the airbag system is Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 ● Read and always observe information triggered in an accident; as this could months) and warnings concerning the use of child cause serious injury or even death. seats ››› page 75. Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 ● A suitable child seat can protect your child! years old) WARNING ● Never leave a child alone in the child seat Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 ● or inside the vehicle because depending on The retaining rings are designed only for years old) the season, very high temperatures may be use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system reached inside a parked vehicle, which child seats. Group 3 from 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7 could be fatal. ● Never secure other child seats that do years old) not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- 76 Transporting children safely

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 standard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it). Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when installing and using child seats. We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation. SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at SEAT dealers.

WARNING Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats ››› page 75.

77 Emergencies

Emergencies Note Vehicle tool kit* ● Observe the expiry date of the contents Read the additional information carefully of the first aid kit. ›››  page 48 Self-help ● We recommend you use the first-aid kit and the warning triangle from the SEAT WARNING Emergency equipment Original Accessories programme available in authorised SEAT dealers. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model First-aid kit and warning triangle* of vehicle. On no account attempt to use it for lighting heavier vehicles or other loads. Fire extinguisher* Risk of injury! ● Make sure that the vehicle tools are stor- Read the instructions given on the fire ex- ed properly in the luggage compartment. tinguisher carefully.

The fire extinguisher must be checked once a Note year by an authorised person (take the applicable legal regulations into account). ● Make sure the box always remains strapped to the spare wheel with tape. WARNING ● The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be The fire extinguisher must be properly se- Fig. 83 Location of the warning triangle. greased using universal type grease. cured so that it is not catapulted through The warning triangle, measuring max. the vehicle, causing injuries, during driving 436 x 45 x 32 mm, can be secured to the lin- and braking manoeuvres or in the event of ing on the rear of the luggage compartment an accident. Changing a wheel with rubber straps ››› Fig. 83. Note Introduction WARNING ● The fire extinguisher must comply with lo- The first-aid kit and fire extinguisher must cal legal requirements. Read the additional information carefully be properly secured so that they are not ● Observe the expiry date of the fire extin- ›››  page 48 catapulted through the vehicle during driv- guisher. The fire extinguisher may not work ing and braking manoeuvres or in the event properly if used after the expiry date. of an accident. Risk of injury.

78 Self-help

WARNING ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is Note jacked. Risk of injury. ● If you have a puncture in moving traffic, ● Never grease or oil the wheel bolts! ● The jack should only be used in the cor- switch on the hazard warning lights and ● If the wheel bolt is very tight, it may be rect jacking points. place the warning triangle at the obliga- possible to loosen it by pushing down the tory distance. Observe applicable local le- end of the box spanner carefully with your gal regulations. This is for your own safety CAUTION foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and and that of other drivers. take care not to slip. ● The prescribed tightening torque for ● If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle as wheel bolts on steel and alloy wheels is ● If you notice that the wheel bolts are rus- far away as possible from moving traffic. 120 Nm. ty and difficult to turn when changing a Stop on flat, solid ground. wheel, they must be replaced before hav- ● If the anti-theft wheel bolt is overly tight- ● If you have to change the tyre on a gradi- ing the tightening torque checked. ened, this could damage the bolt and the ent, block the wheel opposite the wheel adapter. being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent the vehicle from rolling away unexpectedly. Note Tyre repairs ● If the vehicle has been fitted with tyres or ● The set of anti-theft wheel bolts or the alloys that are different to those fitted in adapter are available from authorised TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre Mobili- manufacture, the instructions ››› page 258, SEAT dealers. ty System)* New tyres or wheels must be followed. ● Please observe the relevant local legal ● Always raise the vehicle with the doors regulations when changing the wheel. Read the additional information carefully closed. ›››  page 47 ● Never place parts of your body, e.g. arms The Tyre Mobility System is stored in a box and legs, underneath the vehicle when it is Wheel bolts under the carpet in the boot. supported only by the jack. ● Secure the base of the jack with suitable The wheel bolts are matched to the rims. Using the Tyre Mobility System you can relia- supports so that it cannot slip. The jack When installing different wheels, e.g. to fit bly seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies, could slide if the ground below it is soft and light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres, provided that cuts or punctures are no larger slippery and the vehicle could slip off it. it is important to use the correct wheel bolts than approx. 4 mm in diameter. Do not re- Therefore, place the jack on a firm surface with the right length and correctly shaped move the foreign bodies, e.g. bolts or nails, or use a large, stable base. On a slippery bolt heads. This is essential for a secure fit of from the tyre! surface, e.g. tile, use a non-slip base such the wheels and for proper operation of the as a rubber mat. The tyre must be repaired immediately. » brake system.

79 Emergencies

The repair made using the Tyre Mobility Sys- ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn For the sake of the environment tem under no circumstances replaces per- other road users. manent tyre repair and should only be used Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you ing any legal requirements. to drive to the nearest official service. are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional The Tyre Mobility System kit shall not be assistance. Note used: ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- ● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased ● If the wheel rim has been damaged, porary emergency use only until you can at SEAT dealerships. ● when the outside temperature is below reach the nearest specialised workshop. ● Take into account the separate instruc- -20°C (-4°F), ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre tion manual of the tyre mobility set* manufacturer. ● on slashes or punctures larger than 4 mm, mobility set as soon as possible. ● The sealant is a health hazard and must ● if the sidewall of the wheel has been dam- be cleaned immediately if it comes into aged, contact with the skin. Components of the tyre mobility ● If you have been driving with very low tyre ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of set* pressure or a completely flat tyre the reach of small children. ● If the best-before date on the air can has ● Always stop the engine, apply the hand- expired brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the WARNING risk of vehicle involuntary movement. Using the tyre mobility system can be dangerous, especially when filling the tyre at WARNING the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- tional tyre. ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- ● rounding traffic to fill the tyre. Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Ensure the ground on which you park is ● flat and solid. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Fig. 84 Standard display: contents of the anti- ● All passengers and particularly children puncture kit. ● must keep a safe distance from the work Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum area. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the tyre. the floor covering in the luggage 80 Self-help compartment. It includes the following com- ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ponents ››› Fig. 84: or hot air compressor on flammable mate- ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value rial. again. 1 Tyre valve remover ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- ● 2 Carefully resume your journey until you A sticker to be adhered to the instrument vice. cluster, within the driver's visual field, to reach the nearest specialised workshop with- ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at remind that the maximum advisable out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a 3 Filler tube with cap good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- WARNING 4 Air compressor tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous 5 Tube for inflating tyres and can cause accidents and serious in- CAUTION 6 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- jury. toring system (it can also be integrated in Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- ● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- the compressor). mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. overheating! Before switching on the air 7 Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres- ● compressor again, let it cool for several mi- Seek specialist assistance. sor may have a button). nutes. 8 ON/OFF switch 9 12 volt connector Towing the vehicle 10 Bottle of sealant Check after 10 minutes of driving 11 Spare tyre valve Introduction Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 84 5 again and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at Read the additional information carefully the lower end for a valve insert. The valve in- ›››  page 52. sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: Vehicles with manual gearbox can be towed way. This also applies to its replacement part ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be using a towbar or towrope. They can also be 11 . sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. towed with either the front or rear wheels lif- ● You should obtain professional assistance WARNING ted off the road. ››› . When inflating the wheel, the air compres- Vehicles with automatic gearbox can be tow- sor and the inflator tube may become hot. ed using a towbar or towrope. They can also ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. be towed with the front wheels lifted off the »

81 Emergencies

road. If the vehicle is towed with the rear ● Attach the towrope or towbar only to the Anchoring the front tow line wheels lifted off the road the automatic gear- towline anchorages or to the removable box will be damaged! towing bracket ››› page 232, or Maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (31 mph). ››› page 82.

CAUTION Note ● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of en- ● We recommend you use the towrope or gine damage! In vehicles with a catalytic towbar available in the SEAT Original Ac- converter, fuel that has not been burned cessories programme from authorised could reach the catalytic converter and SEAT dealers. catch fire in it. This could damage and de- ● Towing a vehicle requires a certain de- stroy the catalytic converter. You may use gree of practical skill. Both drivers should the battery from another vehicle to help be familiar with the technique required for you start your engine ›››  page 54. towing. Inexperienced drivers should not ● If, due to a fault, there is no oil in the gear- attempt to tow away another vehicle or to box, the car may only be towed with the have their vehicle towed. driven wheels lifted clear of the road and ● Note the legal regulations concerning transported on a special vehicle transport- towing, particularly those regarding the er or trailer. signalling of the towed and towing vehicle. ● If normal towing is not possible or if the ● The towrope must not be twisted, as un- vehicle is to be towed for further than 50 der certain circumstances this could un- km, the vehicle must be transported on a screw the front towline anchorage. special vehicle transporter or trailer. Fig. 85 Front bumper: towline anchorage cover/fitting. ● The towrope should be slightly elastic to reduce the load on both vehicles during Fitting and detaching the cover towing. It is advisable to use a towrope made of synthetic fibre or similar material – Press on the left of the cover as indicated only. by the arrow ››› Fig. 85 . ● Do not pull too hard with the towing vehi- – Pull on the cover to remove it from the front cle and always take care to avoid jerking bumper. the towrope. When towing on a loose surface there is always a risk of overloading – To refit the cover after unscrewing the tow- and damaging the anchorage points. line anchorage, fit the cover and press

82 Fuses and bulbs

down on its right-hand side. The cover must Fuses and bulbs WARNING be securely engaged. The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing Fitting and detaching the towline anchor- Fuses burns and even death! age ● Introduction Never touch the electrical wiring of the – Screw in the towline anchorage anti-clock- ignition system. wise by hand as far as it will go ››› Fig. 85 ● Take care not to cause short circuits in . Due to the constant updating of vehicles, fuse assignments based on equipment and the the electrical system. To tighten the towline anchorage, we recom- use of the same fuse for various electrical mend using the box spanner, the towing eye components, it is not possible to provide an WARNING from another vehicle or a similar object that up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or can be inserted through the anchorage. the electrical components at the time this bridging a current circuit without fuses can – Unscrew the towline anchorage by turning manual was printed. For detailed information cause a fire and serious injury. it clockwise. about the fuse positions, please consult a ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only technical service. replace fuses with a fuse of the same am- CAUTION In general, a fuse can be assigned to various perage (same colour and markings) and The towline anchorage must be screwed in electrical components. Likewise, an electrical size. as far as it will go. Otherwise there is a risk component can be protected by several ● Never repair a fuse. of the screw connection shearing off during fuses. ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- towing or tow-starting! Only replace fuses when the cause of the ple or similar. problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have CAUTION the electrical system checked by a special- ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- ised workshop as soon as possible. tric system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- Additional information and warnings: trical elements and remove the key from ● Working in the engine compartment the ignition. ››› page 244. ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system. »

83 Emergencies

● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- Fuses in the dash panel No. Consumer vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system. 7 Horn ● Always carefully remove the fuse box 8 Towing bracket - Left light covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle. Controls on steering column (without Keyless Access only), engine control unit (without Keyless Access only), automatic gearbox Note control unit (without Keyless Access only), 9 automatic gearbox lever (without Keyless Ac- ● One component may have more than one cess only), ESP control unit (without Keyless fuse. Access only), trailer hook control unit (without ● Several components may run on a single Keyless Access only), electric power steering (without Keyless Access only) fuse. Fig. 86 Diagram of the fuse box to the ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than left/right of the steering wheel 10 Rear left window those indicated in this chapter. These 11 Headlight washer unit should only be changed by a specialised Read the additional information carefully workshop. ›››  page 45 12 Radio and navigation display ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same 13 Preparation as taxi pear in the following tables. amperage (same colour and markings) and ● Some of the equipment listed in the ta- size. Control lever under steering wheel, light bles below pertain only to certain versions switch, traction locking with ignition key (au- of the model or are optional extras. Fuse placement 14 tomatic transmission), headlight flasher, SmartGate control device, rain/light sensor, ● Please note that the above lists, while No. Consumer rear camera correct at the time of printing, are subject to change. 1 Left light Air conditioning system control unit, automat- 15 ic gearbox selector lever, diagnostics con- Central locking, windscreen wipers, with Key- 2 nection less Access 16 Instrument panel 3 Ignition system relay 17 Alarm sensor, horn 4 Right light Windscreen washer system (without Keyless 22 5 Electric windows - Driver Access)

6 Central control unit - Interior lights 23 Heated front seats 84 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer No. Consumer Fuses in the engine compartment

Air conditioning fan, heating, control unit for 12 V connection in the interior, 12 V connection 24 44 air conditioning, heating in the boot

26 Front seat heating switch. 45 Rear right window

27 Rear window wiper Windshield and front window washing sys- 46 tem, control lever under the steering wheel 29 Airbag 47 Towing bracket - Connector contact Electric windows, reversing light switch, air conditioning control unit, Park Assist control 48 Towing bracket - Right hand light 30 unit, exterior mirror, power supply for middle button bar, power supply for the side button 49 Fuel pump control unit bar, interior mirror 50 Radio Fuel pump, radiator fan control unit, cruise 31 control, relay coil for the windscreen and rear 51 Heat for exterior mirrors window washer system, switch for the lights 52 Keyless Access Diagnostics socket, headlight range regula- 53 Steering lock (Keyless Access) 32 tor, control lever under the steering wheel, ambient lighting regulator 54 ABS/ESC control unit

33 Ignition relay coil, clutch pedal switch 56 Diagnosis 34 Heatable washer jets of windscreen washer 59 Full LED Fig. 87 In the engine compartment: lid of the 36 USB charging socket fuse box - Variant 1 »

37 Radar

39 Additional electric heating

41 Rear window heater

42 Electric windows - passenger

43 Towing bracket - Connector contact

85 Emergencies

● Open the cover in the direction indicated No. Consumer by the arrow 2 . Engine components, fuel coil relay, radiator ● Remove the plastic clip from the lid of the 14 fan, coolant pump fuse box. ● Replace the appropriate fuse. 15 Engine control unit ● Place the plastic clip back in its original po- 16 Starter motor sition. 17 Engine control unit ● Place the lid on the fuse box and press until Engine components, additional electric heat you hear it click into place. 18 relay coils Fuse placement 19 Lambda probe No. Consumer Control devices for the glow system, heating 20 1 Radiator fan of the sump fan

2 Control unit for the glow system 3 ABS/ESC control unit Changing bulbs 4 Additional electric heat - Circuit 2 Introduction Fig. 88 In the engine compartment: lid of the 5 Additional electric heat - Circuit 3 fuse box - Variant 2 6 Automatic gearbox Read the additional information carefully  page 46. Read the additional information carefully 7 Engine control unit ››› ›››  page 45 Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, 8 Front windscreen wipers Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same there are different sets of headlights and tail amperage (same colour and markings) and 9 Central control unit, battery data module lights: size. 10 ABS/ESC control unit ● Halogen main headlights (double headlight). Opening the fuse box 12 Engine components ● Full-LED main headlights*. ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 244. 13 Brake pedal switch ● Rear bulb light. ● Press lid locking clip upwards in the direc- ● LED rear light*. tion of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 87 or ››› Fig. 88. 86 Fuses and bulbs

Full-LED headlight system* WARNING quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted. Full-LED headlights handle all light functions ● Take particular care when working on (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam components in the engine compartment if ● Please check at regular intervals that all and route light) with light emitting diodes the engine is warm. Risk of burns. lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on (LEDs) as a light source. your vehicle is functioning properly. This is ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The not only in the interest of your own safety, Full-LED headlights are designed to last the glass can break when you touch the bulb, but also that of all other road users. lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be causing injury. ● Before changing a bulb, make sure you replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an ● When changing bulbs, please take care have the correct new bulb. authorised workshop to have it replaced. not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing. ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb Double headlight bulb change with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of CAUTION left on the glass will vaporise as a result of practical skill. If in doubt, we recommend you ● Remove the ignition key before working the heat generated by the bulb, they will be have defective bulbs changed by a special- on the electric system. Otherwise, a short deposited on the reflector and damage its ised service or, in case of an emergency, seek circuit could occur. surface. professional assistance. ● Switch off the lights and the parking light ● Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before changing a bulb. before changing a bulb. Double headlight bulbs ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with For the sake of the environment your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the Please ask your specialist retailer how to glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen- dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner. erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and causing condensation on the reflector sur- Note face, thus reducing effectiveness. ● Depending on weather conditions (cold ● A bulb must only be replaced by one of the or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the same type. The type is indicated on the bulb, rear lights and the turn signals may be tem- either on the glass part or on the base. porarily misted. This has no influence on ● There is a storage area for the bulb box in the useful life of the lighting system. By the spare wheel well or below the carpet in switching on the lights, the area through Fig. 89 Main headlight bulbs. the luggage compartment. which the beam of light is projected will Installation position of double headlight bulbs »

87 Emergencies

A Side lights – Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the – Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the B Main beam headlights cover fits correctly on the housing during cover fits correctly on the housing during operation. operation. C Dipped beam headlights – Check whether the new bulb is working. – Check whether the new bulb is working. D Turn signal lights E Daylight Changing main beam headlight Changing dipped beam light bulbs bulb Changing side light bulbs

Fig. 92 Changing dipped beam headlight Fig. 91 Changing main beam headlight bulbs. bulbs: Fig. 90 Changing side light bulbs. – Raise the bonnet. – Raise the bonnet. – Remove the protective cover. – Remove the protective cover ››› Fig. 90. – Remove connector ››› Fig. 91 1 by pulling – Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 90 1 by outward. pulling it outwards. – Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so – Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit the that it fits correctly into the recess on the new one. reflector. – Installation involves all of the above steps in – Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence. reverse sequence. Fig. 93 Changing dipped beam headlight bulbs.arch trim.

88 Fuses and bulbs

– Turn the wheel for access to the wheel Changing turn signal bulbs Changing daytime driving light housing cover and remove the cover bulbs ››› Fig. 92. – Remove the protective cover from the headlight ››› Fig. 93. – Remove connector ››› Fig. 93 1 by pulling outward.

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 93 2 pressing clockwise and inwards.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess Fig. 94 Changing turn signal bulbs. on the reflector. Fig. 95 Changing daytime driving light bulbs. – Raise the bonnet. – Fit the connector. – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 94 1 anti- – Raise the bonnet. – Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the clockwise and remove it. cover fits correctly on the housing during – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 95 1 anti- operation. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb clockwise and remove it. holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the – Replace the wheel housing cover. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb same time. holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the – Check whether the new bulb is working. – Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder same time. and turn clockwise as far as it will go. – Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder – Check whether the new bulb is working. and turn clockwise as far as it will go. – Check whether the new bulb is working.

89 Emergencies

Changing the fog light bulbs – Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it counter-clockwise at the same time. Front fog light bulb – Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

– Check that the bulb works properly.

Changing the rear lights (on Fig. 97 Fog light: detach the bulb holder the side panel) – Remove the bolt ››› Fig. 96 1 from the fog light grille with a screwdriver. Removing the rear light1) – Subsequently, remove the clips located on the edge of the grill with gentle leverage.

– Remove the 3 bolts 2 .

– Remove the metal clip situated on the upper part of the fog light by pulling away from the vehicle 3 and extract the fog light.

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 97 1 from the bulb. Fig. 96 Fog light: remove the grille – Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 97 2 to the left Fig. 98 Remove the rear light unit from side and pull. panel.

1) In the case of LED rear lights of the side panel only the turn signal lamp can be changed. The illustrations in the manual correspond to the bulb version and do not correspond exactly to the LED version. 90 Fuses and bulbs

Check which of the bulbs is defective. Changing bulbs – Open the luggage compartment to access the rainduct area.

– Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehicle tool kit and loosen (turning anti-clockwise) and remove the two retaining screws that secure the front of the light ››› Fig. 98 1 , taking care not to lose them. – Pull the rear light unit backward (››› Fig. 98 Fig. 100 Retaining screws on reverse side of 2 ) to remove the light from its housing. rear light unit.

– Disconnect the light connector A Fig. 101 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder Removing the bulb holder ››› Fig. 99 by moving its side levers (arrows) The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten- and pulling the connector outwards. er. The table below gives an overview of the – Place the light on a level, horizontal surface bulb positions. on top of a soft cloth so as not to scratch – Lightly press the defective bulb into the the outer glass. bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and – Unscrew the four retaining screws from the remove it. bulb holder anti-clockwise using a screw- – Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb driver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehi- holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will cle tool kit ››› Fig. 100. Take care not to lose go. the bulb holder retaining screws. – Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from Fig. 99 Light connector at the rear of the rear the glass part of the bulb. light unit. – Check that the new bulb works properly.

– Replace the bulb holder.

– Screw in the bulb holder using the four screws, turning them clockwise. »

91 Emergencies

Position of the bulbs Changing tail lights (on the ››› Fig. 101 Bulb function rear lid)

A Turn signals: PY21W NA LL Removing the bulb holder1) B Side lights-brake lights: P21/5W

C Position: P21/5W

Note

Check the condition of the seal. If dam- Fig. 103 Fit the tail light unit. aged, a replacement can be acquired from an Official Service. – Make sure the connector is correctly in place.

– Press the rear light unit backwards (driving Fitting the rear light direction) by fitting the fastenings into the rubber mountings ››› Fig. 102 A . Fig. 104 Remove the cover from the rear lid. – Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehicle tool kit and tighten (turning clockwise ››› Fig. 103) the two retaining screws that secure the front of the light.

Fig. 102 Fit the tail light unit.

1) For rear-lid LED rear lights, only the reverse and retro fog bulb can be replaced. The illustrations in the manual correspond to the bulb version and do not correspond exactly to the LED version. 92 Fuses and bulbs

the bulb holder ››› Fig. 105 . Take care not – Check that the new bulb works properly. to lose the bulb holder retaining screw. – Re-install the bulb holder ››› page 93. – Change the bulbs ››› page 93. – Screw in the bulb holder.

Position of the bulbs Changing bulbs ››› Fig. 106 Bulb function

A Reversing lights: P21W

B Side lights: R5W LL

C Fog lights: P21W

Note One of the two sides may not be fitted with a fog light, depending on the country and type of driving. In this case, the hole for the light is covered. Fig. 106 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder

Fig. 105 Remove the bulb holder. The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten- Fitting the bulb-holder er. The table below gives an overview of the The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs ››› table on page 93. – Position the bulb holder on the tail light and bulbs. align it so that it is securely seated. – Lightly press the defective bulb into the You can access the bulb holder for the inner bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and – Screw in the bulb holder using the corre- tail lights through the inside of the rear lid. remove it. sponding screw. – Check which of the bulbs is defective. – Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb – Make sure the connector is correctly in – Open the cover to access the lights, turning holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will place. it by hand in the direction indicated by the go. – Close the inner trim cover. » arrows. – Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from – Access the lights by disconnecting the con- the glass part of the bulb. nector 1 ››› Fig. 105  and unscrewing 93 Emergencies

Note Changing the bulb on the number ● Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence. Check the condition of the seal. If dam- plate aged, a replacement can be acquired from Note an Official Service. Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds than Changing the side and num- that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go to an authorised workshop for replace- ber plate bulbs ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 108 Removing number plate light

Fig. 107 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- Fig. 109 Changing the bulb. grated in the exterior mirrors. Removing the bulb holder In case of failure, go to an authorised work- ● Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb shop to have them replaced. ››› Fig. 108. ● Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards ››› Fig. 109.

Operation

Fig. 110 Interior.

96 Controls and displays Operation – Navigation system – Driver heated seat ...... 132 10 Hazard warning lights switch ...... 125 – Park assist system ...... 222

11 Control lamp for deactivated front – Central lock button ...... 113 Controls and displays passenger airbag in centre con- – Heated rear window ...... 127 sole...... 73 – Start-Stop system ...... 215 General instrument panel 12 Front passenger airbag switch ...... 73 – Front passenger heated seat . . . . . 132 13 Depending on the equipment, glove 1 Electric window controls ...... 119 26 Depending on the equipment: compartment with: ...... 135 2 Control for adjusting electric exteri- – Heating controls ...... 148 – CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 175 or mirrors ...... 130 – Air conditioning controls ...... 149 14 Front passenger airbag ...... 16 3 Air vents ...... 147 – Climatronic control ...... 151 15 Headlight switch ...... 121 4 Multifunction switch lever: 16 Headlight range control ...... 121 – Turn signals, headlights, parking Note 17 lights, headlight flasher ...... 122 Lever for unlocking the bonnet ...... 13 The location of the controls of right-hand – Cruise control ...... 217 18 Fuse compartment ...... 84 drive cars differs slightly from the location shown here ››› Fig. 110. However, the sym- 5 Steering wheel: 19 Steering column adjustment lev- bols correspond to the respective controls. er ...... 16 – With horn 20 Ignition lock ...... 197 – With the driver front airbag ...... 16 21 USB/AUX-IN input...... 195 – With controls for audio, navigation system and telephone ...... 103 22 Depending on the equipment: 6 General instrument panel: Instru- – Gear lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . 203 ments and warning lamps ...... 97 – Selector lever (automatic gear- 7 Multifunction switch lever: box) ...... 205 – Multifunction display ...... 27 23 Depending on the equipment: – Windscreen wipers and wind- – Drink holder ...... 137 screen washers ...... 129 – Ashtray holder ...... 138

8 Air vents ...... 147 24 Storage space ...... 135

9 Depending on the equipment: 25 Depending on the equipment, con- – Audio system trols for: 97 Operation

Instruments and warning lamps

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 111 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 111: change up a gear or move the selector 4 Adjuster button and display lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- ››› page 101. 1 Revolution counter (with the engine run- ator) before the needle reaches the red 5 Speedometer. ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- zone ››› . nute). 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 102. 2 Engine coolant temperature display The beginning of the red zone of the rev ››› page 247 WARNING counter indicates the maximum speed in 3 Displays on the screen. any gear after running-in and with the en- Any distraction may lead to an accident, gine hot. However, it is advisable to with the risk of injury.

98 Instruments and warning lamps

● Do not operate the instrument panel con- er in “D” or take your foot off the accelerator ● Outside temperature. trols when driving. pedal. ● Compass. We recommend that you avoid high revs and ● Shift lever position ››› page 205. that you follow the recommendations on the CAUTION ● Recommended gear (manual gearbox) gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev ››› page 208. al information in ››› page 208. counter needle should only remain in the ● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus with red zone for a short period of time. CAUTION different setting options ›››  page 27. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs ● Service interval display ›››  page 33. and heavy acceleration and do not make Never allow the rev counter needle 1 the engine work hard. ››› Fig. 111 to go into the red zone on the ● Second speed display ››› page 100. scale for more than a very brief period, oth- ● Speed warning function ›››  page 32. erwise there is a risk of engine damage. For the sake of the environment ● Start-Stop system status display ››› page 215. Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel For the sake of the environment consumption and noise. ● Low consumption driving status  Changing up a gear early will help you to ››› page 100 save fuel and minimise emissions and en- ● gine noise. Identifying letters on engine (LDM) Revolution counter ››› page 100.

The rev counter indicates the number of en- Distance travelled gine revolutions per minute Fig. 111 1 . Indications on the display ››› The odometer registers the total distance Together with the gear-change indicator, the A variety of information can be viewed on the travelled by the car. rev counter offers you the possibility of using instrument panel display ››› Fig. 111 3 de- The odometer (trip) shows the distance the engine of your vehicle at a suitable pending on the vehicle equipment: travelled since the last odometer reset. The speed. last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan- ● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open The start of the red zone on the dial indicates ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile. ›››  page 31. the maximum engine speed which may be ● used briefly when the engine is warm and af- ● Information and warning texts. Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 111 4 to re- ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- ● Mileage. set the trip recorder to 0. ing this range, you should change to a higher ● Time. ● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3 gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or seconds and the previous value will be dis- ● Navigation instructions. for automatic gearboxes put the selector lev- played. »

99 Operation

Time symbol”  on the outside temperature dis- Speed warning ● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 111 play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un- When the speed setting is exceeded, this will til the outside temperature exceeds +6°C 4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select be indicated on the instrument panel display. the hour or minute display. (+43°F) ››› . This is very useful, for example when using ● To continue setting the time, press the up- When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- winter tyres that are not designed for driving per or lower part of the button 4 . Hold but- iliary heater is switched on or when driving at at the maximum speed of the vehicle ton down to scroll through the numbers very low speeds, the outside temperature in- ›››  page 32. quickly. dicated may be higher than the actual tem- The speed warning settings can be adjusted perature due to the heat produced by the en- ● Press the button 4 again in order to finish in the Easy Connect system by means of the gine. setting the time.  button and the function button SETTINGS The margin of measurement ranges from > Driver Assistance ›››  page 24. The time can also be set on the Easy Con- -45°C (-49°F) to +76°C (+169°F). nect system using the  button and the Start-Stop operating display function button SETTINGS > Date and Recommended gear (manual gearbox) Updated information relating to the status is time ›››  page 24. The recommended gear in order to save fuel displayed on the instrument panel ››› page 215. Compass is displayed on the instrument panel while you are driving ››› page 208. With the ignition on and the navigation sys- Low consumption driving status * tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to Second speed display (mph or km/h) Depending on the equipment, when driving, the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- the  display appears on the instrument played on the instrument panel. In addition to the speedometer, the speed can also be displayed in a different unit of panel when the vehicle is in low consumption status. Selector lever position measurement (in miles or in km per hour). This option cannot be deactivated in models The selected gear is displayed on the side of Identifying letters on engine (LDM) the selector lever and on the instrument pan- destined for countries in which the second Hold the button Fig. 111 4 down for more el display. In positions D and S, and with the speed must always be visible. ››› than 15 seconds to display the identifying let- Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- The second speed display can be adjusted in ters of the vehicle engine (LDM). To do this, played. the Easy Connect system by means of the the ignition must be switched on and the en-  button and the function button SETTINGS gine switched off. Outside temperature display > Units ›››  page 24. If the outside temperature is lower than approximately +4°C (+39°F), the “ice crystal

100 Instruments and warning lamps

WARNING Odometer Fault display Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the trol and warning lamps on page 103. letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder display. Have the fault repaired immediately, as far as is possible. WARNING Even though outside temperatures are above freezing, some roads and bridges Coolant temperature gauge may be icy. ● At outside temperatures above +4°C (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol” is not visible, there may still be patch- es of ice on the road. Fig. 112 Instrument panel: odometer and reset ● The outside temperature sensor takes a button. guideline measurement. The distance covered is displayed in “kilometres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change the Note measurement units (kilometres “km”/miles ● Different versions of the instrument panel “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect* are available and therefore the versions ›››  page 24. and instructions on the display may vary. In Fig. 113 Instrument panel: coolant temperature gauge the case of displays without warning or in- Odometer/trip recorder formation texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the warning lamps. The odometer shows the total distance cov- For vehicles with no coolant temperature ered by the vehicle. gauge, a control lamp  appears when the ● Depending on the equipment, some set- coolant temperatures is high page 248. tings and instructions can also be carried The trip recorder shows the distance that has ››› Please note . out in the Easy Connect system. been travelled since it was last reset. It is used ››› ● When several warnings are active at the to measure short trips. The last digit of the trip The coolant temperature gauge only works same time, the symbols are shown succes- recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or when the ignition is switched on ››› Fig. 113. In sively for a few seconds and will stay on tenths of a mile. order to avoid engine damage, please read until the fault is rectified. the following notes for the different tempera- The trip recorder can be set to zero by press- ture ranges. » ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 112.

101 Operation

A – Cold zone ● Additional lights and other accessories in Control lamp front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- If only the diodes in the lower part of the It lights up, and in addition, the fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-  scale light up, this indicates that the engine lower diode lights up in red has not yet reached operating temperature. atures and high engine loads, there is a risk Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and of the engine overheating. The fuel reserve level has been reached. do not make the engine work hard. ● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle es in red. B - Normal temperature is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can reduce the cooling effect, which could The fuel gauge ››› Fig. 114 operates only If in normal operations, the diodes light up un- cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe- when the ignition is switched on. til the central zone, it means that the engine cialist assistance. The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 li- has reached operating temperature. At high tres. When the needle reaches the fuel re- outside temperatures and when making the serve area there are only approximately 7 li- engine work hard, the diodes may continue tres left in the tank. In the general instrument lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is Fuel level gauge panel a warning signal lights up  and an no cause for concern, provided the control audible signal sounds. lamp  does not light up on the instrument panel digital display. The informative display indicates:

Refuel! Fuel range…km...(miles) C – Heat range When the LEDs light up in the upper area of CAUTION the display and the control lamp  appears Never completely empty the tank! An irreg- on the instrument panel display, the coolant ularity in the fuel supply system can cause temperature is too high ››› page 248. irregularities when the engine is running. Unburned fuel can reach the exhaust gas CAUTION Fig. 114 Fuel gauge. system, which can cause deterioration of ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, the catalytic converter. avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- Note mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm ● Some vehicles come fitted with the fuel also depends on the outside temperature. If gauge on the general instrument panel. necessary, use the engine oil temperature* ››› page 247 as a guide. 102 Instruments and warning lamps

● The message on the display switches off WARNING Multi-function steering only after refuelling and carrying out a If the warning lamps and messages are ig- short journey. wheel* nored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries. General information ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text Control lamps messages. The steering wheel includes a multifunction ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- module from where it is possible to control Control and warning lamps ble. the audio, telephone and radio/navigation ● Park the vehicle away from traffic and functions without needing to distract the driv- Read the additional information carefully ensure that there are no highly flammable er. materials under the vehicle that could ›››  page 34. There are two versions of the multifunction come into contact with the exhaust system module: The control and warning lamps are indicators (e.g. dry grass, fuel). of warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain func- ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- ● Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi- tions. Some control and warning lamps come dent for the driver and for other road users. gation version: for controlling the audio on when the ignition is switched on, and If necessary, switch on the hazard warning functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, switch off when the engine starts running, or lamps and put out the warning triangle to iPod®1), USB1 ), SD1 )) and Bluetooth system while driving. advise other drivers. from the steering wheel. ● Depending on the model, additional text Before opening the bonnet, switch off the ● Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi- engine and allow it to cool. messages may be viewed on the instrument gation version: for controlling the audio panel display. These may be purely informa- ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, tive or they may be advising of the need for a hazardous area and could cause severe iPod®1 ), USB1 ), SD1 )) and Bluetooth system action ››› page 98. injuries ››› page 244. from the steering wheel. Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- CAUTION times a symbol may be displayed on the in- Failure to heed the control lamps and text strument panel. messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle. When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 103 Operation

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 115 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Turn announcement volume up/down. You do not need to Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do A be in navigation mode but not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in telephone Turn there has to be an announce- (radio). (media). (media). mode. ment active when you adjust the volume.

A Mute the current navigation Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Press announcement.

Activate/deactivate voice control. B a) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’s function is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).

Short press: Switch to the – There is no active call: Ra- No function for the other previous/next song. dio/Media functionality (ex- Search for the previous/next modes (navigation, assis- C / D No function cept AUX) stationb). tants, vehicle status, travel Hold down: Fast rewind/for- data). wardc). – Active call: no function

Change instrument panel menu. E / F a) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

104 Instruments and warning lamps

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Coloured instrument panel: change to the previous menu. G Monochrome Instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

– There is no active call: List – Active route: access the of last calls. Coloured instrument panel: view to halt guidance to des- Coloured instrument panel: H List of stations available (on- tination. next track (only if the instru- No function – Active call: access the call Turn ly if the instrument panel is in ment panel is in audio menu). options list (call on hold, audio menu). – No active route: list of previ- hang up, mute microphone, ous destinations. private number, etc.).

H Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option. Press a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

105 Operation

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 116 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

A Mute the current navigation Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Press announcement.

– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (long press). – Ongoing call: hang up (short press). B a) – No incoming/ongoing call: open phone menu (short press), repeat last ongoing call (long press). These functions can be carried out on any mode (audio, media, navigations, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

Change instrument panel menu. E / F a) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

106 Instruments and warning lamps

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM – CD – SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available). G This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

107 Operation

 Opening and closing ● The remote control function may be tem- Locking the vehicle porarily limited by interference from other – Press button 2 . transmitters near the vehicle that operate Remote control on the same frequency (e.g. mobile phone, Deactivating the Safe lock television transmitter). – Press button 2 twice in 2 seconds. Further General notes ● If the central locking system or the anti- information ››› page 110. theft alarm only responds to the remote Read the additional information carefully control at a distance of less than 3 metres,  ›››  page 11 then the battery must be replaced Unlocking the rear lid ››› page 110. – Press button 3 . Further information The remote control key can ● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can- ››› page 117. ● Lock and unlock the vehicle not be locked using the remote control. ● Unlock or open the rear lid. Unfolding the key shaft – Press button 4 . The remote control transmitter and the bat- Unlocking and locking the vehicle teries are integrated in the key. The receiver is Folding the key shaft inside the vehicle. The remote control key has a maximum range of 30 metres. The range is – Press button 4 and fold the key shaft back reduced as the batteries start to lose power. to its original position.

The key includes a foldaway part that can be The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- used to manually lock or unlock the vehicle hicle is unlocked. If the vehicle is unlocked us- and to start the engine. ing button 1 and none of the doors or the rear lid is opened in the following 30 seconds, If a lost key is replaced or the receiver is re- the vehicle will automatically relock and the paired or changed, the remote control key Safe lock or the anti-theft alarm will be acti- must be adapted by an authorised SEAT vated. This function prevents the vehicle from dealer. Only then can the remote control key being unlocked by mistake. be used again. Fig. 117 Remote control key

Note Unlocking the vehicle  Locking indication ● The remote control is automatically de- – Press button 1 . The turn signals will flash if the vehicle has activated when the ignition is switched on. been correctly locked.

108 Opening and closing

Should any of the doors or the rear lid remain In this case, it must be synchronised as fol- car may include keys without remote control open when the vehicle is locked, the turn sig- lows: ››› Fig. 118  or with remote control nals will only flash when they are closed. ● Press any key on the remote control key. ››› Fig. 118 . ● Open the door using the key within the next WARNING WARNING minute. Do not leave people or animals in vehicles ● Never leave the key inside whenever you locked from outside with the Safe lock acti- leave the vehicle - even if only for a mo- vated: the doors and windows cannot then ment. This is particularly important if chil- be opened from the inside. Doors locked in Keys dren are to remain in the vehicle. Children this manner could delay assistance in an might start the engine or some other elec- emergency. Risk of death! General notes trical component, e.g. electric windows. Risk of injury! Note ● Wait until the vehicle has completely stopped before taking the key out of the ig- ● Only use the remote control when the nition. Otherwise the steering wheel may doors and the rear lid are locked and the lock suddenly. Risk of accident! vehicle is within sight. ● Do not press the lock button  on the re- CAUTION mote control before inserting the key in the ignition, otherwise the vehicle could be ● Each key contains electronic compo- locked by mistake. Should this occur, press nents and must, therefore, be protected the unlock button  on the remote control. from dampness and strong vibrations. ● Keep the grooves in the key shaft clean. Any dirt (fibre from clothing, dust, etc.) has Remote control synchronisation a negative impact on locks, ignition, etc.

If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked Note using the remote control, the key code may Should a key be lost, request a duplicate not match that of the control unit. This can key from an Authorised SEAT dealer. occur when the remote control buttons are Fig. 118 Key with remote control/Key without frequently pressed outside the range of the remote control. system or if the remote control battery has been replaced. Two keys are always supplied with the vehicle. Depending on the model version, your 109 Operation

Replacing the battery in the remote The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- For the sake of the environment cle key, under a cover. control key Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environ- Changing the battery ment. ● Unfold the vehicle key shaft. ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- Note hicle key ››› Fig. 119 in the direction of the ar- If it is not possible to unlock or lock the ve- row ››› . hicle with the remote control key once the ● Extract the battery from the compartment battery has been replaced, it will need to using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 120. be re-synchronised ››› page 109. ● Place the new battery in the compartment as shown ››› Fig. 120, pressing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow ››› . Fig. 119 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- Central locking system partment. ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 119, pressing it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow until it General notes clicks into place. All of the doors, the rear lid and the fuel cap flap1) will unlock at the same time when the CAUTION central locking system is used. ● If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. Warning lamp on the driver door ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage Once the doors are locked, the warning lamp the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- will flash quickly for 2 seconds and then at a place the dead battery with another of the slower rate. same voltage, size and specifications. Fig. 120 Vehicle key: removing the battery. ● When fitting the battery, check that the If the vehicle is locked with Safe lock engag- polarity is correct. ed ››› page 112, the warning lamp on the SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery.

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap. 110 Opening and closing driver door will flash quickly for 2 seconds be- Automatic unlock and lock – Manual release ›››  page 12. fore switching off for 30 seconds and then The doors and the rear lid are locked auto- – Manual release mechanism for the rear flashing at a slower rate. matically when the vehicle reaches a speed lid ›››  page 12. If the warning lamp flashes quickly for 2 sec- of about 15 km/h (9 mph). onds and then remains switched on before The doors unlock automatically when the key flashing at a slower rate after 30 seconds, is removed from the ignition. Additionally, the Unlocking with key there is a fault in the interior monitor and tow- driver or front passenger can unlock the away protection system ››› page 117. Go to a doors by pressing the  ››› page 113 central technical service. lock button or by pulling the front door handle. WARNING ● Locking from the outside carelessly or WARNING without good visibility may lead to bruising, Locking the doors prevents intruders from particularly in the case of children. getting into the car, e.g. while waiting at in- ● When locking a vehicle, never leave chil- tersections. However, it can also delay as- dren unaccompanied inside, as from the sistance in the event of an accident. Risk of outside it will be difficult to provide assis- death! tance if required. Fig. 121 Key positions during vehicle locking ● Having the doors locked prevents intrud- Note and unlocking. ers from getting in, for example when stopped at a traffic light. ● Activation of the single door setting can – Turn the key in the driver door in the forward be requested at your SEAT dealer. driving direction to its unlock position A ● In the event of an accident in which the ››› Fig. 121. airbags deploy, the doors will be automati- – Individualised settings cally unlocked for easier access and assis- Pull the handle and open the door. tance. Unlocking single doors ● All doors (driver door only on vehicles with ● If the central locking system should fail to anti-theft alarm) are unlocked. This optional function unlocks the driver door work at any time, only the driver door can ● The rear lid is unlocked. only. The other doors remain locked and are be locked or unlocked using the key only unlocked when the next command is giv- ››› page 112. All other doors and the rear lid ● The fuel tank flap is unlocked1). » en (unlock). can be operated manually.

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap. 111 Operation

● The courtesy lights switch on. Note WARNING ● The Safe lock is deactivated. The vehicle doors cannot be locked if the Do not leave people or animals in locked ● The driver door warning lamp stops flash- driver door is open. vehicles with Safe lock activated: the doors ing (on vehicles not equipped with an anti- and windows cannot then be opened from theft system) ››› page 116. the inside. Doors locked in this manner could delay assistance in an emergency. Safe Lock Note Risk of death! If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft The central locking system is equipped with a alarm system, you have 15 seconds from Safe lock. If the vehicle is closed from out- Note the time the door is opened to insert the side, the door locks will automatically lock. ● The anti-theft alarm switches on auto- key in the ignition and start the vehicle. If, The warning lamp on the driver door will flash matically when the vehicle is locked, even during these 15 seconds, the vehicle is not quickly for about 2 seconds and then at a if the Safe lock is deactivated. The Vehicle started, the alarm is triggered. slower rate. It is not possible to open any of interior monitoring, however, is not activa- the doors from the inside or outside using the ted. handle. This limits the possibility of intruders ● Given that the Safe function will be acti- Locking with key getting into the vehicle. vated on locking the vehicle, CHECK DEAD- LOCK will be shown on the general instru- The Safe lock can be deactivated by press- – Turn the key in the driver door lock cylinder ment panel display. On vehicles equipped ing the lock button twice in less than 2 sec- in the reverse direction to its lock position with an informative display, Caution SAFE! onds. B ››› Fig. 121. On-board documentation! If Safe lock is out of service, the control lamp ● The doors, the rear lid and the fuel tank on the driver door will flash quickly for about flap1) will be locked. 2 seconds before switching off for 30 sec- ● The courtesy lights switch off. onds and then flashing at a slower rate. ● The Safe lock is immediately activated. The Safe lock is re-activated on unlocking ● Warning lamp on the driver door starts to and locking the vehicle again. flash. If the vehicle is locked and the Safe lock is deactivated, the vehicle can be opened from inside by pulling on the door handle.

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap. 112 Opening and closing

Central locking button If the vehicle has been locked using the cen- Unlocking and locking the vehicle tral lock button. with Keyless Access ● The rear lid cannot be unlocked from the outside (security measure, e.g. when stopped at an intersection). ● The doors can be unlocked individually by pulling the handle. ● The vehicle doors cannot be locked if any of the doors are open. ● In the event of an accident in which the airbags activate, doors locked from the inside Fig. 122 Central lock button. will be automatically unlocked for easier access and assistance. Fig. 123 Keyless Access locking and ignition If the vehicle has not been locked from out- system: nearby areas. side, it is possible to lock and unlock the WARNING doors from inside by pressing the ››› Fig. 122 The central locking system remains opera- button, even without the key in the ignition. tive when the ignition is switched off. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as Locking of all doors, the boot lid and the doors locked from the inside delay assis- fuel tank flap1) tance in an emergency. Risk of sustaining fatal injuries! – Press the button  ››› Fig. 122. The warning lamp  on the button will light up. Note Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and the The handles and the central lock buttons fuel tank cap1) will not work if the Safe lock ››› page 112 is activated. Fig. 124 Locking and ignition system without – Press the button  ››› Fig. 122. The warning Keyless Access: sensor surface A for unlock- lamp  on the button will switch off. ing inside the door handle and sensor surface B for locking on the exterior of the handle. »

1) Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap. 113 Operation

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a “Safe” security system ››› page 112. The door tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle double flash of the indicator lights; locking by that is used must be closed. without actively using its key. For this, all that a single flash. ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow) is required is to have a valid vehicle key near The vehicle will lock again after a few secon the door handle to lock the vehicle without ››› Fig. 123 the vehicle and one of the sensor onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open the “Safe” security system ››› page 112. surfaces on the door handles to be touched any door or boot hatch. ››› Fig. 124. Unlocking and locking the boot hatch Unlocking and opening the doors (Key- General information When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto- less-Entry) matically unlocks on opening if ››› Fig. 123 If a valid key is in the proximity of the car ● Grip the door handle. In doing this, the sen- there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity. ››› Fig. 123, the Keyless Access locking and sor surface ››› Fig. 124 A (arrow) on the han- starting system gives the key entry as soon as Open or close the hatch normally dle is touched and the vehicle unlocks. one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- ››› page 117. ● Open the door. dles is touched or the push button on the After closing, the hatch locks automatically. boot hatch is operated. The following fea- In the following instances, the rear lid does In vehicles without safety system “Safe”: tures are then available without having to use not lock automatically after closing: the vehicle key actively: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- it) ● If the entire vehicle is unlocked. ● Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with ● Switch the ignition off. ● If the key used last is inside the vehicle. All the handles on the four doors or the button vehicle indicator lights flash four times. The located on the boot hatch. ● Close the driver's door. vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if ● Touch (once) the sensor surface B (arrow) ● Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. For no door or boot hatch are opened. this to occur, there has to be a valid key inside on the door handle. The door that is used must be closed. the vehicle and the ignition push button Locking the vehicle with a second key needs to be pressed ››› page 197.. In vehicles with safety system “Safe”: If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and ● Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle with closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- it is locked from the outside with a second ve- one of the four door handle. it) hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked The central locking and locking systems op- for engine ignition ››› page 196. In order to ● Switch the ignition off.  erate in the same way as a normal locking enable engine ignition, the button on the ● Close the driver's door. and unlocking system. Only the controls key inside the vehicle needs to be pressed change. ● Touch (once) the sensor surface B (arrow) ››› page 108. on the door handle. The vehicle locks with the

114 Opening and closing

Automatically disabling sensors dle once within the following 5 seconds. Do key in the proximity. If at least one of the If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a not grab the handle or the vehicle will not windows is open and the sensor surface B long period of time, the proximity sensor on lock. Deactivation is also possible if the vehi- on one of the handles is activated continu- the passenger door is automatically disa- cle is locked through the driver’s door lock. ously, all windows will close. If the water jet bled. ● To check that the function has been deacti- or steam is briefly moved away from the vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull sensor surface A on one of the handles If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- on the door handle. The door should not and then pointed at it again, all the win- dles is often activated in an unusual manner open. dows will probably open ››› page 115, Con- with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches venience functions. of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity The next time the door can only be unlocked sensors are disabled for a time. If this only via the remote control or the lock cylinder. Note happens with the exterior sensor on the driv- The next time the door is locked/unlocked, ● If the vehicle battery has little or no er's door, only this sensor is disabled. Keyless Access will be active again. charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost Sensors will again be enabled: or entirely out of charge, you will probably Convenience functions not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle ● After a time. To close all electric windows, the sliding roof with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- and electric tilting panoramic roof with the cle can be unlocked or locked manually ton  on the key. convenience feature, keep your finger on ›››  page 11. ● OR: if the boot is opened. the lock sensor surface B located on the ex- ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle terior part of the driver or passenger door or the system fails to detect one, a warning Keyless Access temporary disconnection handle for a few seconds until the windows will display on the dash panel screen. This function* and roof close. could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac- The doors opened by touching the sensor from a mobile device accessory) or if the cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking surface of the door handle depend on the key is covered by another object (e.g. an cycle. settings that have been activated in the Easy aluminium case). Connect system with the  button and the ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a ● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- SETTINGS and Opening and closing function layer of salt, the correct functioning of the hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- buttons. sensors on the door handles may be affec- wise the vehicle cannot be locked. ted. If this is the case, wash the vehicle ● Close the door. CAUTION ››› page 265. ● Push the central locking button on the re- The sensor surfaces on the door handles ● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- mote control and touch the locking sensor could engage if hit with a water jet or high matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the surface ››› Fig. 124 B on the driver door han- pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle gear stick is in position P. » 115 Operation

● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the Deactivating the childproof lock vates the alarm system. If, during these 15 remote control of the system is equipped – Turn the slot in the opposite direction of the seconds, the vehicle is not started, the with a position sensor. If this remote control arrow (in the other direction on the right- alarm is triggered. does not detect movement for a certain hand door). length of time, the system will conclude When does the system trigger an alarm? that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on The following areas of the vehicle are moni- a night table) so it will be disabled. Anti-theft alarm* tored: ● Bonnet Child-proof locking General notes ● rear lid; ● Doors The anti-theft alarm system increases vehicle ● Ignition protection from intruders. The system will initiate acoustic and optical warning signals ● Tilt angle ››› page 117, Vehicle interior when your vehicle is tried to be forced. monitoring and anti-tow system ● The interior ››› page 117, Vehicle interior Activating the alarm system monitoring and anti-tow system The anti-theft alarm switches on automati- ● Drop in voltage in the car systems cally when the vehicle is locked using the re- ● The factory-fitted towing bracket mote control key or inserting the key in the driver door. The alarm is activated around 30 The alarm is triggered immediately if one of Fig. 125 Activating the childproof lock. seconds after the vehicle is locked. the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active. The childproof lock prevents the rear doors Deactivating the alarm system from being opened from the inside. Doors can How to turn OFF the alarm only be opened from the outside. The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated when the remote control unlock button is To deactivate the alarm, press the unlock but- The childproof lock is activated and deacti- pressed. If the vehicle is not opened within 30 ton on the remote control key or switch on the vated using the ignition key. seconds after emitting the radio frequency ignition. signal, the system will be reactivated. Activating the childproof lock Note If the vehicle is unlocked using by inserting – Turn the slot in the direction of the arrow the key in the driver door, the ignition must be ● The alarm horn power supply has a 5- ››› Fig. 125 (in the other direction on the switched on within 15 seconds. This deacti- year useful life. Contact an Official Service right-hand door). for more detailed information. 116 Opening and closing

● To make sure that the anti-theft alarm is ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle Rear lid fully operative when leaving the vehicle, interior monitoring and the tow-away protection are switched off until the next time the check that all the doors and windows are Opening and closing closed. door is opened.

● Remote control and receiver unit coding If the anti-theft security system (Safe)* means that the remote control cannot be ››› page 112 is switched off, the vehicle interi- used on other vehicles. or monitoring and the tow-away protection are automatically switched off.

Vehicle interior monitoring and an- WARNING ti-tow system Observe the safety warnings ››› in Gen- eral notes on page 111. The Vehicle interior monitoring system is activated if movements are detected in the interi- Note or of the vehicle. Fig. 126 Rear lid: opening from the outside. ● The vehicle interior monitoring system Switching off the vehicle interior monitor- and the tow-away protection system must ing and tow-away protection* be deactivated if there is a danger of the alarm being triggered due to movements When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be by children or animals in the interior when triggered if movements are detected in the in- being transported (e.g. by boat or by train) terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli- or towed. nation is changed (e.g. during transport). You ● The effectiveness of the Vehicle interior can prevent the alarm from being triggered monitoring system is reduced if the specta- accidentally by switching off the vehicle inte- cle case is left open. Always close the stor- rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection. age compartment before locking the vehicle to ensure that this monitoring system ● To switch off the interior monitoring and operates correctly. Fig. 127 Close-up of the inside trim of the rear tow-away protection, switch off the ignition lid: space for pulling. and, using the Infotainment system, select: In- fotainment button  /  and then the SET- Read the additional information carefully TINGS > Opening and closing > Cen- ›››  page 12 » tral locking > Vehicle interior monitoring button.

117 Operation

The rear lid opening system operates electri- lock both the rear lid and all the other The automatic rear lid locking time extension cally. It is activated by using the handle on doors when you are not using the vehicle. function can be activated. When this function the boot lid. is activated and once the rear lid has been ● Closing the rear lid without observing unlocked by pressing the  button on the This system may or may not be operative, de- and ensuring it is clear could cause serious remote control key ››› page 108, the boot lid pending on the situation of the vehicle. injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid. can be re-opened for a certain length of time. If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- Where required, the automatic boot lid lock- opened, however if it is unlocked then the closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into ing time extension function can be activated opening system is operative and the rear lid the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi- or deactivated at a SEAT Authorised Service, may be opened. soning! which will provide all of the necessary infor- To lock/unlock, press the  button or the  ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave mation. button on the remote control key. the key inside. The vehicle will not be Before the vehicle locks automatically, there opened if the key is left inside. A warning appears on the instrument panel is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle. display if the boot lid is open or not properly Therefore, we recommend you always lock closed.* An audible warning is also given if Note the vehicle by pressing the  button on the the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is ● Once the rear lid is closed, its lock is en- remote control or by using the key without removing faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*. gaged and the alarm system is activated. mote control ››› page 112. Only valid if the vehicle has been locked WARNING before the rear lid is closed. ● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of ● The release catch located at the top of accident or injury. the registration plate recess is deactivated ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it on accelerating or at speeds of over 5 down with your hand on the rear window. km/h (3 mph). The catch is reactivated The glass could smash. Risk of injury! when the vehicle comes to a standstill and a door is opened. ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driving. ● Never allow children to play in or around Rear lid automatic locking the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low tempera- Where the vehicle has been locked by press- tures, depending on the time of year, thus ing the  button on the remote control with causing serious injuries/illness. It could the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto- even have fatal consequences. Close and matically when closed. 118 Opening and closing

Controls for the windows Closing ● Always make sure all of the windows are – Press the respective button gently to close closed on leaving the locked vehicle. Operation of the electric windows the window. The process will stop when the button is released. Note Safety button  ● The vehicle heating and ventilation system should be used to ventilate the interior Press the safety button Fig. 128 5 to de- ››› while driving. Leaving the windows open activate the controls on the rear doors. Press- could allow dust and other dirt to enter the ing the safety button 5 again will reactivate vehicle and cause unpleasant noises at the controls on the rear doors. certain speeds. If the rear door controls are deactivated, the ● Do not leave the side windows open at warning lamp  on the safety button 5 will high speeds, as this will overly increase light up. fuel consumption.

Fig. 128 Detail of the driver door: controls for WARNING Note the windows. ● When locking the vehicle from the out- The electric window opening mechanism is side, make sure that nobody is inside the Read the additional information carefully equipped with a thermostat switch. This vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened ›››  page 14 may overheat if the window is opened and from the inside in an emergency. closed repeatedly. This causes the window The electric window opening and closing ● For safety reasons, use the safety button to lock temporarily. Once the thermostat system only works when the ignition is switch- 5 that deactivates the window switches switch has cooled down, the window can ed on. on the rear doors when children are travel- be operated once again. ling in the rear seats. Opening – Press gently on the respective button on CAUTION Roll-back function on the electric the door to open the window. The process ● Keep the windows clean to ensure the windows will stop when the button is released. system operates correctly. – The driver door window can also be auto- ● Defrost ››› page 269 any frozen windows The electric windows are equipped with a matically opened by pressing the button as before using the electric windows. Other- roll-back system that reduces risk of injury far as it will go (fully open). Press the button wise you run the risk of damaging the elec- when closing windows. » again to immediately stop it. tric window riser mechanism.

119 Operation

If an obstacle is present, the closing mecha- Lights and visibility the ignition key and open the door. Once nism will stop and the window will roll back a the driver door is closed (ignition off), the few centimetres. audible warning will stop, whereas the side If an obstacle prevents closing for the next 10 Lights lights will remain on to light up the stationary vehicle in case this is necessary. seconds, the closing mechanism will once again stop and the window will roll back an- Introduction ● Depending on weather conditions (cold other few centimetres. or wet), the lights may mist up temporarily Read the additional information carefully on the inside. This is particularly the case in If in the next 10 seconds you attempt to close ›››  page 21 the event of a difference in temperature the window after it has rolled back the sec- between the inside and in front of the light. ond time, only the closing mechanism will be The location of the controls of right-hand By switching on the lights, the area through stopped even if the obstacle is still present. drive cars differs slightly from the location which the beam of light is projected will The roll-back function is still connected. shown here ››› Fig. 129 ››› page 121. Howev- quickly be demisted, although the edges er, the symbols indicating the respective po- may remain misted. The real lights and turn The roll-back function will only be disconnec- sitions of the controls remain the same. signals can mist up. This has no influence ted if you once again attempt to close the on the useful life of the lighting system. window in the following 10 seconds. In this WARNING case, the window will close at full force. Never drive with only the side lights on! The If you wait for a further 10 seconds, the roll- side lights are not bright enough to illumi- Control lamps back function will be once again connected. nate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Al- ways use your dipped beam headlights if it  It lights up is dark or if visibility is poor. Rear fog light switched on ››› page 124.

CAUTION  It lights up ● Use the lights in line with local law. Front fog lights* switched on ››› page 124. ● However, drivers always remain responsible for correctly adjusting and using the  It lights up lights. Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn Note signal is faulty ››› page 122. ● An audible warning will be heard when the light control is set to  and you remove 120 Lights and visibility

 It lights up Side light and dipped beam head- Headlight range control  light Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 122.

 It lights up Bulb failure ››› page 86 For example, the information display indicates: Check front right dipped headlight!

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Fig. 130 Instrument panel: light range control. onds. Fig. 129 Instrument panel: light panel. – Turn the control ››› Fig. 130 to set the lights WARNING Switching the side lights on to the required setting. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position Positions . trol and warning lamps on page 103. The control positions roughly correspond to the following vehicle load conditions. Switching on dipped beam Note - Two front occupants, luggage compart- – Turn the light switch Fig. 129 to position The rear side lights and number plate light ››› ment empty.  . contain several bulbs. The control lamp 1 All seats occupied, luggage compart- lights up only when there is a fault in all the ment empty. number plate bulbs or side light bulbs (of a Switching off lights (except daytime driv- combined tail light). Therefore it is advisa- ing lights) 2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment fully loaded. ble to regularly check the bulb operation. – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129 to position 0. 3 Driver only, luggage compartment fully loaded.

CAUTION Always adjust the range of the lights so that: »

121 Operation

● your vehicle does not dazzle others, par- Switching the daytime running light off may not be visible to other drivers in the ticularly oncoming traffic; ● Remove the key from the ignition, press the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in ● the range of the headlights is sufficient turn signal lever down (left turn signal), press conditions of poor visibility. for safe driving. it back to flash position and hold it here. ● Insert the key and switch on the ignition, Note Note holding it in this position for 3 seconds. Then, Please observe any relevant legal require- switch off the ignition. The daytime running Make sure you set the range of the main ments which may apply in your country. light is now deactivated and the correspond- lights when the dipped beam headlights ing lights cannot come on. are switched on. OR: activate and deactivate the daytime Turn signal and main beam headlights using the Easy Connect system lights lever Daytime running lights ›››  page 24.

Daytime running lights are signalling devices Automatic control of the dipped beam in for improving road safety. The lights are built combination with the daytime running into the headlights and come on each time lights the ignition is turned on if the light switch is in If the dipped beam control and the daytime position  or  Fig. 129. It is automatical- ››› running lights are activated at the same time, ly switched off when the side lights are turned the dipped beams and the instrument panel on. lighting will automatically come on as required (e.g. when entering a tunnel) and the Switching the daytime driving lights on daytime running lights will switch off. When ● Remove the key from the ignition, move the the automatic dipped beam control switches Fig. 131 Turn signal and main beam lever. turn signal lever upward (right turn signal), off the dipped beams (e.g. when coming out press it back to flash position and hold it of a tunnel), the daytime running lights come The turn signal and main beam lever also op- there. back on. erates the parking lights and the headlight flasher. ● Insert the key and switch on the ignition, holding it in this position for 3 seconds. Then, WARNING Right and left-hand  turn signal  switch off the ignition. The daytime running On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, light is now activated and the corresponding when activating the daytime running light ● Move the lever ››› Fig. 131 up 1 or down 2 . lights can come on. the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- ● Keep the lever held down at the point of re- cle which does not have the rear lights on sistance for the turn signals to flash for as 122 Lights and visibility long as you hold the lever, e.g. when chang- CAUTION ly in the following situations ››› in Daytime ing lanes. running lights on page 122: Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other Convenience turn signals Automatic switch- Automatic switch- drivers. For the convenience turn signals, move the ing on ing off lever as far as possible upwards or down- Note The photo sensor de- When adequate lighting wards and release the lever. The turn signal tects darkness, for exam- is detected. will flash three times. ● If the convenience turn signals are oper- ple, when driving through ating (three flashes) and the other conven- a tunnel. The convenience turn signals are activated ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- and deactivated in the Easy Connect system tive part stops flashing and only flashes The rain sensor detects When the windscreen rain and activates the wipers have been inac- via the  button and the SETTINGS function once in the new part selected. windscreen wipers. tive for a few minutes. button page 24. ›››  ● The turn signals only work when the igni- In vehicles that do not have the correspond- tion is switched on. The corresponding WARNING ing menu, this function can be deactivated in warning lamp  or  flashes in the general If the road is not well lit and other road a specialised workshop. instrument panel. users cannot see the vehicle well enough ● The turn signals switch off automatically or at all, accidents may occur. Main beams  when the steering wheel is returned to the straight-ahead position. ● The automatic dipped beam control ● Switch on the dipped beam ››› page 121. () only switches on the dipped beam ● If a turn signal bulb is defective, the con- ● when there are no changes in brightness, Press the lever ››› Fig. 131 forward in the di- trol lamp flashes at double speed. rection indicated by arrow 3 . and not, for example when it is foggy. ● Pull the lever back to its original position in the direction indicated by arrow 4 to switch Automatic dipped beam control the main beam off. * Headlight flasher  The automatic dipped beam control is merely ● Pull the lever ››› Fig. 131 towards the steer- intended as an aid and is not able to recog- ing wheel (point of resistance) in the direction nise all driving situations. indicated by arrow 4 . When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and Parking lights  switch lighting switch on and off automatical- ● Instructions for use ››› page 125. 123 Operation

Fog lights* The cornering light function works when the The  ››› page 103 warning lamp lights up dipped beam headlights are already on and on the general instrument panel if the rear it is enabled when driving at speeds below fog lights are switched on. approximately 40 km/h (25 mph). If you are towing a trailer or caravan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a Forward gear factory-fitted towing bracket or one instal- ● If the steering wheel is turned to the right or led using parts from the original SEAT the right-hand turn signal switched on, the parts catalogue, only the rear fog light on right-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on. the trailer or caravan will light up. ● If the steering wheel is turned to the left or the left-hand turn signal switched on, the left- Fig. 132 Instrument panel: light panel. hand fog lamp is gradually switched on. Function “Coming Home”/“Leaving ● After the turn, the cornering light function is Home”* Switching on front fog lights gradually switched off. This function makes it possible, under poor – First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132 to position ,  or . Reverse gear visibility conditions, to automatically turn on the lights for a brief period of time after the ● When engaging the reverse gear, both fog – Pull on the light switch to position 1 . vehicle has been parked or when approach- lights turn on. ing the vehicle. The  warning lamp lights up on the general instrument panel if the front fog lights are The function is automatically turned on if switched on. Rear fog light the following conditions are met:

Switching on the rear fog light ● The light switch is in position  ››› page 123. Fog lights with cornering light func- – First turn the light switch ››› Fig. 132 ● tion ››› page 124 to position ,  or . The visibility around the vehicle is reduced. ● The ignition is switched off. 3 Not available on vehicles equipped with full- – Pull on the light switch to position 2 . LED headlights and bulb fog lights. To turn on this function, switch on the head- If the vehicle is not equipped with front fog light flasher prior to exiting the vehicle. The cornering light function is an additional lights ››› page 124, the rear fog light is switch- function to the dipped beam headlights to ed on by turning the switch to position  or improve lighting of the side of the road when  and pulling it to position 2 . This type of taking a sharp turn at low speed. switch only has one position. 124 Lights and visibility

The light is adjusted according to the data re- Hazard warning lights switch ● if the vehicle has a technical fault or you corded by the light sensor that is installed be- are involved in an emergency situation. tween the windscreen and the inside rear view mirror. The function automatically turns on the side Parking lights* lights and headlights, the lighting for the entry area on the exterior mirrors and the num- Parking lights  ber plate light. – Switch the ignition off.

“Coming Home” function – Move the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 131 ››› page 122 up or down to turn on the right The light is automatically switched on when or left-hand parking lights respectively. the driver door is opened (for 60 seconds af- Fig. 133 Instrument panel: switch for hazard ter the ignition is switched off). warning lights. Parking light on both sides The light is switched off when all the doors – Press the button  ››› Fig. 133 to switch the – Turn the light switch ››› Fig. 129  and the rear lid are closed. hazard warning lights on or off. ››› page 121 to position  and engage the If a door or the rear lid remains open, the light steering lock. will switch off after 60 seconds. The warning lamps on the instrument panel and the warning lamp on the switch will flash Note at the same time as the turn signals when the “Leaving Home” function ●  hazard warning lights are switched on. The The parking lights can only be activated with the ignition disconnected. The light is automatically switched on when hazard warning lights also work when the ig- the vehicle is unlocked using the remote con- nition is switched off. ● The parking light will not come on auto- trol. matically after switching off the ignition if The hazard warning lights come on automati- the left- or right-hand turn signal is left on. The light is switched off after 10 seconds or cally in the event of an accident in which an when the vehicle is locked. airbag is triggered.

Note Driving abroad

Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn The light beam of the dipped beam lights is other road users, for example: asymmetric: the side of the road on which ● When reaching the tail end of a traffic you are driving is lit more intensely. » jam

125 Operation

When a car that is manufactured in a country Interior lights Where the courtesy light is on (switch A that drives on the right travels to a country ››› Fig. 134 in position ), the light will come that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- on if: Interior lighting mally necessary to cover part of the head- ● the vehicle is unlocked, light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad- ● one of the doors is opened, justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers. ● The key is removed from the ignition

In such cases, the regulations specify certain When the courtesy light is on (switch A in light values that must be complied with for position ), the light will switch off if: designated points of the light distribution. This ● the vehicle is locked, is known as “Tourist light”. ● the ignition is switched on, The light distribution of the halogen and full- ● 30 seconds after all of the doors have been LED headlights allows the specific “tourist closed light” values to be met without the need for Fig. 134 Interior lighting – version 1. stickers or changes in the settings. If a door is left open or if switch A is in the  position, the interior lighting switches off after Note about 10 minutes to prevent the battery from “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If running flat. you are planning a long stay in a country that drives on the other side, you should take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Rear interior light Service to change the headlights.

Fig. 135 Interior lighting – version 2.

Read the additional information carefully ›››  page 22

Fig. 136 Rear interior light. 126 Lights and visibility

Press the button ››› Fig. 136 to switch the Luggage compartment light After approximately 7 minutes, the heating lighting on or off. device of the rear window switches off auto- The light switches on automatically when the matically. boot is open and switches off automatically Interior lights / ambient light* 10 minutes after the boot lid has been For the sake of the environment opened. The heated rear window should be switch- The lighting of the central console area, the ed off as soon as the glass is demisted. By door handles, the storage pockets in the front saving electrical power you can also save doors and the footwell area will switch on fuel ››› page 211. fully when the doors are opened and will de- Visibility crease in intensity while driving with the dip- Note ped beam headlights on. Heated rear window In the event of a drop in voltage in the on- Depending on the version, a logo is back-lit board systems, the heated rear window on the front passenger's side of the dash switches off automatically to ensure panel. This light comes on when the dipped enough power to control the engine beam is activated. ››› page 255, Automatic disconnection of electrical equipment. The intensity of the ambient light* can be adjusted using the menu Easy Connect > Lighting settings > Vehicle interior lighting ›››  page 24.

Glove box light Fig. 137 Heated rear window switch.

The light will come on automatically when – Switch the heated rear window on or off by the glove compartment is opened. The light pressing the  button ››› Fig. 137, the warn- will go out when the glove compartment is ing lamp in the button will come on or go off closed. respectively.

The heated rear window only works when the engine is running.

127 Operation

Sun visors The front passenger sun visor includes a vani- Introduction ty mirror B with a cover. The cover is opened by sliding it in the direction indicated by ar- The windscreen wipers and windscreen row 3 ››› Fig. 139. washers only work when the ignition is switched on. WARNING The speed of the automatic wipe in case of Do not turn sun visors with attached ob- rain is automatically adjusted according to jects such as ball-pens, etc. toward the the intensity of the rainfall. head protection airbag triggering zone on the side windows. The head airbags could The rear window is wiped once if the wind- cause lesions to the passengers when acti- screen wipers are switched on and reverse vating. gear is engaged. Fig. 138 Driver's sun visor. Fill the windscreen washer fluid ››› page 251.

Windscreen wipers and WARNING ● Make sure the blades ›››  page 56 are windscreen washers in perfect condition for good visibility and safe driving. Control lamp ● In cold conditions, you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have  It lights up warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen Windscreen wiper level too low. washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the Top up the windscreen wiper reservoir as soon as Fig. 139 Front passenger's sun visor. windscreen and obscure your view of the possible ››› page 251. road. The sun visors for the driver and the front pas- Several warning and control lamps light up senger can be pulled out of their central sup- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- CAUTION ports and turned towards the doors in the di- ed on, signalling that the function is being ● During winter, always check that the rection of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 138 and 2 verified. They will switch off after a few sec- windscreen wiper blades are not frozen to ››› Fig. 139 respectively. onds. the glass before each trip or before switch- The strip A is to store small objects such as ing on the ignition. If you switch on the notepaper, etc. windscreen wipers when the wiper blades

128 Lights and visibility are frozen to the glass, this could damage Operating windscreen wipers and Slow wipe both the wiper blades and the wiper motor. washers – Push the lever up to position 2 ››› Fig. 140. ● If the ignition is switched off when the windscreen wipers are on, they will start Continuous wipe operating in the same mode when the igni- – Push the lever up to position 3 ››› Fig. 140. tion is switched back on. The wiper blades may be frozen to the glass at low temperatures when the ignition is switched off. Automatic windscreen wash and wipe ● Carefully separate the frozen wipers – Pull the lever towards the steering wheel, from the windscreen or rear window. position 5 ››› Fig. 140, and the windscreen washer and wipers are switched on. ● Remove snow and ice from the wipers before starting your journey. – Release the lever. The washer will stop and ● Careless handling could lead to the wip- the windscreen wipers will keep running for er arms damaging the windscreen. Fig. 140 Window wiper lever. 1-3 wipes (depending on the windscreen ● For safety reasons, the wiper blades washer operating time). Short wipe should be changed once or twice a year. They can be purchased at a SEAT Author- – Give the windscreen a brief wipe by mov- Rear window wiper* ised Service. ing the lever down to position 4 – Press the lever forward to position 6 ● The ignition cannot be switched on while ››› Fig. 140. ››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper will the windscreen wiper arms are in a raised run every 6 seconds. position. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers Intermittent wipers/automatic wipe with would return to their original position and rain sensor* Automatic rear window wash and wipe* could damage the paintwork on the bon- – Push the lever up to position 1 ››› Fig. 140. net. – Press the lever fully forward to position 7 – With switch A , adjust the wipe interval or ››› Fig. 140 and the rear window wiper and washer switch on at the same time. Note rain sensor sensitivity. – Release the lever. The rear window washer Keep the wipers clean. The wipers can be Switch A has 4 positions. will stop and the rear window wipers will soiled with remains of wax solutions from The rain sensor* is part of the intermittent keep running for 1-3 wipes (depending on car washes ››› page 265. wipe function. the jet operating time). When released, ● On vehicles equipped with windscreen The rain sensor* controls the frequency of the lever remains in position 6 . » washer jets, these are heated once the engine is running. the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain. 129 Operation

Switching off the wipers CAUTION away than they really are. For this reason, you should not rely on these rear vision mir- – Move the lever to position 0 ››› Fig. 140. Never pull on the nozzle holders. Risk of rors for judging the distance of vehicle be- damage to the system! WARNING hind. ● The rain sensor may not detect enough rain If possible, use the interior rear vision mir- to switch on the wipers. ror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you. ● If necessary, switch on the wipers man- Mirrors ually when water on the windscreen ob- structs visibility. Rear view mirror with manual anti- Note dazzle device ● Exterior mirrors are only heated when the Note engine is running. Basic settings ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in Do not touch the exterior mirrors when front of the rain sensor*. This may cause – Push the lever at the bottom of the mirror the heating system is running. sensor disruption or faults. forward. ● If the electrical adjustment should ever fail to operate, the rear vision mirrors can Rear vision mirror anti-dazzle setting be adjusted by hand by pressing the edge of the mirror glass. Headlight washers* – Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror towards you. ● Visit the technical service in the event of The headlight washers operate briefly if the a fault in the electrical rear vision mirror adjustment system. dipped headlights or headlights are on and the lever is moved to position 5 ››› Fig. 140. Exterior mirrors The headlight washer system also operates every 10 windscreen wash cycles. Read the additional information carefully Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the ›››  page 15 headlights at regular intervals, for instance Before beginning any journey, adjust the rear when filling the fuel tank. Please observe the view mirrors for a good rear visibility. following indications ››› page 265. To ensure the system works properly in winter, WARNING keep the nozzle holders free of snow and re- ● Convex (wide-angle) rear vision mirrors move any ice with a de-icer spray. give a larger field of vision. However, they make objects appear smaller and further

130 Seats and head restraints

Seats and head restraints ● Be careful when adjusting the front seats! tance means that the airbag will not pro- Careless and uncontrolled adjustment can tect you. Risk of fatal injury if triggered! cause injuries. ● Objects must not be placed in the foot- Adjusting seats and head re- ● The backrests must not be reclined too well, as they could move to the area of the straints far back while driving. This could limit the pedals in the event of a braking manoeuvre effect of the seat belts and the airbag sys- or change of direction. This would prevent tem. Risk of injury! the clutch, brake or accelerator from being Introduction ● Never transport more than the permitted pressed. Read the additional information carefully amount of people in your vehicle. ● Do not place any items on the front pas- ›››  page 14 ● Every occupant in the vehicle must prop- senger seat other than those allowed (e.g. erly fasten and wear the seat belt belong- child seat). Risk of accident! Set the driver seat in such a way that the ing to his or her seat. Children must be pro- pedals can be fully depressed with your legs tected with an appropriate child restraint Note slightly bent. system ››› page 75, Transporting children safely. After a certain time, the backrest angle ad- Set the driver seat backrest so that you can justment mechanism may gain a certain reach the upper point of the steering wheel ● The front seats, head restraints and seat amount of play. with your arms slightly bent. belts must always be adjusted to the size of the vehicle occupant to provide you and The correct seat position is very important your passengers with the greatest possible for: protection. ● reaching all of the controls safely and ● Your feet should remain in the footwell quickly, while the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, on the window or on the ● a relaxed posture that will not produce fati- seat! This also applies to passengers. An gue, incorrect sitting position exposes you to an ● maximum protection from the seat belts increased risk of injury in case of a sudden and airbag system braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due WARNING to an incorrect sitting position! ● Adjust the driver seat only when the vehi- ● It is important for the driver and front cle is stationary. Risk of accident! passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. Failure to respect the minimum dis-

131 Operation

Head restraints Fitting and removing head restraints on The head restraint must be adjusted in line front seats with the height of users. Correct adjustment – Push the head restraint up as far as it will of the head restraint, together with the seat go. belts, ensure effective passenger protection ››› page 58. – Press catch 1 ››› Fig. 141 and remove the head restraint. WARNING – To refit, insert the head restraint into the ● Badly adjusted head restraints increase holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it the risk of injuries in the event of an acci- engages. dent. ● Never drive with the head restraints re- Fitting and removing head restraints on moved. Risk of injuries! Fig. 141 Front headrest: adjusting or removing. rear seats ● If the seats are in use, never drive with the To remove the head restraint, the corre- rear head restraints in their out-of-use po- sponding backrest must be partially folded sition. forward. – Unlock the backrest ››› page 134 – Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- Seat functions rives to the top. Heated front seats* – Press button 1 ››› Fig. 142, while simultaneously pressing on the security hole 2 ››› Fig. 142 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head Fig. 142 Rear centre head restraint: release restraint. point. – To refit, insert the head restraint into the Read the additional information carefully holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it ›››  page 14 engages. Head restraints cannot be moved up or down For maximum head restraint protection, ad- or removed on sports seats. just the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head. Fig. 143 Heated front seats.

132 Seats and head restraints

The cushion and backrest of the front seats or a bag, etc. The seat heating elements Armrest on front seats with inner can be heated electrically. could have a fault. storage* Press the  or  button ››› Fig. 143 to switch ● Do not clean the seats with anything on and adjust the heated front seats. damp ››› page 268. Press once to connect the heating at maximum force. Note Press the button again to reduce the force of ● Only connect the heated seats when the the heating and switch it off. The force is indi- engine is running. This provides considera- cated by the number of warning lamps lit on ble savings on the battery capacity. the button. ● In the event of a drop in voltage in the on- board systems, the heated seats switch off WARNING automatically to ensure enough power to control the engine ››› page 255, Automatic Do not use the heated seat if your percep- disconnection of electrical equipment. tion of pain and/or temperature or that of your passenger is limited, e.g. due to medication, paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. dia- betes). It could cause burns on the back, buttocks and legs that are difficult to heal. If you still want to use the heated seat, take frequent breaks on long journeys so that the body can recover from the trip. Ask your doctor about your particular situation.

CAUTION ● To avoid damaging the heating elements, do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp Fig. 144 Armrest/Opening and closing the pressure at a single point to the seat cush- storage compartment. ion or backrest. ● Do not use the heated seats if nobody is Adjusting armrest height sitting on them or if there are items attach- – Lift the armrest as far as it will go and then ed to or lying on them, such as a child seat fold it downward. »

133 Operation

– Raise the armrest until it engages in one of Folding down the backrest way that they cannot be soiled or dam- the 5 positions. aged.

– Insert the seat belt latch plate into hole A Opening storage compartment ››› Fig. 146 located on the corresponding – Press the button located on the front of the side of the vehicle – safety position. armrest ››› Fig. 144 - . – Press the lock button B to unlock the back- – Lift the storage compartment lid ››› Fig. 144 rest and fold it forward. - . Returning to the initial position – Where the head restraint has been re- Armrest on rear seats moved, insert it into the backrest when partially raised.

– Push the backrest backwards to its original position until the lock button engages – check that it is locked by pulling on the backrest ››› .

– Make sure the red protruding part C is not visible.

WARNING Fig. 146 Unlocking the backrest. ● Once the backrests have been lifted, the Fig. 145 Rear side seats: armrest. seat belts and their buckles must be in their Folding The armrest can be folded away for greater initial position – ready for use. comfort using the handle ››› Fig. 145. – Before folding the rear seats, adjust the po- ● The backrests must be safely locked to sition of the front seats so that the rear ensure any items in the boot cannot move seats are not damaged. When the front around the interior of the vehicle in the seats are adjusted to the rear position, their event of a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk head restraints should be removed before of injuries! folding the backrests on the rear seats. Store the removed head restraints in such a

134 Transport and practical equipment

● Make sure the rear backrests are correct- Transport and practical ly locked. Only then will the three-point automatic seat belt on the rear central seat equipment work correctly. Practical equipment CAUTION Take care when handling the rear backr- Passenger side storage compart- ests so as not to damage the seat belts. ment The seat belt must never be left behind the lifted backrest. Fig. 148 Storage compartment: cooling control.

Opening and closing passenger side glove compartment – Pull the catch on the lid in the direction indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 147 and open the lid.

– Close the lid and push it until it engages.

Fig. 147 Instrument panel: passenger side Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD glove compartment. player is located in the glove compartment. Separate operating instructions are enclosed for this equipment in the corresponding In- struction Manual.

Glove compartment cooling* Open or close the air outlet by turning the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 148. If the air outlet is open and the air conditioning is on, the cooled air will be released into the glove compartment. »

135 Operation

If the air outlet is open and the air condition- Storage compartment for reflec- Storage pocket under the front ing is off, outdoor air (not conditioned) will be tive vest seats released into the glove compartment. The air outlet should be closed if the air con- There is a storage pocket on the rear part of ditioning is being used in heating mode or the backrest of the front seats. where glove compartment cooling is not in These pockets are designed to hold maps, use. magazines, etc.

WARNING WARNING ● For safety reasons, all storage compart- Do not place heavy objects in the pockets. ments must be closed while the vehicle is Risk of injury! moving. ● Never place any objects on the instru- Fig. 149 Driver's seat: storage compartment. CAUTION ment panel. These objects could be flown around the interior while the vehicle is mov- There is a compartment below the driver seat Do not place overly large objects in the pockets (e.g. bottles) or objects with sharp ing (on accelerating or turning) and dis- ››› Fig. 149 to store the reflective vests. tract you. Risk of accident! edges. Risk of damage to the pockets and the upholstery. ● Make sure objects remain in the centre WARNING console or other compartments while the vehicle is moving. Otherwise, this could The compartment is solely designed to prevent you from braking, changing gear or store the reflective vest and no other ob- accelerating. Risk of accident! jects. Objects falling out of the storage compartment could limit or prevent use of the pedals. Note The glove compartment can hold a bottle CAUTION no larger than 1 litre. The compartment is solely designed to store the reflective vest and no other objects, since there is a risk of damaging the storage compartment.

136 Transport and practical equipment

Drink holder in the centre console could cause injury in the event of an acci- Cigarette lighter* dent.

CAUTION Avoid putting open drinks containers in the drink holder while the vehicle is moving. They could spill (e.g. on braking) and cause damage to the electrical equipment or the seat covers.

Drink holder in rear seat armrest Fig. 152 Centre console: lighter.

The cigarette lighter is located at the front of the centre console ››› Fig. 152.

Using the cigarette lighter – Press the cigarette lighter knob ››› Fig. 152. – Wait for the lighter to spring out.

– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the Fig. 150 Centre console: drinks holder. cigarette on the glowing coil immediately.

Fig. 151 Rear seats armrest: drink holder. – Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket. A Front drink holder in the centre console B Rear drink holder in the centre console Two drinks can be placed in the drink holder. WARNING ● Take care when using the cigarette light- WARNING Use the detachable parts A and B ››› Fig. 151 to change the size of the holes. er! Carelessness or negligence when using ● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. the cigarette lighter can cause burns and They could spill while the vehicle is moving. – Remove part A or B in the direction indi- serious injuries. Risk of scalding! cated by the arrow and replace in the re- ● The cigarette lighter also works when the ● Do not use cups or glasses made of frag- quired position in the drink holder. ignition is off and when the ignition key is » ile materials (e.g. glass or china). These 137 Operation

removed. Therefore, never leave children Ashtrays* WARNING unsupervised in the vehicle. Never put flammable materials in the ashtray. Risk of fire! Note ● The 12 V power socket of the cigarette CAUTION lighter can also be used as a power source Never hold onto the ashtray by the lid when for electrical appliances page 138, ››› removing it. Risk of breaking the lid. Power sockets. ● Additional information ››› page 240, Ac- cessories and modifications to the vehicle. Power sockets

Fig. 153 Centre console: front ashtray/rear Fig. 154 Centre console: 12 V power socket. ashtray. 12 volt socket Removing the ashtray The 12 V power socket is located at the front – Pull the ashtray ››› Fig. 153 upwards to re- of the centre console ››› Fig. 154. move. Using the power socket: Inserting the ashtray ● Open the cover or remove the cigarette – Push the ashtray down. lighter concealing the socket. ● Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the socket. 138 Transport and practical equipment

5 V power sockets (USB)* ● With the engine switched off, however, The multimedia compartment is in the stor- The 5 V power sockets are located at the rear the vehicle battery will drain. Risk of dis- age compartment of the front centre console of the console, between the front seats, fac- charging the battery! ››› Fig. 155. ing the rear seat occupants. ● Only use suitable plugs so as not to dam- The compartment can be used to hold mo- age the power socket. They are USB ports to which only devices and bile phones, mp3 players or similar devices. accessories that use this type of charging ● Only use appliances that have been tes- can be connected. ted for electromagnetic compatibility in WARNING compliance with current regulations. Never use the multimedia compartment as They are not intended for file playback. ● Before switching the ignition on or off, un- an ashtray or to store flammable materials. The maximum power of these sockets is 2 A. plug the appliances from the power socket Risk of fire! to protect them from any damage caused WARNING by fluctuations in voltage. ● ● Improper use of the sockets or electrical Follow the instructions for use of connec- Storage compartment for glasses* appliances can cause a fire and lead to ted appliances! burns and other serious injuries. ● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The 12 V power socket is also func- Multimedia compartment tional when the ignition is switched off and the key is removed. ● Should the connected appliance overheat, immediately switch it off and disconnect it from the socket.

CAUTION Fig. 156 Close-up of roof panel: storage com- ● The 12 V power socket can only be used partment for glasses. to power appliances with a power rating of up to 120 watts. – Press the compartment lid and it will drop ● Never exceed the maximum permitted Fig. 155 Front centre console: multimedia down ››› Fig. 156. power, as this could cause damage to the compartment. vehicle electrical installation. WARNING This compartment must only remain open when removing or replacing glasses. » 139 Operation

CAUTION Compartments in the centre con- There is a bottle carrier in part B ››› Fig. 158 of the storage compartment in the front door. ● Do not place heat-sensitive objects in the sole compartment as they could be damaged. WARNING ● The side compartment supports a maxi- Only use part A Fig. 158 of the compart- mum load of 0.25 kg. ››› ment in the front door to store objects that do not protrude from it so as not obstruct the deployment area of the side airbags. Coat hooks*

The coat hooks are located on the B-pillars Storage compartment in the lug- and on the handles on the interior lining above each rear door. gage compartment* Fig. 157 Centre console: storage compart- WARNING ment. ● Make sure that any items of clothing Open storage compartment in centre con- hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct your view to the rear. sole ››› Fig. 157. ● Only use the coat hooks for light items of clothing and make sure that there are no heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. Storage compartment in front door ● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could interfere with the function of the head-protection airbags. Fig. 159 Boot: storage compartment.

CAUTION The lid from the side storage compartment can be removed to increase the size of the The side hooks support a maximum load of boot. 2 kg. – Hold onto the top of the lid and pull it out in the direction indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 159. Fig. 158 Storage compartment in door trim.

140 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION ● Always stow objects in the luggage com- there are no adults or children in the vehi- partment and secure them on the fastening cle. ● The compartments are designed to hold rings. small objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg. ● Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob- ● Make sure you do not damage the stor- Note jects. age compartment or the boot trim when ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce using the compartment. ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, fogging of the windows. Used air escapes loose objects can be thrown forward, injur- through ventilation slits in the side trim of ing vehicle occupants or passers-by. This the luggage compartment. Ensure that the increased risk of injury will be further in- ventilation slots are never covered. creased if a loose object is struck by an in- Storing objects ● flating airbag. If this happens, objects may Straps for securing the load to the fas- shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in- tening rings are commercially available Loading the luggage compartment jury. from accessory shops.

All luggage and other loose objects must be ● Please note that the centre of gravity safely secured in the luggage compartment. may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead Fastening rings* Unsecured objects which shift back and forth to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to could impair the driving safety or driving adjust your speed and driving style ac- There can be four fastening rings in the lug- characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the cordingly, to avoid accidents. gage compartment for fastening luggage centre of gravity. ● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or and other objects. – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage allowed maximum weight. If said weights – Always use suitable and undamaged straps are exceeded, the driving characteristics of compartment. to secure luggage and other objects to the the vehicle may change, leading to acci- fastening rings ››› in Loading the lug- – Place heavy objects as far forward as pos- dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. gage compartment on page 141. sible in the luggage compartment. ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- – Pull up the fastening rings to attach the – Place the heavy objects first. pecially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, straps. – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening closing the door behind them; they will be rings ››› page 141. trapped and run the risk of death. During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so much ener- ● Never allow children to play in or around gy that they can cause very severe injuries. WARNING the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors The amount of kinetic “energy” depends on ● and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Loose luggage and other objects in the the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the » luggage compartment could cause serious Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that injuries. 141 Operation

object. The most significant factor, however, – Place heavy objects as far forward in the ● Take into account that transporting is the speed of the vehicle. luggage compartment as possible. heavy objects changes the centre of gravi- Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying – Secure luggage using the fastening rings or ty that could also cause changes in vehicle unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col- retaining net ››› page 143. handling. Risk of accident! Therefore, always adjust your speed and driving style to lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this ob- suit these circumstances. ject generates a force corresponding to 20 During an accident, even small and light ob- times its weight. That means that the effective jects can have so much kinetic energy that ● Securing the load to the rings using un- weight of the object increases to approxi- they can cause very severe injuries. The suitable or damaged straps could lead to mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of amount of kinetic energy depends on the injuries in the event of an accident or sud- the injuries which might be sustained if this speed of the vehicle and the weight of the den braking manoeuvre. Secure suitable straps safely to the rings to ensure this “object” strikes an occupant as it flies through object. However, the speed of the vehicle is does not happen. the interior of the vehicle. This increased risk the most important factor. ● Position the load so it cannot move for- of injury will be further increased if a loose Example: an unsecured object weighing 4.5 ward during a sudden braking manoeuvre. object is struck by an inflating airbag. kg produces energy corresponding to 20 Risk of injuries! times its weight in a frontal collision at 50 WARNING km/h (31 mph). This means that its weight ● If transporting sharp or dangerous objects in the space provided when the rear ● If pieces of baggage or other objects are reaches around 90 kg. You can imagine the seats are folded, ensure the safety of the secured to the fastening rings with inappro- severity of the injuries that might be sustained occupant of the remaining rear seat priate or damaged retaining cords, injuries if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it ››› page 60. could result in the event of braking ma- flies through the vehicle interior. noeuvres or accidents. ● If the rear seat located alongside a folded seat is occupied, ensure safety, for ex- ● Never secure a child seat on the fasten- WARNING ample, by placing the load so that it stops ing rings. ● Store objects in the luggage compart- the seat from folding backward in the event ment and secure to the fastening points. of being hit from behind. ● In an accident or sudden manoeuvre, ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- Luggage compartment loose objects in the interior can be flung closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into forward and possibly injure vehicle occu- the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi- pants or others. This risk is even greater if soning! Introduction the flying objects hit a triggering airbag. In ● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or this case, any rebounding objects could in- allowed maximum weight. Risk of accident! Please observe the following points to ensure jure vehicle occupants. Risk of fatal inju- the vehicle handles well at all times: ries! ● Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment! – Distribute the load as evenly as possible. 142 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION The following retaining elements are fitted in CAUTION the boot ››› Fig. 160: Make sure sharp objects stored in the boot The side hooks support a maximum load of cannot not damage the rear window heat- A Rings to secure the load and the retaining 7.5 kg. ing filaments. nets. B Rings used solely for the retaining nets. Note Retaining nets* CAUTION Tyre pressure must be adapted to suit the load ››› page 256, Service life of tyres. The rings support a maximum load of 3.5 kN (350 kg).

Category N1 vehicles Note The front ring B is below the folding back- Category N1 vehicles with no protection grille rest of the rear seats ››› Fig. 160. must use a retaining set compliant with Standard EN 12195 (1 – 4) to secure the load. Hook* Fig. 162 Retaining nets. Retaining elements*

Fig. 161 Boot: hook. Fig. 163 Retaining nets. Fig. 160 Boot: retaining elements. There are hooks on both sides of the boot to secure light items of luggage such as bags, Example of securing retaining nets ››› Fig. 162 etc. ››› Fig. 161 and ››› Fig. 163. »

143 Operation

A Sideways bag WARNING B Ground net Do not place objects on the rear shelf that C Lengthways bag could endanger the vehicle occupants in case of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an WARNING accident. Do not exceed the maximum load that the nets can support. Heavy objects cannot be CAUTION safely secured. Risk of injury! ● The rear shelf supports a maximum load of 1 kg. Fig. 165 Remove the shelf. CAUTION ● If handled incorrectly, the rear shelf could bend when closing the rear lid, and ● The retaining nets support a maximum The shelf can be removed if a large load is to load of 1.5 kg. become damaged or damage the trim. Fol- be transported. low the instructions below: ● Do not place any item with sharp edges – The shelf supports 3 ››› Fig. 165 must in the net. Risk of damaging the net! Removing the shelf be securely in place in the trim sup- – Remove the straps from the shelf 1 ports 2 . ››› Fig. 164. Luggage compartment shelf – The size of the load must not exceed – Remove the shelf from its housing 2 by the height of the shelf. knocking it gently from underneath be- – When open, the shelf must not be bent tween the supports. against the shelf seal. – There must be no objects in the space Fitting the shelf between the open shelf and the back- – Place the shelf on the side supports on the rest of the rear seat. trim. Note – Adjust the shelf supports 3 ››› Fig. 165 to fit the supports 2 in the trim. The shelf will lift when the rear lid is opened. – Fit into place by knocking the top of the Fig. 164 Remove the shelf. shelf gently between the supports.

– Attach the straps 1 to the tray.

144 Transport and practical equipment

Roof rack* carefully follow the Instruction Manual for Attachment points installation of the roof carrier. Introduction ● Remember that the rear lid must not hit the roof load. WARNING ● The total height of the vehicle increases according to the roof load. Compare the ● The load on the roof carrier must be height of the vehicle with the heights of properly secured. Risk of accident! bridges or other underpasses, for example, ● Always secure the load using retaining the height of the garage door. straps that are in good condition. ● Do not forget to remove the roof carrier ● Distribute the load evenly. before entering an automatic carwash. ● When transporting heavy or large ob- ● Take into account that the load must not jects on the roof, any change in normal ve- damage the aerial located on the roof. hicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or increased wind resistance For the sake of the environment must be taken into account. Risk of accident! For this reason, speed and driving If aerodynamic resistance increases, fuel style must be adjusted for the situation. consumption will also increase. ● Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking. ● Adjust your driving style to suit visibility, the weather and road and traffic conditions. Fig. 166 Basic roof carrier attachment points. ● Never exceed the allowed axle loads or allowed maximum weight. Risk of accident! Location of the basic roof carrier attachment points ››› Fig. 166: CAUTION A Rear attachment points ● Only use SEAT-authorised roof carriers. B Front attachment points ● Where roof carriers from other systems are used or where they are not fitted prop- Install and remove following the instructions erly, any damage caused to the vehicle will given. » not be covered by the warranty. Therefore,

145 Operation

CAUTION Air conditioning fore, make sure you familiarise yourself with the correct use of heating and ventila- Follow the instructions given in the manual. tion, window demisting and defrosting and Heating and air conditioning cooling. ● Never use the air recirculation system for Roof load General notes too long, as it prevents fresh air from entering the vehicle and used air can cause The maximum permissible roof load (includ- The power of the heating depends on the tiredness, reduce your attention span and ing the support system) of 75 kg and the total temperature of the coolant. Therefore, maxi- cause the windows to mist over. This in- authorised weight of the vehicle must not be mum power is only obtained when the engine creases the risk of an accident. Switch off exceeded. has reached operating temperature. the air recirculation system as soon as the windows begin to mist over. It will not be possible to carry the full maxi- The temperature and humidity of the air in- mum load if the roof carrier you are using is side the vehicle decrease when the cooling rated for a load which is less than this figure. system is turned on. This therefore increases WARNING In this case, you can only load the roof carrier the comfort of all vehicle occupants when Do not switch off Climatronic for longer to the maximum load permitted in your instal- outside temperatures and humidity are high. It than necessary. lation manual. also helps prevent the windows from misting ● Switch Climatronic back on as soon as over during cold periods of the year. the windows begin to mist over. The air recirculation system can be switched on temporarily to increase the cooling effect. Note Keep the air intake slots in front of the wind- ● Used air escapes through ventilation screen clear of ice, snow or leaves to ensure slots in the rear of the luggage compart- unimpaired heating and cooling. ment. ● Smoking is not recommended while the When the air conditioning is on, condensa- air recirculation system is in use, as the tion can drip from the evaporator in the air smoke drawn from the interior of the vehi- cooling system and form a pool underneath cle settles in the evaporator of the air con- the vehicle. This is normal and does not indi- ditioning system. This causes a persistent, cate a leak! unpleasant smell while the system is running that is time-consuming and expensive WARNING (evaporator replacement) to eliminate. ● All windows must be clear of ice, snow and condensation for driving safety. There- 146 Air conditioning

● To guarantee proper operation, never While in motion, the air conditioning should the system is faulty. This may be due to one cover the air outlets in the luggage com- not be switched on if the windows are open. of the following reasons: partment. If the interior temperature can be reached ● One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse without switching on the air conditioning, the and replace if necessary ››› page 83. fresh air mode should be used. ● The air conditioning compressor has Economic use of the air-condition- switched off temporarily because of in- ing system For the sake of the environment creased engine coolant temperature Saving fuel reduces emissions. ››› page 101. When the air conditioning is switched on, the If you cannot repair the fault yourself or compressor consumes engine power and has where cooling power continues to drop, influence on fuel consumption. Faults switch off the system. Contact a specialised If the vehicle interior has overheated due to service. excessive solar radiation, it is best to open the If the air conditioning does not work at out- windows or doors to allow the hot air to es- side temperatures above +5°C (+41°F) then cape.

Air vents

Fig. 167 Air vents. »

147 Operation

Opening air vents 3 and 4 Heating and fresh air – Press button 1 ››› in Air recirculation  – Turn the vertical circular control upwards. on page 149 to close the fresh air vent. Operation Closing air vents 3 and 4 Air distribution selection – C – Turn the vertical circular control down- Turn rotary control ››› Fig. 168 to select wards. the air vents ››› page 147, Air vents you wish to activate.

Changing the direction of air delivery from All controls, except control B ››› Fig. 168, air vents 3 and 4 can be set to any intermediate position. – The air circulation height can be varied by Leave the blower activated at all times to changing the position of the sliding adjuster prevent the windows from misting over. upwards or downwards ››› Fig. 167. – The air circulation direction can be varied Note by changing the position of the sliding ad- Fig. 168 Heating: controls. If the system is set so that all of the air is juster to the right or to the left. used to defrost the windows, no air is supplied to the footwell area. This could limit The flow of air from the vents is controlled us- Read the additional information carefully  page 39 heating comfort. ing control C ››› Fig. 168. Vents 3 ››› Fig. 167 ››› and 4 can be opened and closed individually. Temperature selection Air recirculation  Depending on the position of the adjusters – Turn rotary control A ››› Fig. 168 clockwise to increase the temperature. and on the weather, open vents can provide Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, air which is either heated, unheated or – Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to re- e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in cooled. duce the temperature. queuing traffic, from entering the interior.

If the rotary switch C Fig. 168 is in the Blower selection ››› thaw position, the recirculation flap will al- – Turn rotary control B ››› Fig. 168 to position ways be open (button light off). 1 to 4 to switch the blower on. If the rotary switch C is switched from any – Turn rotary control B to position 0 to switch position to the thaw position, recirculation will the blower off. be automatically deactivated.

148 Air conditioning

Connecting the recirculation Air conditioning (manual)* e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people may catch cold. In any position of rotary switch C except thaw: Manual operation Temperature selection ● Press button 1 Fig. 168, the switch's ››› ● Turn rotary control A ››› Fig. 169 clockwise lamp will light up, indicating that air recircula- to increase the temperature. tion inside the vehicle has been activated. ● Turn rotary control A anti-clockwise to reduce the temperature. Disconnecting the recirculation

In any position of rotary switch C except Blower selection thaw: ● Turn rotary control B ››› Fig. 169 to position ● Press button 1 again and the button's 1 to 4 to switch the blower on. lamp will go off, indicating that air recircula- ● Turn rotary control B to position 0 to switch tion from the outside has been activated. the blower off. Fig. 169 Air conditioning: controls. In the thaw position of rotary switch C , the ● Press button  1 ››› page 150, Air recir- entry of air into the vehicle interior is always Read the additional information carefully culation to close the fresh air vent. from the outside. ›››  page 38 Air distribution selection WARNING The air cooling system only works if button ● Turn rotary control C ››› Fig. 169 to select  Read and observe the safety warnings ››› 2 ››› Fig. 169 is pressed and under the the air vents ››› page 147 you wish to acti- in General notes on page 146. following conditions: vate. ● The engine is running, ● The outside temperature is above +2°C Switching cooling on and off (+36°F), ● Press button  2 ››› Fig. 169 and the ● The blower control is in position 1–4. lamp in the button will illuminate. ● Press button  2 again and the light in When the cooling system is on and under the button will switch off. » certain conditions, air can be blown from the vents at a temperature of approximately +5°C (+41°F). In the event of prolonged, irregular distribution of the air flow from the outlets and significant differences in temperature, 149 Operation

Coldest setting available once all of the conditions are met ● Press button 1 ››› Fig. 169, the switch's lamp will light up, indicating that air recircula- ● On turning the control A to the coldest set- ››› page 149, Manual operation. tion inside the vehicle has been activated. ting (blue indicator), buttons 1  and 2  light up. Disconnecting the recirculation ● The recirculation function is activated auto- Air recirculation matically in order to cool faster. In any position of rotary switch C except Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, thaw: Note e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in ● Press button 1 again and the button's queuing traffic, from entering the interior. ● A visit to the specialised service once a lamp will go off, indicating that air recircula- year is recommended to clean the air con- If the rotary switch C ››› Fig. 169 is in the tion from the outside has been activated. ditioning system. thaw position, the recirculation flap will al- ● If the air distribution is directed towards ways be open (button light off). In the thaw position of rotary switch C , the the windows, all, of the heating power is entry of air into the vehicle interior is always If the rotary switch C is switched from any used to defrost the windscreen. No warm from the outside. position to the thaw position, recirculation will air is directed to the footwell area. This be automatically deactivated. could limit heating comfort. WARNING ● The AC button lamp  will illuminate af- Connecting the recirculation Read and observe the safety warnings ››› ter the system has been switched on, even in General notes on page 146. if not all of the cooling system's operating In any position of rotary switch C except conditions are met. Cooling is indicated as thaw:

150 Air conditioning

Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)

General notes

Fig. 170 Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully Climatronic description Switching off the Climatronic  page 37 ››› Cooling only works if the following conditions ● Turn control 10 to the left until the segments Climatronic automatically maintains a com- are met: of column 9 ››› Fig. 170 switch off. fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- ● The engine is running ● After 1 second has elapsed, turn the control cally regulates the supplied air temperature ● the outside temperature is above +2°C again to switch off the display. and the blower and air distribution levels. The (+36°F); system also allows for the effect of sunlight, In order to ensure engines subject to heavy so there is no need for manual adjustment. It ●  ››› Fig. 170 18 turned on. loads are cooled, the air conditioning com- also has a humidity sensor that helps to auto- pressor is switched off in the event of high matically demist the windscreen. Starting the Climatronic coolant temperatures. Automatic operations ››› page 152 guaran- The corresponding function will be switched Recommended setting for all seasons of tee maximum comfort any time of year. on when a button is pressed, turning on the air conditioning if it was switched off, with the the year exception of button 17 (recirculation). ● Set the required temperature. We recommend +22°C (+72°F). » 151 Operation

● Press the button  13 ››› Fig. 170. ● Press the button  13 ››› Fig. 170, and Air recirculation ● Adjust vents 3 and 4 ››› page 147 so that AUTO is displayed on the screen. the air flow is directed slightly upwards. Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, Automatic mode is switched off by pressing e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in the air distribution buttons or increasing or queuing traffic, from entering the interior. Change between degrees Centigrade and decreasing the blower speed. However, the degrees Fahrenheit temperature remains regulated. Switching on air recirculation mode Keep the  and  ››› Fig. 170 buttons held down for 2 seconds at the same time. The ● Press the button  17 ››› Fig. 170 and the  data is displayed on the screen in the units Adjusting the temperature symbol is displayed on the screen. required. Switching off air recirculation mode ● When you switch on the ignition, control 1 Note ››› Fig. 170 can be used to set the required in- ● Press the button  17 ››› Fig. 170 and the ● A visit to the specialised service once a terior temperature.  symbol disappears from the screen. year is recommended to clean the Clima- tronic system. It is possible to select interior temperatures WARNING from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this ● The interior temperature sensor 11 range the temperature is regulated automati- Read and observe the safety warnings ››› ››› Fig. 170 is at the bottom. Do not cover it in General notes on page 146. cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is with stickers or the like, as this could have a selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a negative effect on Climatronic operations. temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selec- Note ted, “HI” is displayed on the screen. At both If air recirculation mode remains on for 15 extremes, Climatronic works at maximum minutes, the  symbol will start to flash on Automatic mode cooling or heating power, respectively. The the screen to indicate prolonged air recir- temperature is not regulated. culation. If air recirculation is not switched Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- off, the symbol will continue to flash for stant temperature and demist the windows about 5 minutes. inside the vehicle. tion of the air flow from the outlets (particularly the footwells) and significant differences Switching on automatic mode in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people may catch cold. Blower selection ● Set a interior temperature between +16°C (+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F). Climatronic automatically regulates blower ● Adjust vents 3 ››› page 147 and 4 so that speed according to the interior temperature. the air flow is directed slightly upwards. 152 Air conditioning

It is possible, however, to set the blower speed to suit requirements.

● Turn control 10 ››› Fig. 170 counter-clockwise (to lower the speed) or clockwise (to increase the speed).

Climatronic will switch off when the blower switches off.

WARNING Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in General notes on page 146.

Windscreen defrost

Switching on windscreen defrosting ● Press the button  12 ››› Fig. 170.

Switching off windscreen defrosting ● Press the button  12 ››› Fig. 170 several times or press the  button.

The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output is increased from vents 1 ››› page 147 and 2.

153 Infotainment System

Infotainment System WARNING WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead Connecting, inserting or removing a data to an accident and cause injuries. Operat- medium while driving can distract your at- Introduction ing the Infotainment system can distract tention from the traffic and cause an acci- your attention from the traffic. dent. Safety warnings ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. ● Select volume settings that allow you to WARNING Infotainment system safety in- easily hear signals from outside the vehicle Connecting leads for external devices may at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens obstruct the driver. structions and horns). ● Arrange the connecting leads so that Travelling on today's roads requires the driv- ● Hearing may be impaired if using too high they do not obstruct the driver. er's full attention at all times. a volume setting, even if only for short periods of time. Only operate the infotainment system and its WARNING various functions when the traffic situation WARNING External devices that are loose or not prop- really permits this. erly secured could move around the pas- The volume level may suddenly change senger compartment during a sudden driv- WARNING when you switch audio source or connect a ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident new audio source. ● Before starting the trip, you should famili- and cause damage or injury. ● arise yourself with the different infotain- Lower the base volume before connect- ● Never place or fit external devices to the ment system functions. ing or switching audio sources. doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash ● High audio volume may represent a dan- panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or ger to you and to others. WARNING near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between these areas and the occupants. External ● Adjust the volume in a way that you can The driving recommendations and traffic devices can cause serious injury in an acci- distinguish surrounding noise, for example, indications shown on the navigation system dent, especially when the airbags inflate. horns and sirens, etc. may differ from the current traffic situation. ● Changes to the Infotainment system set- ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have WARNING tings should be made when the car is stop- priority over the recommendations and dis- ped, or by a passenger. plays provided by the navigation system. The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm ● Adjust your vehicle speed and driving movements, which could cause an acci- style to suit visibility, weather, road and dent and severe injuries. traffic conditions.

154 Introduction

● Always keep the armrest closed while the CAUTION vehicle is in motion. Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage device and non-round media may damage WARNING the CD player. Opening a CD player's housing can lead to ● Only clean, standard 12-cm CDs should injuries from invisible laser radiation. be used. ● Have CD players repaired only by a – Do not affix stickers or other items to qualified workshop. the data medium. Stickers may peel off and damage the drive. CAUTION – Do not use printable data media. Prin- ted labels and coverings may peel off The Infotainment system can be damaged and damage the CD drive. by the incorrect insertion of a data storage – Do not insert 8-cm “single” CDs or ir- device or the insertion of an incompatible regularly shaped CDs. data storage device. – Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual ● When inserting a data storage device, Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker make sure it is correctly positioned. than normal CDs. ● Applying force may irreparably damage the memory card slot locking mechanism. CAUTION ● Only use compatible memory cards. The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam- ● When inserting and removing CDs, al- aged if the volume is too high or the sound ways hold them at right angles to the front is distorted. of the CD drive without tilting so as not to scratch them. ● If a CD is inserted while another is al- Note ready in the unit or being ejected, the CD For the proper functioning of the Infotain- drive may be irreparably damaged. Always ment system it is important that the date wait until the data medium is completely and time set in the vehicle are correct. ejected.

155 Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media System Touch / Media System Colour

Fig. 171 Overview of the controls (this configuration depends on the version).

1 Radio Mode (change of band frequency 5 Volume and sound settings 10 Settings button (search and selection) ››› page 171 6 Vehicle settings ›››  page 24, ››› page 158 2 Touchscreen ››› page 159 ››› page 188 3 Telephone mode* / TP Settings 7 Selecting the main menu ››› page 158 ››› page 189 8 Volume. Off/on ››› page 158 4 Media mode (audio sources) 9 Slot for memory cards ››› page 175 ››› page 172

156 Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 172 Overview of the controls (this configuration depends on the version).

1 Radio Mode (change of band frequency 8 Vehicle settings ›››  page 24, ››› page 171 ››› page 188 2 Touchscreen ››› page 159 9 Selecting the main menu ››› page 158 3 Navigation Mode ››› page 178 10 Volume. Off/on ››› page 158 4 Media mode (audio sources) 11 Proximity sensor ››› page 162 ››› page 172 12 Settings button (search and selection) 5 Phone Mode ››› page 189 ››› page 158 6 Voice control 7 Full Link ››› page 163

157 Infotainment System

General instructions for use ● Restrictions on the use of devices using Infotainment buttons Bluetooth® technology may apply in some The buttons on the unit are shown in this Introduction countries. For further information, contact manual with the word “infotainment button” the local authorities. and their function within a rectangle, for ex- ● On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol- ample, the infotainment button  . ume of the audio source is automatically The Infotainment buttons are used by press- lowered when reverse gear is selected. The ing them or pressing and holding. volume can be lowered in the menu Sound > Volume.

Fig. 173 Related video Switching on and off Diagram of the menus If the setup is changed, this may change the To manually switch the Infotainment system display on the screen and in some cases, the on and off, briefly press the left rotary knob . The Infotainment system touchscreen can be Infotainment system may behave in a manner used to select the different main menus. When switching on, the system starts-up with different to that described in this manual. the last set volume, provided that this does Press the Infotainment button  to open not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol- Note the menus summary. ume. Select Sound > Volume. ● Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly The display of the touchscreen's main menu The unit will switch off automatically when pressing the touchscreen is sufficient to can be switched between “grid” and “carou- the key is removed from the ignition or when operate the Infotainment system. sel” via the Settings > Display menu. the on/off button is pressed (depending on ● Not all listed function buttons and func- the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In- tions described may be available due to fotainment system is switched on again, it will the device software used in your market. Infotainment rotary/push knobs switch off automatically after approximately The equipment is not faulty if a function 30 minutes (switch-off delay). button is missing from the screen. Rotary/push knobs ● Due to country-specific legislation, cer- The left-hand rotary knob  is the volume Note tain functions may not be available on the control or the on/off button. screen when the vehicle is travelling above ● The Infotainment system is a part of the a certain speed. The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but- vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehicle. ● Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle ton. may cause noise from the vehicle loud- ● If the battery has been disconnected, the speakers. ignition must be activated before switching on the Infotainment system. 158 Introduction

Changing the basic volume lower the volume again before switching to The Infotainment system comes equipped another audio source. with a touchscreen. Increasing or decreasing the volume or Active areas of the screen that call up a cer- muting the sound tain function are called “function buttons”. Raise the volume: turn the volume control  Handling the function buttons and These buttons are operated by briefly press- clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on display instructions ing the screen or by pressing and holding. the multifunction steering wheel upward . The function buttons appear in the instruc- Lower the volume: turn the volume control  tions with the label “function button” and a clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on button symbol inside a rectangle . the multifunction steering wheel downward Function buttons start functions or open sub- . menus. The currently selected menu is dis- Changes in volume are indicated by a vol- played in the title bar ››› Fig. 174 A of the ume bar on the screen. The volume can be submenus. controlled using the steering wheel controls. Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se- In this case, the changes in volume are dis- lected. played on the instrument panel by a volume bar. Fig. 174 View of some of the function buttons Increase or decrease the size of the im- It is possible to preset certain volume settings on the screen. ages displayed on the screen and adjustments. Select Sound > Volume. The size of the navigation map image ››› page 178 and, for example, photos when Muting the Infotainment system sound viewing images ››› page 172 can be en- ● Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise larged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re- until it displays . duce the image displayed by moving two fingers. » Muting the Infotainment system sound stops the media source that is playing The screen displays .

Note If the base volume has been considerably Fig. 175 Sound setup menu increased to play a certain audio source,

159 Infotainment System

Overview of screen and function buttons Display and function buttons: operation Opening list entries and searching Display and function buttons: operation and effect in lists and effect When pressed, a pop-up window opens  (options window) which displays other The title bar shows the selected menu setup options. A and, where applicable, other function buttons. Some functions or messages are accom- panied by a check box and are activated  /  B Press it to open another menu.  or deactivated  by pressing said check box. The scroll bar is shown on the right and its size depends on the entries in the list. OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection. Move the bar on the screen by pressing C lightly and without lifting the finger, see Press to close a pop-up window or an in- ››› page 160, Opening list entries and × put window. searching in lists. Fig. 176 Entries on a setup menu list. Press them to change the setup adjust-  /  Movable cursor: Move the cursor around ments one at a time. The entries on a list can be activated by the screen by pressing lightly and without pressing them on the screen directly or by us- lifting the finger. Move the slider around the screen by  pressing it lightly and without lifting your ing the adjustment button. OR: To move the cursor to a particular po- finger. sition, press that spot on the screen. Mark list entries using the setup button and open them D Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, left and right arrows to move the sound ac- ● Turn the setup button to mark the entries on cording to preference. The cursor D will the list with a rectangle one by one and con- move. tinue searching the list in this manner. OR: Press the central button to centre the ● Press the setup button to activate the stereo sound in the centre of the passen- marked entry on the list. ger compartment

Press it on some lists to move up a level, Search lists (scrolling the screen)  one by one. The scroll bar is shown on the right and its Press to return from the submenus one at size depends on the entries in the list BACK a time to the main menu or to undo the  ››› Fig. 176 1 . entries made.

160 Introduction

● Briefly press the screen above or below the Subsequent chapters only explain those Overview of the function buttons scroll marker. functions that differ from those in the screen Function icon and text: operation and ef- ● shown in the figure. OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker fect and without lifting it, move it around the The input line with cursor is located in the top screen. Lift your finger off the screen when bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed Letters and Press them to copy them into the input you reach the desired position. here. digits line. ● OR: Place your finger in the centre of the Zip code a): Press this button to enter a screen and without lifting it, move it around Input windows for “free text input” zip code in the Navigation mode. the screen. Lift your finger off the screen In the input masks for open text, you may en- 123 : Press this button to open the when you reach the desired position. ter letters, numbers and special characters in 1 number and special character input any combination. screen. ABC : Press this button to go back to Input masks with on-screen keypad Input windows for selecting a saved entry the letter input screen. (e.g. selection of a destination address) Press to change the keypad to anoth- It is only possible to select a sequence of let- er language. Keypad languages can 2 ters, numbers and special characters that be selected from the menu System matches a stored entry. settings > Language. Suggestions for matching destinations ap- Displays the number and opens the pear depending on the characters entered in 3 list of remaining selectable entries that match the entered text. the input line ››› Fig. 177 4 . In the case of compound names, it is necessary to enter a Hold and press to display a pop-up space. window with the special characters based on said letter. Press the desired 4 If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries, character to enter it. Some special Fig. 177 Input window with on-screen keypad. the number of remaining entries is displayed characters can be written out instead after the input line 3 . Pressing this function (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”). Input windows with on-screen keypad are button displays these remaining entries in a  Press to enter a space. used for functions such as entering an entry list. name, selecting a destination address or en- Press to delete characters in the input tering a search term for searching long lists. line from right to left.  The function buttons listed below are not Press and hold to delete several char- available in all countries or for all topics. acters. »

161 Infotainment System

Function icon and text: operation and ef- Initial configuration wizard Function button: function fect Disables the possibility of changing BACK  Press to close the input window. the settings of the Infotainment system. If you want to perform the initial NEVER a) Depends on the market and unit in question. system setup, you must enter via Sys- tem setup and select Configura- tion Wizard.

Proximity sensors START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

3 Valid for: Media System Plus/Navi System Press to configure the time and date (if it has a navigation system it will be A The Infotainment system is equipped with an configured automatically with the integrated proximity sensor ››› Fig. 172 11 . GPS). Fig. 178 Initial configuration wizard The image on the screen changes from dis- Press to search and store to memory the radio stations that have the best play mode to automatic operation when your The initial configuration wizard will help you B hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the to set up your Infotainment system the first reception at that moment on all avail- function buttons are automatically highligh- time you switch it on. able bands (AM, FM and DAB). ted to facilitate their use. Press to link your mobile telephone to Every time you switch on the Infotainment C the Infotainment system. system, the initial setup screen will appear ››› Fig. 178 if any parameters have not been Press to select your home address us- Additional information and display set or if the NEVER function button has not D a) ing your current position or by man- options been pressed. ually entering an address. To go to the previous or next parameter The displays appearing on the screen may Function button: function to set. vary depending on the settings, and may dif- When a parameter has been set, the PREVIOUS Closes the Configuration Wizard, and only way to reset it is from the main fer from those described here. the main menu or last mode in which menu, clicking on it, and not using the you used the Infotainment system will NEXT The status bar on the screen can display, for CLOSE Previous/Next buttons. example, the current time and outside tem- appear. The next time you switch on When setting any parameter, a confir- perature. the system, the Configuration Wizard mation mark will appear on it . will start up again. All displays can be viewed only after completely restarting the Infotainment system.

162 Connectivity

Function button: function Connectivity ● Android Auto™ ● Apple CarPlay™ Once one or more settings have been applied, click on this in the main menu Data transfer of the wizard to confirm and finalize Interfaces the settings. FINISH This communication can allow data to be To access the Full Link system, press the Info- If there are any parameters you have read and/or written. tainment button  (Full Link) and then se- not set, the next time you connect the lect the Full Link context. Infotainment system, the Initial Config- From the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer uration Wizard will start up. for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti- The connection to Full Link is made through a a) Only valid for Navi System. vate/deactivate the function and a dropdown USB interface. menu called Operation via apps which controls the level of interaction between the WARNING apps and the system. If a mobile terminal is not secured or is incorrectly secured in the vehicle, it could move around the passenger compartment in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre, Full Link* emergency stop or accident, resulting in injury. Full Link technology description ● While driving, mobile terminals must be securely fastened in position, outside the airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed away.

WARNING Any applications that are not suitable or Fig. 179 Related video execute incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. The Full Link system provides a way of bring- ● SEAT recommends the use of the Apps ing together technologies that allow commu- that SEAT provides for this vehicle. nication between the Infotainment System and mobile devices: ● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must activate the option Setup, Data transfer ● MirrorLink® for SEAT apps. »

163 Infotainment System

● The interaction level of the Apps on the during transmission or the improper use of Is Full Link blocked? system must be: ALLOW. mobile terminals. ● Protect the mobile terminal with its applications from improper use. Note ● Never make modifications to the applica- ● Use of Full Link technology may result in tions. high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan. ● Consult the instruction manual for the ● SEAT recommends having a high battery mobile terminal. charge on the device when connected to Full Link. WARNING ● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link, The use of applications while driving can the “Date and time” should be correctly distract your attention from the traffic. Dis- configured. Select Settings > Date and Fig. 180 Message on Infotainment system tracting the driver in any way can lead to Time. screen. an accident and cause injuries. ● SEAT applications are designed to com- To unblock this feature, you must obtain the ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. municate with the vehicle and interact with it via the Full Link connection, therefore its accessory from your SEAT dealer. Otherwise, functionality is linked to the mobile device a message like this will appear on the screen CAUTION being connected via USB. whenever you select the feature ››› Fig. 180. ● In areas where special regulations apply ● You can find further information on the or the use of mobile terminals is forbidden, technical requirements, compatible devi- the mobile terminal must be switched off at ces, suitable applications and availability all times. The radiation produced by the at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers. mobile terminal when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. ● SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, the inadequate programming of the applications, the insufficient coverage of the network, the loss of data

164 Connectivity

Requirements for Full Link websites to confirm whether your phone is compatible with the system. Mirror Link – Check smartphone compatibility: www.mirrorlink.com/phones – MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher – Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or the CCC must be installed in the device. Android Auto – Check smartphone compatibility. An- droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/ – Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher – Install Android Auto™ app Apple CarPlay – Check smartphone compatibility. Apple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay – iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher – Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see phone settings)

3 USB cable connecting car to phone: use the USB cable approved and sup- Fig. 181 Full Link Requirements plied by the phone's official distributor.

1 Full Link Activated: If you do not have Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it as an accessory at your Authorised Serv- ice. 2 Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror- Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

165 Infotainment System

Activation of Full Link Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not What should I do if it does not con- necessary to establish the connection be- nect? tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces- Restart the mobile device sary to enable all of the app features1). Check the USB cable visually. Proceed as follows to use Full Link: Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam- ● Switch on the Infotainment system aged or worn.

● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's Clean the USB ports (device USB port using a USB cable ››› page 195. Visually check and vehicle). that the USB ports ● In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se- are properly con- Try another compatible mo- Fig. 182 Full Link Setup lect Activate data transfer for SEAT nected. bile device. apps ››› Fig. 182: Check that the vehicle and device Have the USB port replaced at Finally, a message will appear stating that USB connections a SEAT Authorised Service. data transfer will commence when the device are not damaged and/or worn. Have the mobile device re- is connected. Please note that data is trans- paired or replace it. ferred over connections between your vehicle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec- Try another compatible mobile device. ted, the technology compatible with your device can be used.

Note

Fig. 183 Full Link menu Depending on your smartphone, it may have to be unlocked for the connection to occur.

1) Using the data connection to transfer the smartphone apps to Full Link may involve additional charges. Please check the charges with your operator. 166 Connectivity

Pairing of portable devices sup- systems, a choice will be presented for which Depends on each technology: ® one to make the connection with ››› Fig. 184. porting the MirrorLink , Android 1. Availability in a country Auto™ and/or Apple CarPlay™ View of the device list 2. Third party applications technologies iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car- For further information: Play™. MirrorLink®: There are some Android devices that support www.mirrorlink.com MirrorLink® and Android Auto™. Apple CarPlay™: Bear in mind that once the device is connec- www.apple.com/ios/carplay ted it will not be available as an audio source. Android Auto™: www.android.com/auto Full Link setup

Function button: function Note ● In order to use Android Auto™ technology  Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allows Fig. 184 Full Link menu the exchange of information between the vehicle and it is necessary to download the Android applications authorised by SEAT. Auto™ application, located on Google Carousel Play™.

When you enter the Full Link context for the Last Mode ● Only compatible applications can be first time, the technologies available for pair- used, in accordance with the technology ing the portable device are displayed. If a session using one technology ends with- connected. out the disconnection being made from the Once the device connects via USB, the sys- Infotainment system (simply by disconnect- tem will offer you the technologies available ing the cable) then when the device is next for establishing a connection with your mo- connected to it, the session will start without bile phone. the user being required to take any action1). In the event of simultaneous connections between two devices with different operating Information Consult the mobile device manual.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be unlocked in order to establish the connection. 167 Infotainment System

® MirrorLink the portable device on the Infotainment sys- Function button: function tem screen. Press to close the open apps. To avoid distracting the driver while driving, Then press the apps to be only specially adapted applications can be CLOSE APPS closed or the Close all function used ››› in Full Link technology descrip- button to close all the open ap- tion on page 163. plications. Press to change to the mobile 1 : 1 Requirements device screen. In order to use MirrorLink®, the following re- SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup quirements must be met: Press to return to the MirrorLink® ››› Fig. 186 1 ● The mobile device must be compatible with main menu. Fig. 185 Function buttons in the general view MirrorLink®. of compatible applications. Press to display all the function ● The mobile device must be connected to ››› Fig. 186 2 buttons in the lower or upper the Infotainment system via USB. right-hand margin of the screen.

● Depending on the mobile device used, a Fig. 186  /  ››› Allows buttons 1 and 2 to be suitable application must be installed for the hidden or shown. use of MirrorLink® on the device. ››› Fig. 172 12

Initiating the connection MirrorLink® setup

● In order to initiate the connection with the Function button: function mobile device, it is simply necessary to connect it to the Infotainment system via the USB  Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows: Allows Mirror- ® connection. Link pop-up windows in applications that support it. Fig. 186 Other MirrorLink function buttons. ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will request that you accept the device. MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables communication between a portable device and Function buttons and possible messages the Infotainment system via USB. Using it makes it possible to display and man- Function button: function age the content and functions displayed on To return to the Full Link main Full Link menu. 168 Connectivity

Apple CarPlay™* ● If you start the session using Apple ● The mobile device must be connected to CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible the Infotainment system via USB. 3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele- to pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol- phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones only ● The Android Auto™ application should allowing message will appear in the main support Apple CarPlay™ ready be downloaded and installed on the Phone menu: mobile device. Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables Please disconnect Apple CarPlay communication between a mobile telephone Initiating the connection and the Infotainment system via USB. first, before you can connect another mobile telephone. In order to initiate the connection with the This makes it possible to display and operate mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- Holding down the  button will start the the mobile telephone on the Infotainment nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB Apple™ voice “engine”. system screen. connection, and to be sure to follow the in- To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- structions of the device being paired. Requirements ment system, press the SEAT icon. ● The first connection to Android Auto™ must In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following be done while the vehicle is stationary. requirements must be met: Android Auto™* ● Once the first pop-up window about ac- ● Make sure that you do not have Apple cepting data transfer between the car and CarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set- 3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones. the device has been accepted, a message tings > General > Restrictions > Android Auto™ is a protocol which enables will appear requesting that you check your CarPlay > ON. communication between a portable device mobile device for the confirmations needed ● The mobile device must be compatible with and the Infotainment system via USB. to pair it with the Infotainment system. Apple CarPlay™. ● If you are initiating the session using This makes it possible to display and operate Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo- ● The mobile device must be connected to the mobile telephone on the Infotainment bile telephone connects automatically via the Infotainment system via USB. system screen. Bluetooth® to the Infotainment system telephone and it will not be possible to pair an- Initiating the connection Requirements other mobile telephone via Bluetooth®. In order to initiate the connection with the In order to use Android Auto™, the following mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- requirements must be met: Holding down the  button will start the nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB Android™ voice “engine”. connection. ● The mobile device must be compatible with To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- Android Auto™. ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re- ment system, press the Return to SEAT quest that you accept the device. button. » 169 Infotainment System

Note Is there a navigation option? If Full Link stops working, where can I have it repaired? Some mobile devices require a change in Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link the USB connection mode in order to use technologies if the technology is available in your If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal- Android Auto™. country and if you have the Navigation app. er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should ● Make sure that your mobile is in “Media see your mobile telephone vendor. What is the difference between using the Full Link Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is system navigator (via telephone) instead of an- Will WhatsApp be certified? connected by USB to the Infotainment sys- other navigator? tem. This depends on the technology. Benefits: Daily updates. Issues: data consumption, reception problems. Is MirrorLink® available in my country? Note ® Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™ Can I send voice messages? Yes, MirrorLink is available in all the countries and regions where SEAT operates. services, as well as certain basic applica- With certified apps, you can answer but not send tions of the Android system. voice messages. What are the differences between MirrorLink®, ● Make sure that you always have Google™ Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? services updated in order to use this tech- What apps are visible while driving? MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ and nology. Depending on the technology: Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies. – for MirrorLink®: SEAT-certified apps and CCC, They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is – for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™, designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper- Frequently asked questions about – for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™. ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone. Full Link Where can I find compatible apps? Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEAT model? Compatible apps can be found on the following links: What is the connection method? www.mirrorlink.com/ No, this is not possible. www.android.com/auto/ USB Cable. www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ Where can I find more information about Full Link? Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? Where can I download apps? If you have any questions, please see our Innova- No. The USB cable supplied with the device should On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® and tion/Connectivity sections on our website: be used. on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™. www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re- [email protected]

170 Operating modes

Operating modes Function button: function Selects the previous or next stored sta- Radio tion or of the station list. This setting  /  can be changed in the Radio settings menu (FM, AM, DAB). Related video 1 to 18a) Memory buttons ››› page 172.

Stops the scan function (only visible when the function is under way). It can SCAN be activated in the settings menu (FM, Fig. 189 Radio mode: station list (FM). AM and DAB).

a) Press the infotainment button  to open The Media System / Touch Colour model has 15 Fig. 187 Radio mode memories. the Radio main menu ››› Fig. 188. Information and possible icons Radio main menu function buttons Radio main menu Display: Meaning Function button: function View the frequency or the name of the To change the group of memory but- station and, where applicable, the radio 1 tons slide a finger over the memory A text. The name of the radio station and buttons from left to right or vice-versa the radio text will only be displayed if equipped with RDS and if it is active. Allows you to select the frequency BAND band. RDS The RDS radio data service is deactiva- Off ted. STATION Opens the list of currently receivable LIST radio from the active frequency band. Traffic information can be retrieved: se- TP lect Radio > Settings > Traffic Allows you to select the frequency MANUAL station. manually. Fig. 188 RADIO main menu. No stations with traffic news are availa- Allows you to select the information  ble. VIEW shown on the screen. Only available in DAB mode. The radio station is stored on a memory  button. » Opens the setup menu of the active SETTINGS frequency band (FM, AM or DAB). 171 Infotainment System

Display: Meaning In the Radio main menu, you can store sta- Functions of the memory buttons tions from all available frequency wave- The tracking of alternative frequencies is lengths on the numbered function buttons. A station logo can be assigned to AF off disabled. These function buttons are called “memory the stations stored on the memory buttons. buttons”. Storing the A logo is automatically assigned Note station logo on from the database if the Advanced the memory Functions of the memory buttons radio settings option is enableda). ● The availability of AM and DAB bands de- buttons pends on the country and/or equipment. In A logo can also be assigned man- Press the memory button corre- the event that the AM and DAB bands are ually from an external data source sponding to the desired station. (USB/SD card). not available, the BAND function button Selecting the The stored stations can only be text will not be shown. station from a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour the memory played by pressing the corre- ● Bear in mind that being underground, in model. buttons sponding memory button provided tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or it can be received at your current mountains can interfere with radio signals. location. ● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to Move your finger over the screen Media the windows may affect reception on vehi- from left to right or vice-versa. cles with a window aerial. Change mem- OR: Press one of the function but- Introduction ory bank tons ››› Fig. 190 A Memory buttons The memory buttons are displayed in three memory banks.

Keep and hold the desired memory Storing the button until an audible signal is station on the heard, the station will be stored on memory but- this memory button. You can also tons Fig. 191 Related video store a station from a station list. “Media sources” are audio sources containing audio files on various different data storage devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external MP3 player). These audio files can be played

Fig. 190 Radio main menu.

172 Operating modes by the Infotainment system via their corre- Using the Media main menu, different media Function button: function sponding drives or audio input sockets (inter- sources can be selected and played. nal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi- Opens the track list. Depending on SELECTION media socket etc.). ● Press the infotainment button  to open the level, track list, folders or source. the Radio main menu ››› Fig. 192. Changes track in Media mode or fast  /  Copyright It will continue playing the last media source forward/rewind. Audio and video files on data storage devices selected from the same point. Playback stops. The  function but- are usually protected by intellectual property  The media source being played is indicated ton changes to  . rights, as per the corresponding national and on the dropdown list when pressing the international laws. Be aware of the current le- Playback is resumed. The  func- SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 192.   gal provisions! tion button changes to . If there is no available media source, the Me- Opens the Media Settings SETTINGS Note dia main menu is displayed. menu.

● Do not use memory card adapters. Repeat all tracks. Function buttons of the main Media menu ● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio- Repeats all the tracks that are on the ration or loss of files on data storage devi- Function button: function same memory level as the track be- ces.  ing played at that moment. If in the Indicates the media source being REPEAT Media Settings menu the played. Press to select another me-  Mix/Repeat including subfolders op- dia source ››› page 174. tion is enabled, it also includes the Media main menu subfolders. CD : Internal CD drive ››› page 175. The current track will be repeated. SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memory  card ››› page 175. REPEAT

SOURCE USB : External data storage device Random play. connected to the USB port  Includes all the tracks that are on page 175. ››› the same memory level as the track being played at that moment. If in AUX : External audio source connec- MIX  ted to the AUX-IN multimedia socket the Media Settings menu the  ››› page 176. Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is enabled, it also includes the BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio subfolders. » Fig. 192 Media main menu. ››› page 176.

173 Infotainment System

Messages and symbols on the Media main Note sumed from the point at which it was stop- menu ped. ● When the media source is inserted, playing will not start automatically; it is neces- Display: Meaning Optional Media playback sources sary for the user to select the source. Nor Displays information about the artist will the media source change when it is Function button: media source name, album name and song title (CD ejected.  text , ID3 tag on compressed audio CD Internal CD drive ››› page 175. files). A SD CARD 1 Audio CD: displays track information. If Changing the Media source SD memory card ››› page 175. no data is available, it only displays SD CARD 2 * Track and the number corresponding to the position it occupies on the data stor- External data storage device con- age device. USB nected to the USB port  ››› page 175. Album cover display: If there are various covers within the same folder/album, the External audio source connected system only displays one of them. AUX to the AUX-IN multimedia socket It prioritizes displaying the covers in the ››› page 176. B following manner: ® 1. Cover embedded in the file(s). BT AUDIO Bluetooth audio ››› page 176. 2. Image in file folder. 3. Default icon of the connected device. Note

The playing time so far and time remain- Fig. 193 MEDIA mode: change media source. The Media source can be changed in the ing in minutes and seconds. In the case C Track list view: select Media > View. of audio files with variable bit rates (VBR) ● From the Media main menu, press the  the remaining time may vary. Infotainment button repeatedly to cycle The TP function is active and can be through the available media sources. TPa) used: select Radio > Settings > ● OR: From the Media main menu, press the Traffic programme (TP). SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 193 and se- There are no traffic stations available: lect the desired media source. a) select Radio > Settings > Traf- fic programme (TP). In the pop-up window, the Media sources not selected are shown as deactivated (in grey). a) Depends on the market and unit in question. When a Media source that has already been played is selected again, playback is re- 174 Operating modes

Insert or eject a CD ● The CD in the drive will be ejected and system, the function button becomes inactive must be removed within approximately (grey colour). 3 Not available for model: Media System 10 seconds. Touch/Colour ● Press the inserted memory card. The memory card “jumps” to the eject position. ● Remove the memory card. Insert or eject a memory card Unreadable memory card Depending on the features and the country, the vehicle may have one or two slots for SD If a memory card is inserted and the data cards. cannot be read, the relevant warning appears. Inserting a memory card Insert the compatible memory card, bevelled edge first and with the label face up (con- External data storage device con- Fig. 194 Slots for data storage devices in the tacts face down), into slot ››› Fig. 194 2 or nected to the USB port  glove compartment. ››› Fig. 171 9 , until properly inserted. Depending on the the features and the coun- The driver should refrain from operating the If a memory card cannot be inserted, make try, the vehicle may have a USB connection unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or sure it is positioned correctly and is compati- ››› page 195. change the data storage device before mov- ble with the unit. ing off! Audio files on an external data storage device Removing a memory card connected to the USB port  can be played The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio and controlled via the Infotainment system. data CDs. The inserted memory cards must be prepared for removal. Where this manual refers to external data storage devices, this means USB mass stor- Inserting a CD ● From the main Media menu, press the age devices containing supported audio files, ● Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks. ● Push the CD into the slot Fig. 194 3 to tings menu or press the infotainment button ››› Only supported audio files are displayed and the point where it is drawn in automatically.  and then press Settings to open menu System settings. played. Other files are ignored. Ejecting a CD ● Press the Remove safely function button. A Instructions and restrictions dropdown menu appears with the following ● Press button  1 . options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card* and USB. After Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other correctly ejecting the memory card from the media players depends on the unit. » 175 Infotainment System

The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt- Note Connecting an external audio source to age of 5 volts for a USB connection. the AUX-IN multimedia socket ● Do not connect an external media player External hard disks with a capacity greater at the same time to play music via Blue- ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment than 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32 tooth® and via the USB port  with the In- system. file system in some circumstances. You will fotainment system, as this could cause ● Connect the external audio source to the find the necessary software and information playback limitations. AUX-IN multimedia socket. on the Internet. ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, ● Start playback on the external audio Take into account all other instructions and it cannot be simultaneously connected by source. USB and by Bluetooth®. limitations regarding requirements for media ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE ● If a connected device is not recognised, sources. function button and select AUX . disconnect all the connected devices and Disconnecting try connecting the device again. ● Do not use memory card adaptors, USB Any connected data storage devices must extension cords or USB hubs! Connecting an external audio be prepared before their disconnection in or- source via Bluetooth® der to remove them. Bluetooth® Audio mode allows you to listen to ● From the main Media menu, press the External audio source connected to audio files being played on a Bluetooth® au- SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- the AUX-IN multimedia socket  dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec- tings menu or press the infotainment button ted via Bluetooth® (audio playback by Blue-  and then press Settings to open menu Depending on the equipment and country tooth®) over the vehicle speakers. System settings. there may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket ● Press the Remove safely function button. A ››› page 195. Conditions dropdown menu appears with the following The connected external audio source is ® options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card* and USB. After ● The Bluetooth audio source must support played over the vehicle speakers and cannot ® correctly ejecting the data storage device the A2DP Bluetooth profile. be controlled via the Infotainment system from the system, the function button be- ● In the Bluetooth Settings menu the controls. comes inactive (grey colour).  Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must ● Now the data storage device can be dis- The connection of an external audio source is be on. Select Phone > Settings > Blue- connected. indicated by AUX on the screen. tooth.

176 Operating modes

Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer The available functions will depend on the Images ® ® Bluetooth Audio profile that the connected ● Activate Bluetooth visibility on the external 3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi external player supports. Bluetooth® audio source (e.g., mobile tele- System phone). With media players that support the AVRCP ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment Bluetooth® profile, playback on the Blue- system. tooth® audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE to Bluetooth® Audio mode or to a different au- function button and select BT audio . dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or ● Press Search for new device in order to con- change the track via the Infotainment system. nect an external Bluetooth® audio source for the first time ››› page 190. Note ® ● OR: Select a Bluetooth external audio ● Due to the large number of possible Blue- source from the list. tooth® audio sources, it is not possible to ● Please refer to the instructions on the guarantee fault-free operation of all de- Fig. 195 Images main menu. screen of the Infotainment system and on the scribed functions. Using the Images menu, image files can be Bluetooth® audio source regarding the rest of ● Do not connect an external media player viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- the procedure. to play music via Bluetooth® and via the show. USB port  ››› page 175 at the same time You may still need to manually start playback with the Infotainment system, as this could The image files must be stored on a compati- ® on the Bluetooth source. cause playback limitations. ble data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SD When playback on the Bluetooth® audio ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, card). source is stopped, the Infotainment system it cannot be simultaneously connected by ® ● Press the Infotainment  button and remains in Bluetooth® Audio mode. USB and by Bluetooth . then select the Images context. Controlling playback ● Press the SOURCE function button to select the source where the pictures in question are The extent to which the Bluetooth® audio located. source can be controlled via the Infotainment system depends on the connected Blue- Function button: function tooth® audio source. SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files. »

177 Infotainment System

Function button: function ● OR: Stretch or reduce the image on the Navigation1) screen using 2 fingers. The image viewed was obtained via GPS localisation and upon pressing Rotating the view/image Introduction  this function button, the navigator menu opens to start a route to this To rotate an image, in addition to the buttons destination. provided for this ( / ), you can also press on the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and, Rotate the view of the image to the  /  left or the right. while continuing to press with your thumb, slide another finger (e.g. your index finger)  Reset the view of the image. around it like a compass either clockwise (to rotate the image to the right) or anti-clock- Fig. 196 Related video To stop the playback of a slideshow. wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro-  The  function button changes to General information  . tate the image 90° with respect to its current position. Using all the data available, the Infotainment To continue the playback of a slide- system calculates the optimum route to the   show. The function button Requirements for viewing images destination. changes to  . Image files Maximum resolu- The destination is defined by entering an ad- To change to the PREVIOUS or dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- NEXT image. tion tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be  /  The same function can be per- BMP 4MP taken into account in the route calculation formed by sliding your finger hori- (dynamic route guidance ››› page 186). zontally across the screen. JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode) Spoken instructions and visual guidance on JPG 64MP SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu. the navigation unit and on the instrument GIF 4MP panel will direct you to your destination. Enlarging or reducing the view PNG 4MP CAUTION To enlarge or reduce the view of the image displayed: The navigation announcements played may be inaccurate (e.g. due to out-of-date ● Turn the adjustment knob. navigation data).

1) Only available for the model: Navi System 178 Operating modes

Instructions for navigation Updating and using navigation da- Note ta from an SD card ● The inserted memory card must be pre- When the Infotainment system is unable to re- pared before it is ejected ››› page 175. ceive any data from GPS satellites (due to a The Infotainment system always requires the ● Press the Infotainment button  ; then dense tree canopy, underground car park), navigation data that is currently valid for this press Settings to open the System set- navigation can still continue using the vehicle unit in order to allow all functions to be used tings menu. sensors. in full. Using an old version may lead to errors during navigation. ● Navigation is not possible without the SD Possible limitations in navigation card. In areas that are not or are only partially digi- Updating navigation data ● Do not remove the memory card while the navigation data is in use. This could tised on the data storage device, the Infotain- The current navigation data can be downloa- damage the memory card! ment system will still attempt to provide route ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor- ● The navigation memory card may not be guidance. ed in a SD card compatible with the unit. used as memory for other files. The info- Navigation area and updating navigation Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT tainment system will not recognise the files saved. data dealerships. ● SEAT recommends only using original Roads and streets are subject to constant The procedure is described on the internet at www.seat.com. SEAT memory cards to use navigation data. change (e.g. new roads, changes to street The use of other memory cards could limit names and building numbers). Therefore, if its operation. the navigation data is not updated, then er- Using navigation data rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid- ● Insert the memory card ››› page 175. ance. ● Do not remove the memory card while test- SEAT recommends updating navigation data ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear. on a regular basis. Up to date navigation data can be downloaded from www.seat.com or If the inserted memory card contains valid acquired at a SEAT dealer. navigation data, the following message appears: “The source contains a valid navigation database”. It is now possible to navigate with the memory card data. When the memory card is no longer needed by the hardware, it will be prepared for removal ››› page 175.

179 Infotainment System

Navigation main menu Function button: function ● In the Navigation main menu, press the New destination function button. NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination ● Press the Options function button and se- ››› page 180. lect the required type of destination (Search, ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 182. Address, POI on the route or On map). ● MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina- Using voice control*, if you say Town, street tions ››› page 182. and number, without pauses, and then the instruction “Start Route Guidance” a route to POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta- the given destination will start. tions and restaurants) within a particular search area ››› page 184. Search VIEW To modify or activate or deactivate the split Search for addresses and Points of Interest Fig. 197 Navigation main menu screen and show POI ››› Fig. 197 A ››› page 184. using the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 198. SETTINGS Open the Navigation Settings The Navigation main menu allows you to se- menu ››› Fig. 197. For cities, post codes and points of interest, lect a new destination, call up a previously the full details must be entered. You can also used or stored destination and search for search for points of interest by names or cat- points of interest. egories. When necessary, enter the name of New destination (enter destina- the city to refine the search. Opening the main Navigation menu tion) ● Press the Infotainment system button  ››› Fig. 198 to open the last menu that was open in navi- Press to open the cursor buttons (, ), A gation. which allow you to move within the text.

Function buttons and messages on the Address main Navigation menu After entering a country and a town, you can Function button: function start navigating towards the centre of the selected town. A The split screen is displayed ››› page 185. When narrowing down the destination ad- Messages and function buttons on the map B dress, please note that every entry restricts display ››› page 185. Fig. 198 Search screen. the available range of subsequent selections. For instance, if the street you are looking for is

180 Operating modes not in the postcode area you have selected After starting route guidance Route criteria: Meaning in a previous window, you will not be able to find the street at the street selection stage. Orange route: Shortest route to the destination, even if it results in longer travelling time. The route Function button: function may have unconventional sections such as secon- dary roads. Country : To select the desired country. ● Select the desired route by pressing it. City : To enter the desired city or postcode. Once the route has been calculated, the sys- Street : To enter the desired street name. tem gives the first navigation announcement. House number : To enter the desired house number. Before turning, up to 3 navigation announcements will be heard. Junction : To select the desired intersection. Fig. 199 Route calculation. ● Press the adjustment knob ››› Fig. 172 7 to Last destinations : Open the My destinations listen to the last audible navigation instruc- menu ››› page 182. After starting route guidance, the route to the tion. first destination will be calculated. Start : Start route guidance to the selected address. The calculation will be performed in accord- A navigation announcement informs you when you have reached your “destination”. Using the map ance with the data selected in the Route options menu. ● Select the destination on the map or enter A navigation announcement informing you it using GPS coordinates and confirm with After starting route guidance, three alterna- that you have reached the “destination area” is given if the exact destination cannot be OK . tive routes will be suggested depending on the selected setup ››› Fig. 199. These 3 routes reached because it is located in a non-digi- Function button: function correspond to the selectable route options: tised area. Economical, Fast and Short. During dynamic route guidance, you re- Save : To save the selected point of interest in the ceive information about reported traffic con- destination memory ››› page 182. Route criteria: Meaning gestion on the route. An additional navigation Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti- announcement is given if the route is recalcu- nation. Blue route: Economical route, the route is calculated by taking into consideration economic factors. lated due to traffic congestion. Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga- During a navigation announcement, you can tion Settings > Route options. Red route: Fastest route to the destination, even if it is necessary to make a deviation. change its volume using the button  Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point ››› Fig. 172 6 . » of interest.

181 Infotainment System

For other adjustments to the navigation rec- Function button: function Routes ommendations, select Navigation > Set- In the Route mode, you can define various Route details : View route information for current route. tings > Navigation announcements destinations (final destination and stopovers). settings. The starting point of a route is always the current vehicle position determined by the In- Note My destinations (destination mem- fotainment system. The destination is the ● If you miss a turning during route guid- ory) end point of a route. Stopover destinations ance and are currently unable to turn back, are driven to before the destination. keep on driving until the navigation system The stored destinations can be selected from offers a new route. the My destinations menu. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the ● The quality of the navigation recommen- My Destinations. function button. dations given by the Infotainment system ● Press the My destinations. function button in ● Press the Routes function button. The depends on the navigation data available the main Navigation menu. routes stored previously will appear. and any reported traffic problems. ● Select the desired function button. Store position , Routes , Destinations , If you have not stored any routes or want to Last destinations or Home address . create a new route, press the New route func- Route tion button and then follow the instructions as Store position for a new destination, before pressing Store . In the Navigation main menu, press the Route ● By pressing the Store position function but- Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol- function button. ton, the vehicle's current position is stored as lowing function buttons: The Route function button is only displayed a Flagged destination in the destination with route guidance activated. memory. Function button: function ● Mark the Flagged destination in the Delete : To delete a stored route. Function button: function destination memory. Edit : To edit and store a route. Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance. ● Press the Store function button. Start : To start route guidance. Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a new The name can be changed in the following stopover ››› page 180. input window. Press the  function button to store the destination. Function buttons and indications in the New Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10 route or Edit route menu km in length) from the current route, e.g. to avoid congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route Function button or message: function or meaning function button and then Cancel congestion .  Stopover. 182 Operating modes

 Destination. Stop To stop route guidance to the active stored home address can be edited or over- destination.b) written. Estimated time of arrival at destina- ... tion. To move a stopover or a destination to If a home address has already been stored,  another position on the list. Press and route guidance will be started to the stored ... Calculated distance to destination. drag to move the destination. home address. a) This function button is only displayed with route If a home address has not yet been stored, an Travelling time. ... guidance activated and when a destination has been address can be assigned as the home ad- added to the tour. dress. ... Distance to the next stopover. b) This function button is only displayed with route guidance activated. Assigning the home address for the first time: Press on the destination to display the function buttons. Last destinations Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position as the home address.  Delete destination. View of destinations for which a route has al- Address : Press to enter the home address manual- ready been started. To start guidance direct to the selec- ly. ted destination. Destinations that  come before the selected destination My destinations Editing the home address: are ignored. The home address can be edited in the Naviga- ● Press the Options function button and se- To open the detailed view of the desti- lect the desired function button. tion settings > Manage memory menu.  nation in question.

Available function buttons. Function button: function

New dest. To add a new destination to the tour. Destination memory : View of destinations stored manually and from imported vCards ››› page 187, Im- Destina- To add a new destination from My porting vCards (electronic business cards). tions destinations to the tour. Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites. Storing To store the created tour in the tour memory. Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that have a stored address (postal address). Start To start route guidance.

Calculate To update calculated distance and es- Home address timated arrival time.a) Only one address or position can be stored as the home address at any one time. The

183 Infotainment System

Points of interest (POI) Selecting a point of interest on the map Function button: function

Function button: function Map display in three dimensions (bird's eye view). There are several points of interest in the area. 1 Press this symbol to open a list of points of in- 3D  Buildings are also displayed in three terest. dimensions. The places of interest and well-known buildings are shown in de- The only point of interest in this zone. Press the tail and in colour. 2 symbol to open the detailed view of the point of interest. a) To display the destination on the map.

Quick POI search a) To display the route on the map. In the Navigation main menu, press the POI Fig. 200 Points of interest on the map. Auto / To change between day and night for- function button and the three main catego- Day / Night mat. ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the name The points of interest saved in the navigation of the point of interest to be searched using Press to display the split screen data memory are divided into different point Split screen the new destination keypad, or press ››› page 185. of interest categories. Each point of interest Search nearby on the map ››› table on category is assigned a symbol for display on POI Display points of interest on the map. page 185. the map. a) This function button is only displayed with route If a database of points of interest has been guidance activated. imported into the Infotainment system, View ››› page 187, Importing Personal POI the category Personal POI is also shown. In the Navigation main menu, press the View In the Map settings menu, the categories of function button. points of interest to display on the map can be configured. Up to 10 categories of points Function button: function of interest can be selected. Map display in two dimensions (con- 2D  ventional).

184 Operating modes

Split screen Function button: function Function button: function

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active) GPS status (satellite reception).

a) This function button is only shown when route guidance is not active or when predictive route guidance Map display is active. Press the  function button to close the split screen. At any moment during navigation, pressing inside the map will make a pop-up menu appear with the following functions: Fig. 201 Split screen displayed.

The split screen ››› Fig. 201 A may display Function button: function any of the information described below: Street name or coordinates : shows the details of the point selected on the map. ● Press on the name of the split screen to select a display option. Only when you press on an icon on the map: Fig. 202 Messages and function buttons on the map display. POI : name of the point of interest (when only one Function button: function appears on the map). Function buttons and messages on the map display. Audio : Indicates the selected audio source. Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you press on the map on various POIs grouped to- To activate function buttons  and , press Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav- gether). elling direction and indicates the current position of function button . the vehicle (street name). Favourite : name of the favourite. Function button: function Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres, Home : Home address. POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings To select automatic scaling. If the func- up additional information Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.  tion is active, the symbol is displayed in blue. a) Most frequent routes : Information on the user's most Add stopover destination : only when you have an ac- frequent routes. tive route.  Current altitude indicator. »

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only for the area around the point selected on the map.

185 Infotainment System

Function button: function Traffic reports and dynamic route If during route guidance a traffic report is re- guidance to the destination (TRAF- ceived that affects the route being travelled, View map scale. Turn the setup button or an alternative route will be searched for if the FIC)  move your fingers together/apart on the Infotainment system calculates that time can touchscreen to change the scale of the be saved. map.

It can mute or repeat the last announce- Traffic reports on map (selection)  ment, or can change the announcement volume. Symbol: Meaning

To change the orientation of the map  : Slow traffic  (north-facing or direction of travel). This function is only available in 2D mode.  : Traffic jam  To centre the vehicle position on the map. : Accident To centre the destination on the map. This  function button is only displayed if either Fig. 203 Traffic reports  Display destination on map or Display  : Slippery road surface (ice or snow) route on the map is selected The Infotainment system constantly receives ››› page 184. traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-  : Slippery road surface Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few ground, provided a TMC traffic news station  seconds, it automatically returns to the can be received at the current location. The  : Danger last selected scale. station being listened to does not have to be the traffic news station.  : Road works Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are displayed. Select Navigation > Settings > List of available traffic reports  : Strong wind Map > Show road signs. ● Press the Infotainment button  : Road closed to traffic ››› Fig. 172 12 and then press the TRAFFIC  function button. During route guidance, traffic congestion that does not affect the route calculated is dis- Dynamic route guidance played in grey. In order for dynamic route guidance to function, Dynamic route must be activated in the route options.

186 Operating modes

Predictive navigation Importing vCards (electronic busi- Importing Personal POI ness cards) Importing the Personal POI to a points of Importing vCards to the destination mem- interest destination memory ory ● Insert the data storage device with the stor- ● Insert the data storage device with the stored Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain- ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment ment system ››› page 172. system ››› page 172. ● Press the Infotainment button  and then ● Press the SETTINGS function button in the select Settings . main Navigation menu. ● In the Settings menu, press the ● In the Navigation settings menu, press Manage memory function button. Fig. 204 Predictive navigation the Import destinations function button. ● Press Update my POIs and then press ● Select the data carrier with the vCards Update and Next to import the Personal When you activate Predictive navigation, the saved in the list. POIs. system detects and stores in the background ● Press Import all vCards from this folder . ● Confirm the import notification with the OK routes that are frequently followed, without function button. them being active destination routes. This ● Confirm the import notice with the OK function has no navigation announcements function button. The stored Personal POI are now in the points unless the user requires them, getting them of interest destination memory ››› page 184 The saved vCards will now be in the destina- by pressing the adjustment knob and can be used for navigation purposes. tion memory ››› page 182 and may be used ››› Fig. 172 7 . for navigation. The stored Personal POI can be deleted in ● On the main screen of the Navigation menu, the Navigation Settings > Manage in the pop-up window, press the Note Storage menu. Frequent routes button. To display frequently Only one address per vCard can be impor- followed routes press the Show on map button ted. In the event any vCards have multiple ››› Fig. 204. addresses, only the main address will be imported.

187 Infotainment System

Navigation with images ● If the image displayed was taken using GPS ● MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radio localisation, the  function button will appear. or Media function) Press to start guidance to a destination. ● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen) ● SETTINGS ›››  page 24

Route guidance in Demo mode With the function button View you can access the following information: If demo mode is activated in the Navigation Settings menu, an additional pop-up win- Consumers dow opens when you start route guidance. By pressing the Consumers button, informa- ● Pressing the Demo mode function button tion on the status of the vehicle's main con- starts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti- sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via a Fig. 205 Images main menu. nation you have entered. consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)1). Selecting an image and starting route ● If you press the Normal function button, a Driving data guidance “real route guidance” starts. The onboard computer is equipped with 3 Bear in mind the requirements and formats of memories that work automatically. In these the compatible images. memories you can see the distance travelled, ● Insert the data storage device with the stor- Vehicle Menu average speed, time passed, average con- ed images or connect it to the Infotainment sumption and autonomy of the vehicle. system. Introduction to using the Vehicle Ecotrainer* ● Press the Infotainment  button and menu then select the Images context. If the corresponding equipment is available, By pressing button  / of the infotainment the ECOTRAINER will provide information on ● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 205 function but- system you will access its main menu with the driving style. The information on driving style ton and select the data storage device where following options: is only evaluated and displayed when moving the images are stored. forward. ● Select the desired image. ● VIEW

1) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units are in kg/h. 188 Operating modes

Vehicle status The instructions shown on the screen for the ● In areas of little or no coverage or, in Press the Vehicle status button to access telephone menus will depend on the mobile some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under- information on the Vehicle status mes- telephone used. There may be variations. pass, your call may be cut off and you may sages and Start-Stop system. The Vehicle Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. For not be able to make even emergency calls. status messages are displayed, in addition to further information on compatible Bluetooth® being specified on the corresponding button. products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or WARNING check on the internet. If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in- Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele- correctly secured in the vehicle, it could Telephone phone and of any accessories. move around the passenger compartment in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre If you detect any operating issues between or emergency stop, resulting in injury. General information your mobile telephone and the Infotainment ● While the vehicle is in motion, always se- system, restart your mobile by switching it off cure the mobile telephone properly outside and on again. the airbag deployment zone.

WARNING WARNING General, mandatory, legal and country- specific instructions and laws for the use of Mobile telephones may interfere with and alter the correct operation of pacemakers Fig. 206 Related video mobile phones inside the vehicle must always be considered. if they are carried directly over them. The Telephone functions described below ● Maintain a minimum distance of at least can be used through the Infotainment system WARNING 20 centimetres between the aerials of the if there is a mobile telephone connected to it mobile telephone and the pacemaker. Speaking by telephone and using the mo- via Bluetooth® ››› page 191. ● Do not carry your switched-on mobile bile telephone management system whilst telephone in your breast pocket directly In order for the mobile telephone to be able driving can distract you from the road and over the pacemaker. to connect to the Infotainment system the tel- cause an accident. ® ● If you suspect interference, switch off the ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth . ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. mobile telephone immediately. If there is no mobile telephone connected to ● Select volume settings that allow you to the Infotainment system, the telephone man- easily hear signals from outside the vehicle CAUTION agement system will not be available. at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens and horns). High speeds, poor weather or road conditions and the quality of reception can all »

189 Infotainment System

affect the audio quality of a telephone con- ● all other places where the vehicle engine the ignition if a connection has been previ- versation in the vehicle. must be switched off. ously established. For this to take place the telephone must be switched on and its Blue- WARNING tooth® function activated, and there must be Note ® Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a no active Bluetooth connection with other ● Restrictions on the use of devices using risk of explosion! The mobile telephone can devices. Bluetooth® technology may apply in some automatically connect to the mobile tele- Bluetooth® connections are free. countries. For further information, contact phone network again if it loses the Blue- ® the local authorities. tooth® connection to the telephone man- Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- ● If you wish to connect a device to the tel- agement system. tooth® SIG, Inc. ephone management system via Blue- tooth® technology, consult the safety ® CAUTION Bluetooth profiles warnings in its instruction manual. Only use When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- compatible Bluetooth® devices. In areas where special regulations apply or ephone management system, a data ex- the use of mobile telephones is prohibited, ® both the telephone and the telephone change takes place via one of the Bluetooth management system must be switched off. profiles. Places with special regulations The radiation produced by the mobile tele- ● Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connect- phone when switched on may interfere with ing a mobile telephone to the phone manag- Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo- sensitive technical and medical equipment, ® bile’s Bluetooth function in places with a risk possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam- er through the HFP the calls can be managed of explosion. In the majority of cases, these age to the equipment. via the Infotainment system. places are signposted, but not always clearly ● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes it ››› in General information on page 189. easier to transmit audio to the infotainment They include, for example: Bluetooth® system with stereo quality. This function may require connecting additional profiles for ● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele- managing and controlling audio playback. ● The lower decks of boats and ferries. phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele- ● Phone book access profile (PBAP): ● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid phone management system. In order to use Serves to download phone book contacts gas (such as propane or butane). the telephone management system with a from the mobile telephone to the Infotainment ● places where the air is laden with chemi- mobile telephone with Bluetooth® technolo- system. cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal gy, it is first necessary to pair them. powder. Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones detect and automatically connect when turning on 190 Operating modes

● Message profile (MAP):1) Serves the ● The ignition must be switched on. ● Press the Bluetooth function button. download and synchronise short messages ● The Bluetooth® function of the mobile tel- ● Press the Find devices function button and (SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain- ephone and the Infotainment system must be then Results . ment system. active as well as visibility. The name of the Bluetooth® function of your ● The keypad lock on the mobile telephone Note Infotainment system will be displayed on the must be deactivated. To prevent them from being heard through main Telephone screen and you can edit this the speakers, the button and mobile tele- Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- name via the Bluetooth settings menu phone alert tones must be disconnected. bile telephone. The search process can take up to 1 minute. Where necessary, disconnect the headset During the pairing process, it is necessary to On the screen, the system will dynamically from the mobile telephone you wish to con- update the names of the Bluetooth® devices nect to the system. enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad. found. Pairing a mobile telephone As soon as the search is completed, the ® names of the Bluetooth® devices found are Pairing and connecting a mobile ● Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth function is activated and visible. displayed on-screen. telephone to the Infotainment sys-  ® tem ● Press the infotainment button. ● Select the Bluetooth device you want to ● Press the Find telephone function button and connect on the infotainment system. In cer- In order to manage a mobile telephone via then Results . tain circumstances, it is possible that to finish the Infotainment system, it is necessary to the connection between the two devices, you pair both devices once. OR: must enter additional data in the mobile tele- ● Press the infotainment  button. phone and Infotainment system. For your safety, we recommend you make the ● link when the vehicle is stationary. In some ● Press the SETTINGS function button. Use your mobile telephone to enter and confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis- countries it is not possible to perform the pair- ● Press the Select mobile phone function but- play of the infotainment system. ing with the vehicle running. ton and then Results . ● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requests Conditions OR: are received on the mobile telephone, make ●  sure to reply to them. » You must guarantee the following setup in the Press the infotainment button. mobile phone and the Infotainment system: ● Press the SETTINGS function button.

1) Not available for the Media System Touch/Col- our model. 191 Infotainment System

OR: ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible to Telephone main menu ● Compare the PIN code shown on the disconnect to this mobile telephone, the tele- play of the Infotainment system with that phone management system will try to auto- shown on the mobile telephone. If they matically connect to the next mobile tele- match, confirm on both devices. phone on the list of paired devices. The maximum range of the Bluetooth® con- When the pairing has been finalized correct- nection is approx. 10 meters. The active ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The Bluetooth® connection disconnects if this dis- phone book, call list and SMS messages stor- tance is exceeded. The connection is auto- ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once matically re-established as soon as the de- the requests have been accepted in the mo- vice is once again within Bluetooth® range. bile phone. The duration of the loading process depends on the amount of data stored on WARNING Fig. 207 Phone main menu. the mobile telephone. After downloading, the data will be available on the Infotainment Do not perform the pairing and connection Assign a user profile system. process while driving. This may cause an accident! The data from the phonebook, the call lists Pairing and connection of mobile tele- and the stored speed dial buttons are as- phones Note signed to a user profile and remain stored on the telephone management system. This in- You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to ● It may be necessary to confirm the phone formation will be available every time the mo- the Infotainment system, but the number of si- book data and SMS transfer request on the bile telephone is connected to the telephone multaneous connections varies: mobile telephone. management system. ● Check that there are no requests pend- ● Media System Touch / Colour: a phone After the first connection, it will take a few mi- ing acceptance in your mobile phone. If connected to the hands-free profile and the there are, this could block some of the nutes for the data from the phonebook of the same or a different device connected to the functions in the Telephone menu. linked mobile phone to be available in the In- Bluetooth® audio profile. fotainment system. The next time that the ● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo- mobile telephone is connected (e.g. on the bile phones simultaneously connected to the next journey) the phonebook is updated au- hands-free profile and one of them is also tomatically. ® connected Bluetooth audio profile. If any entries in the mobile phonebook have been modified while connected, a manual When the Infotainment system is switched on, update of the phonebook data can be it automatically connects to the last connec-

192 Operating modes initiated from the User profile settings Function button: function Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 208 menu. SMSa) To open the menu for SMS messages. View of stored telephone number or name. If Telephone management can store a maxi- the name stored in the phonebook has an mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones. To open call lists of the connected mo- assigned photo, it can be displayed: select CALLS B If you wish to link/connect another mobile bile telephone ››› page 194. Telephone > Settings > User phone, the oldest user profile will automati- profile > Show pictures for To open the Telephone settings SETTINGS contacts*. cally be replaced. menu.  Press to accept a call. Telephone management system function a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour model. Press to end a call. buttons  ● Press the infotainment button  to open OR: Press to reject an incoming call. the Phone main menu. Display and symbols of the tele- Press to mute or to reactivate the ring tone  during an incoming call. Function button: function phone management system Press to mute the microphone during an ac- Name of connected mobile telephone.  tive call and to reactivate it. 1 Press the icon to the left to connect or pair with another mobile telephone. This button keeps the call active. While the call is on hold the listener will not hear the Speed dial buttons, to which telephone  conversation. To reactivate it, press the call 2 numbers from the phonebook may be accept button . To reject it, press the reject assigned respectively. button .

To change to another telephone con-  Press to add a participant to the active call. nected to the hands-free profile. This button will only be visible when there Charge status of a mobile telephone con- 3 are two telephones connected as  nected via “Hands-free profile” (HFP) Blue- hands-free. The active user profile cor- ® Fig. 208 Active call. tooth . responds to the telephone appearing on the screen.  Strength of coverage signal received by the Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 208 mobile telephone. DIAL To open the number pad and enter a NUMBER telephone number ››› page 194. Name of the mobile network operator (pro- A vider) to which the mobile telephone is con- To open the phonebook of the connec- CONTACTS nected. ted mobile telephone.

193 Infotainment System

Enter telephone number menu Possible functions ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the connected mobile telephone are in differ- To enter a country code, instead ent countries. If you are not able to use of the first two digits (interna- these services contact an authorised SEAT tional access code e.g. “00”) Enter the coun- workshop. try code you can enter the character “+”. Press the function button 0 for approx. 2 seconds to add the +. Call Menu (call lists) Breakdown Press the function button to ob- service call  tain help in the event of break- Possible displays in the Calls menu down. For this the network of SEAT dealerships is available to Display: Meaning you with their Mobility Service. Fig. 209 Enter telephone number menu. Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed Information call Press the function button to ob-  and unanswered calls. Open the Enter telephone number menu  tain information on the SEAT brand and the additional serv- Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dialled Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from ices contracted related to traffic  on the mobile telephone and on the Infotain- the PHONE main menu. and travel. ment system telephone management system.

Press the  Voice mail function Possible functions Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the button to make the call. calls received on the mobile telephone and on  the Infotainment system telephone manage- Entering a phone number with OR: Press the  function button ment system. the keypad. for about 2 seconds to make a Enter telephone Call mailbox  call. number Press the  function button to Note make a call. If the number for the mailbox has not yet been stored, enter it and The availability of the call lists will depend Enter the first letters of the con- confirm with OK . on the mobile phone used. tact to find using the keypad. Select a con- The available entries appear in tact from the the phonebook. Note list Select the desired contact from ● Breakdown service and information calls the phonebook to make the call. can incur an additional cost on your telephone bill. ● The Roadside Assistance and Information services might not work properly, for exam-

194 Operating modes

Multimedia

USB/AUX-INPort

Fig. 210 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN port. The USB/AUX-IN input is located above the storage compartment in the front centre console ››› Fig. 210. The operating description is located in ››› page 172.

195 Driving

Driving ● Never leave the engine running in unven- battery from another vehicle to help you tilated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases start your engine ›››  page 54. contain carbon monoxide, an odourless ● After prolonged and demanding opera- Start and driving and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal tion of the engine, when the journey has accidents! Carbon monoxide can cause ended, do not stop the engine immediately. people to lose consciousness and can Let the engine run at idle for about one Starting and stopping the cause death. more minute. This will stop the engine from engine ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the overheating. engine is running. Introduction ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- For the sake of the environment cle has come to a complete stop. Risk of accident! Do not warm up the engine when the vehi- Read the additional information carefully cle is stationary. If possible, move off im- ›››  page 20 mediately after starting the engine. This CAUTION will help the engine reach operating tem- WARNING ● The starter motor may only be used (key perature more quickly, reducing the quantity of emissions. ● When moving with the engine switched position 3 ››› Fig. 211 ››› page 197 in the ig- off, the ignition key must always remain in nition) if the engine is off. Using the starter position 2 ››› Fig. 211 ››› page 197 (ignition motor when the engine is running could Note on). The control lamps will light up in this damage it. ● The engine can only be started with the position. Otherwise, the steering lock could ● Immediately release the ignition key original SEAT key. engage suddenly. Risk of accident! when the engine starts, otherwise damage ● Loud running noises may be heard briefly ● Do not remove the key from the ignition could be caused to the starter motor. after cold-starting the engine. This is nor- until the vehicle has come to a standstill ● When the engine is cold, you should mal and is no cause for concern. and is secure (e.g. the handbrake is engag- avoid high engine speeds, driving at full ● ed). Otherwise, the steering lock could sud- throttle and over-loading the engine before After the engine has been stopped and denly engage. Risk of accident! it reaches operating temperature. Risk of the ignition switched off, the radiator fan may continue running for around 10 mi- ● Always take the ignition key with you engine damage! nutes. when you leave the vehicle. This is particu- ● Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of en- ● larly important if you leave children in the gine damage! In vehicles with a catalytic If the engine still does not start after a vehicle. Children could, for example, start converter, fuel that has not been burned second attempt, the fuel pump fuse might the engine with the subsequent risk of acci- could reach the catalytic converter and have blown. Check it and replace if neces- dent. catch fire in it. This would lead to a fault in sary ››› page 83 or contact your Special- the catalytic converter. You may use the ised Service.

196 Start and driving

● You should always engage the steering 3 – Starting Starter button lock when you exit the vehicle. This will hin- To engage the Steering lock without the key der any attempts at theft. in the ignition, turn the steering wheel slightly until you hear it engage.

Ignition lock In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P1). If the steering lock is engaged and it is difficult or impossible to turn the key to position 2 , release the lock by turning the steering wheel slightly in both directions. Fig. 212 In the steering column: start-up push button for the Keyless Access lock and start-up system. The layout in right-hand drive vehicles Start-up lock security system is symmetrical. (electronic immobiliser) Fig. 211 Ignition key positions. There is an electronic chip in the key. The Petrol engines electronic immobiliser is deactivated when the key is inserted into the ignition. The elec- 1 – Ignition switched off, engine stopped, tronic immobiliser is automatically activated steering can be locked when the key is removed from the ignition. 2 – Ignition switched on The engine will not start if an unauthorised 3 – Starting key is used. The informative display indicates: Diesel engines Immobiliser active! Fig. 213 Emergency ignition in vehicles with 1 – Fuel supply stopped, ignition switched Keyless Access. » off, engine stopped, steering can be locked

2 – Engine pre-heating, ignition switched on

1) Depending upon country. 197 Driving

The start-up button may only be used if there ● The engine turns off automatically. Note is a valid key in the vehicle. ● In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Access Engine restart feature Opening the driver's door when exiting the system, there may be a delay in the engine vehicle activates the electronic lock on the If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle starting if it requires preheating. steering column if the ignition is disabled. after the engine stops, you will only have 5 ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time seconds to restart it. A warning will display on with the ignition on, the vehicle battery Switching the ignition on/off the dash panel screen. might be discharged and it might not be ● Briefly push the start-up button ››› Fig. 212 After this interval, it will not be possible to possible to start the engine. without touching the brake or clutch ped- start the engine without a valid key inside the al ››› . vehicle. Starting the engine Emergency starting function WARNING If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, Any accidental movement of the vehicle Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped an emergency start-up will be required. The could result in serious injury. with a glow plug system. When you switch on the ignition, the glow plug warning lamp  relevant message will appear in the dash ● When pressing the start-up button, do will light up. The engine can be started panel display. This may happen when, for ex- not press the brake or clutch pedal, this straight away when the lamp switches off. ample, the vehicle key battery is very low or way the engine will start immediately. flat: Do not connect electrical appliances during preheating so as not the drain the vehi- ● WARNING Immediately after pushing the start-up but- cle battery unnecessarily. ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steering If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- column Fig. 213. out due care, this may cause accidents and ››› Starting the engine ● The ignition connects and the engine starts serious injury. ● Move the gearbox lever into neutral or automatically. ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau- move the selector lever to position P or N and pull firmly on the handbrake. Emergency disconnection thorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition ● Press the clutch pedal all the way down If the engine does not stop after briefly press- and, in this way, operate electronic equip- and start the engine 3 ››› Fig. 211 ing the start-up button, an emergency dis- ment (e.g. the windows). ››› page 197, without pressing the accelera- connect will be required: tor. Keep the clutch pedal pressed down until ● Press the starter button twice within 1 sec- the engine starts. ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds ● Release the ignition key as soon as the en- ››› . gine starts. The key returns to position 2 . 198 Start and driving

● If the engine does not start after 10 sec- spoiler, wheel trims, etc. are subsequently ● To ensure the brake assist systems work onds, turn the key back to position 1 . Repeat fitted, make sure the air vent to the brakes properly, all wheels must be fitted with the action after 30 seconds. on the front wheels is not blocked. Other- tyres approved by the manufacturer. ● Release the handbrake before moving off. wise, braking operations may be impaired. Risk of accident! Note ● Always fully release the handbrake. If it is ● If you brake suddenly and the brake sys- Switching off the engine with the only partially released, this will cause overheating of the rear brakes, which can tem control unit regards the situation as key impair the function of the brake system. hazardous for the drivers behind you, the Risk of accident! brake lights will begin to flash automatical- Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to ly. After reducing speed to approximately ● Never leave children unsupervised in the position 1 ››› Fig. 211 ››› page 197. 10 km/h (6 mph) or stopping the vehicle, vehicle. They could release the handbrake the brake lights will stop flashing and the or move the gear lever. The vehicle could hazard warning lights will switch on. The start moving. Risk of accident! hazard warning lights are automatically Brakes and brake servo sys- ● Insufficient fuel can cause the engine to switched off when you accelerate or re- tems run irregularly or to switch off. Brake assist start the vehicle. systems could be impaired. Risk of acci- ● On long, steep gradients, reduce your dent! speed and change to a lower gear (manual Introduction ● Always adjust your driving style to suit gearbox) or move the selector lever to a visibility, the weather and road and traffic lower gear position (automatic gearbox). WARNING conditions. The best vehicle safety offered This uses the force of the engine and the by brake assist systems must never encour- brakes do not suffer as much. If you still ● The brake servo only works when the en- age you to run greater risks. Risk of acci- have to brake, do so intermittently, press- gine is running. Braking when the engine is dent! ing down repeatedly on the brake pedal. switched off requires applying more strength to the brake pedal. Risk of acci- ● Vehicle modifications (e.g. to the engine, dent! CAUTION brakes, frame or a combination of wheels and tyres) could impair the brake assist ● Press down on the clutch pedal when ● Observe the information concerning new systems ››› page 240, Accessories and stopping and braking with a manual gear- brake pads ››› page 210. modifications to the vehicle. box, petrol engine vehicle at low speed. ● Where braking is not necessary, do not Otherwise, the brake servo might not work ● In the event of a fault in the ABS system, wear down the brake pads by pressing properly. Risk of accident! the ESC, TCS and EDL are switched off au- down gently on the brake pedal. This cau- tomatically. A fault in the ABS is indicated ● In the event of damage to the standard ses the brakes to overheat, increasing their by the  ››› page 202 warning lamp. front spoiler or where a different front wear and increasing braking distances.

199 Driving

Control lamps Brakes pressed down more fully, there may be a fault in the brake system. Visit a specialised  It lights up red Wear service immediately and adjust your driving style to the extent of the damage and to limit The rate of wear of the brake pads depends Brake fluid level too low page 250 or fault in the the effect of the brakes. ››› on the driving style and on the way in which brake system.  the vehicle is used. The brake pads will wear Do not carry on driving! Stop the vehicle, switch Low brake fluid level off the engine and check the level of the brake fluid more quickly if you use your vehicle frequent- ››› page 250. ly in urban traffic and short trips or drive in a Insufficient brake fluid could cause faults in The information display shows: Brake fluid In- sporty style. Under these demanding condi- the brake system. The brake fluid level is construction Manual! tions, visit your specialised service, even be- trolled electronically ››› page 200. fore the scheduled service date, so that the  It lights up red thickness of the brake pads can be meas- Brake servo ured. Parking brake engaged ››› page 200. The brake servo supplements the pressure The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- you exert on the brake pedal. The brake servo leased. Wet roads or road salt only works when the engine is running. If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving  It lights up yellow on roads which have been gritted with salt, braking power may set in later than normal. Handbrake Front brake pads worn. Dry the brakes as soon as possible by braking repeatedly. WARNING ● The following indications must be taken Corrosion into account when opening the engine Long periods of inactivity and little use can compartment to check the brake fluid lead to rust on the brake discs and dirt on the ››› page 244, Engine compartment. brake pads. Where the brake system is sub- ● If the warning lamp  illuminates togeth- jected to light stress or in the case of corro- er with the warning lamp  ››› page 202, sion, clean the brake discs by braking fully  , stop the vehicle! Go to a technical serv- several times at a high speed. ice. ● A fault in the brake system or in the Anti- Brake system fault Fig. 214 Centre console: handbrake. lock brake system (ABS) can lead to longer braking distances – Risk of accident! If you notice that the braking distance sud- Applying the handbrake denly increases and the brake pedal can be – Pull the handbrake lever up all the way. 200 Start and driving

 Releasing the handbrake  Flashes The warning lamp on the general instru- – Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and ment panel starts flashing when the system is ESC or ASR activated. press the unlock button at the same time working. ››› Fig. 214.  It lights up The stability (ESC) system includes the fol- – Keep the button pressed down and push lowing systems: the lever all the way down. ASR manually deactivated. ● Anti-lock brake system (ABS), Control lamp ● Traction control system (TCS),  It lights up The warning lamp lights up when the hand- ● Electronic differential lock (EDL), brake is applied with the ignition on . ABS faulty or does not work. ● Hydraulic brake assist system (HBA),

Additionally, driving the vehicle at speeds ex- The control lamps light up together when the ● Hill hold control (HHC). ceeding 6 km/h (4 mph) for at least 3 sec- ignition is switched on and should turn off af- The ASR should be switched on at all times. onds produces an audible warning. ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time Only under certain circumstances should the taken for the function check. The informative display indicates: system be switched off, e.g. Release the handbrake! ● driving with chains, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ● driving in deep snow or on very soft surfaces, Braking and stability sys- The ESC system increases control of the ve- ● During the “swinging movement” required hicle in emergency situations, e.g. during a to remove a stuck vehicle tems sudden change in direction. Depending on the driving conditions, it reduces the risk of Switch the ASR back on as soon as possible. Control lamps skidding and increases driving stability. Brake assist system (HBA)* The system uses the steering wheel angle  It lights up and road speed to calculate the changes of The HBA system is activated when you press direction desired by the driver, and constant- down on the brake pedal suddenly. It increa- Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys- ly compares them with the actual behaviour ses braking power, helping to reduce braking tem. distances. To reduce braking distance as As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, the of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC much as possible, keep the brake pedal the ABS. brakes the appropriate wheel automatically. pressed down firmly until the vehicle comes to a standstill. »

201 Driving

With the help of this system, the ABS is activa- off, this means the ESC is functioning correct- the brake pedal is released. Never brake in- ted more quickly and more efficiently. ly again. termittently while the ABS is working! The brake assist function is deactivated auto- If the  warning lamp is illuminated there is a Control lamp matically when the brake pedal is released. fault in the ESC. If the  warning lamp is illuminated, there is a The informative display indicates: Hill hold control (HHC)* fault in the ABS. Fault: electronic stability con- The HHC system makes it easier to start the The informative display indicates: trol (ESC) vehicle on hills. The system maintains the ABS fault brake pressure created by pressing down on or the brake pedal for 2 seconds after it has The brake system alone is operational in the Fault: traction control system been released. Your foot can be removed vehicle, without ABS. (ASR) from the brake pedal and you can use the Go to a technical service. accelerator pedal and move away on a hill Go to a technical service. without having to use the handbrake. The WARNING brake pressure drops as the accelerator ped- Note ● If the  warning lamp illuminates togeth- al is pressed. If the vehicle cannot be started, If the battery is disconnected and connec- er with the ››› page 200  warning lamp, it will start to move backwards after 2 sec- ted again, the yellow warning lamp   , stop the vehicle! Go to a technical serv- onds. lights up when the ignition is switched on. ice. The HHC is activated on gradients of over 5%, This warning lamp must switch off after covering a short distance. ● A fault in the Anti-lock brake system if the driver door is closed. It only works for (ABS) can lead to longer braking distances starting on hills, moving both forward and in – Risk of accident! reverse. It is not activated during start-up down hill. Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Control lamp The ABS system prevents the wheels locking Anti-slip regulation of the driving during braking. This helps the driver keep wheels (ASR)* If the control lamp  flashes, the ESC is control of the vehicle. working. If the wheels start to slip, the TCS adapts the The driver is made aware of ABS assistance If the  warning lamp illuminates on ignition, engine speed to the driving conditions. Par- by the pulsating of the brake pedal and a the ESC system may have switched off due to ticularly in unfavourable conditions, the TCS characteristic noise. technical reasons. Turn off the ignition and helps starting, accelerating and hill starts. turn it on again. Upon switching on the igni- Keep the brake pedal pressed down while the tion again, if the warning lamp has switched ABS is working. The ABS will switch off when 202 Start and driving

If the control lamp  flashes, the ASR is work- Manual gearbox WARNING ing. Never engage reverse gear when moving If the  warning lamp illuminates on ignition, Changing gears forward. Risk of accident! the TCS system may have switched off due to technical reasons. Turn off the ignition and Note turn it on again. Upon switching on the ignition again, if the warning lamp has switched Do not rest your hand on the gear lever off, this means the TCS is functioning correct- while driving. The pressure of your hand ly again. could lead to premature wear of the gear system. If the  warning lamp remains illuminated, there is a fault in the TCS. The informative display indicates: Automatic gearbox Fault: traction control system (ASR) Fig. 215 Gear shift diagram of a 5- or 6-speed Basic information manual gearbox Go to a technical service. The gearbox changes up and down automat- Read the additional information carefully ically. The gearbox can be set to Tiptronic ›››  page 36 Electronic differential lock mode. The gears can be changed manually When changing gear, always depress the in this mode ››› page 206. clutch pedal fully and keep it pressed down If one of the wheels starts to skid, the EDL The engine can be started only in position P to avoid excessive clutch wear. brakes that wheel, transmitting the driving or N. If the selector lever is not in these posi- force to the other wheels. This increases vehi- In order to drive at an optimum RPM, follow tions when locking the steering, switching the cle stability and improves driving stability. the gear change indications ››› page 208. ignition on or off or starting the engine, the information display will show ¡Move the se- To prevent the disc brake of the braking Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is lector lever to the P/N! position, or on wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au- stopped. On engaging reverse gear while the the general instrument panel  P/N. tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. engine is running, first wait a moment with the The vehicle will continue to function normally clutch pedal pressed down fully to limit gear At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), the en- without EDL. The EDL will switch on again au- shift noise. gine can only be started in position P. tomatically when the brake has cooled down. The reverse lights switch on when the reverse If you park your vehicle in a flat surface, move gear is selected and the ignition is on. the selector lever to position P. On a slop, first »

203 Driving

engage the handbrake firmly and the move This could overheat the clutch. If the clutch Control lamps the selector lever to the parking position. This risks being burnt due to this force, it would reduces the load on the lock mechanism switch off and the vehicle could move  It lights up green while making it easier to move the selector backwards. Risk of accident! The brake pedal is not engaged. lever from position P. ● If you have to stop on a hill, press down To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal. If, while the vehicle is moving, the selector lev- on the brake pedal to stop the vehicle from er is accidentally moved to position N, removing. Flashes green lease the accelerator and wait for the engine ● The drive wheels could lose traction on a  to idle before moving it back into position. slippery road surface when the kick-down The interlock button on the selector lever is not function is activated. Risk of sliding! pressed. WARNING Movement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the selector lever lock. ● Never press the accelerator when select- CAUTION ing the automatic gearbox operating mode ● In DSG automatic gearboxes, the double when the vehicle is stationary. Risk of acci- clutch is protected from overloads. If the dent! hill hold control is used, the clutches are Starting and driving ● Never move the selector lever to posi- subjected to greater force if the vehicle is tions R or P when driving. Risk of accident! at a standstill on a slope or suddenly ac- Starting ● If the vehicle is to be stopped with a gear celerating on a slope. – Press and hold the brake pedal. selected and the engine idling (e.g. waiting ●  Should the clutches overheat, the – Press and hold the interlock button on the or moving slowly at traffic lights), press symbol is shown on the informative display selector lever knob and move the selector down on the brake pedal because the with a warning message Gear overheated. lever to position ››› page 205 before re- transmission is not entirely interrupted Stop! Instruction Manual! An audible leasing the interlock button. when the engine is idling and the vehicle warning is also heard. Stop the vehicle in will tend to start moving. this case, stop the engine and wait until the – Release the brake and press the accelera- ● Apply the handbrake firmly and put the symbol  has switched off. Danger of dam- tor. selector lever in position P before opening age to the gearbox! You can continue driv- the bonnet and working on the vehicle with ing once the symbol is switched off. Stopping the engine running. Risk of accident! Strict- – The selector lever does not have to be ly follow the safety instructions moved to position N if the vehicle is stopped ››› page 244, Engine compartment. for a short period, e.g. at intersections. It is ● When stopping on a slope (hill), try not to enough to step on the brake pedal. Howev- stop the vehicle from moving by pressing er, the engine must remain idling. the “accelerator” with a gear selected.

204 Start and driving

Parking Selector lever positions P – Parking position – Press the brake pedal. In this position, the driven wheels are me- chanically locked. – Apply the handbrake. The parking position can only be selected – Press the interlock button, move the selec- when the vehicle is stationary. tor lever to position P and release the button. If you want to move the selector lever from this position, press the interlock button on the Kick-down feature selector lever knob while pressing down on The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- the brake pedal. celeration to be reached. If the battery is drained, the selector lever In any gear programme, press down fully on cannot be moved from position P. Fig. 216 Gear selector lever the accelerator for the automatic gearbox to activate the kick-down feature. This function R – Reverse gear takes priority over the gear programmes Reverse gear must be engaged only when without taking into account the position of the the vehicle is stationary and the engine is selector lever (D, S or Tiptronic) and is used idling. to reach maximum acceleration, using full engine power. Depending on the road speed To move the selector lever to position R from and engine speed, the automatic gearbox positions P or N, press the interlock button on shifts down and the vehicle accelerates. It the selector lever knob and press down on only shifts up after the maximum engine the brake pedal. speed has been reached. The reverse lights come on when the selector lever is in position R and the ignition is on. Fig. 217 Information display: selector lever positions. N – Neutral (idling) Read the additional information carefully Neutral (idling) is engaged in this position. ›››  page 36 To move the selector lever from position N (if The current position of the selector lever is the lever has remained in this position for shown on the general instrument panel dis- more than 2 seconds) to position D or R at play 1 ››› Fig. 217. speeds of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and when »

205 Driving

the vehicle is stationary, press down on the Tiptronic gearbox The manual gearbox can be activated when brake pedal. the vehicle is either moving or stationary. When accelerating, the gearbox automati- D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position cally shifts up shortly before the maximum The selector lever in the D/S position enables engine speed is reached. the gears to be controlled in normal mode On shifting up, the gear is only engaged (D) or Sport (S) mode. To select Sport mode when there is no risk of engine damage. (S), move the selector lever backwards. Mov- ing the lever again will select normal mode When the accelerator pedal is pressed down (D). The selected driving mode is shown on to the kick-down zone, the gearbox will shift the instrument panel display. down in line with the road speed and engine speed. In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati- Fig. 218 Selector lever: Tiptronic. cally selects the best gear ratio. This de- Note pends on the engine load, the road speed The Tiptronic gearbox allows the driver to and the dynamic gear control programme The kick-down function is also available in change gears manually using the selector (DCP). manual shift mode. lever. Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the en- Activating the manual gearbox Selector lever lock gine's maximum power output. When accel- – From position D, push the selector lever to erating the gear shifts will be noticeable. the right. The selected position of the selec- Automatic selector lever lock  Press the brake pedal to move the selector tor lever is shown on the general instrument The selector lever is locked in the positions P lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta- panel display together with the gear en- and N when the ignition is on. Press the brake tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) gaged 1 ››› Fig. 217. pedal to unlock it. Remember, if the selector ››› in Basic information on page 204. Shifting up lever is in positions P and N, the warning lamp Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv-  will light up on the general instrument pan- ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to – Push the selector lever gently forwards + el. switch temporarily to tiptronic mode ››› Fig. 218. When the selector lever merely moves ››› page 206, in order to manually select through position N (e.g. when moved from R gear ratios to suit the driving conditions. Shifting down to D), the lever lock is not applied. This makes – Push the selector lever gently backwards it possible, for example, to rock a stuck vehi- - ››› Fig. 218. cle backwards and forwards. The lock is only

206 Start and driving applied if the brake is not pressed and the se- shifts up as quickly as possible and shifts Emergency program lector lever is moved to position N for more down as late as possible, thus increasing driv- than 2 seconds. ing economy. A back-up programme exists in case of faults. The selector lever only locks when the is vehi- With a sporty driving style, characterised by In the event of a fault in the gearbox electron- cle stationary or driving at a speed lower sudden acceleration, heavy acceleration, ics, it will continue to work in one of the corre- than 5 km/h (3 mph). At a higher speed, it au- speeds that often increase and decrease and sponding back-up programmes. All segments tomatically disconnects in the N position. maximum speed, the gearbox adapts to this of the screen are lit up or switched off. driving style when the accelerator is pressed Interlock button down fully (kick-down) by shifting down as The fault can be seen as follows: quickly as possible and can even shift down ● The interlock button on the selector lever The gearbox only engages certain gears by several gears at once. knob prevents the driver from inadvertently ● Reverse gear R cannot be engaged engaging a gear. Press the button to unlock Selecting the best driving programmes is an ● The manual gearbox switches off in the the selector lever. endless job. Regardless of this, the driver can back-up programme also make the gearbox switch to a more dy- Safety interlock for ignition key1) namic gear shift programme by pressing the Note accelerator quickly. This makes the automat- After switching the ignition off, the ignition key If the gearbox switches to the back-up pro- ic gearbox shift down into a lower gear than can be removed only when the selector lever gramme, visit an Authorised Service as the one that would normally apply to the cur- is in position P. If the key is not in the ignition, soon as possible to solve the problem. the selector lever is locked in position P. rent speed, allowing for more rapid acceleration (e.g. to overtake another vehicle) without having to press the accelerator until the kick- down position. On shifting up in a corre- Gearbox malfunctions Driving programmes sponding driving style, the gearbox returns to the original programme.  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- and place the lever in the posi- ly-controlled automatic gearbox. Shifting up When driving along mountain roads, the tion P. or down depends on the programme selec- gearbox adapts to the gradients. This avoids ted. having to frequently change gears when driv- There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- ing uphill. In Tiptronic mode, it is possible to cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- For a calm driving style, the gearbox uses shift down manually when driving downhill to ing. Seek specialist assistance. » the most economic programme. The gearbox use the braking effect of the engine.

1) Valid only for certain countries. 207 Driving

 Gearbox: System fault! You may Gear-change indicator The gear recommendation may occasionally continue driving. skip a gear (2nd  4th). Have the fault corrected by a specialised Choosing the ideal gear Vehicles with an automatic gearbox* workshop without delay. The display is only visible in tiptronic mode  Gearbox: System fault! You can ››› page 206. continue driving with restrictions. Reverse gear disabled The following display symbols mean:

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop ●  Shifting up a gear and have the fault repaired without delay. ●  Shifting down a gear  Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until CAUTION switching off the engine The gear-change indicator is intended to Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away help save fuel, but it is not intended to rec- Fig. 219 Instrument panel: gear-change indi- from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- ommend the right gear for all driving situa- cator (manual gearbox). tance. tions. In certain situations, only the driver can choose the correct gear (for instance  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your A gear change will be recommended if the when overtaking, driving up a steep gradi- driving accordingly gear you are in is not the most economical ent or towing a trailer). choice. If no gear-change is recommended, it Continue driving at moderate speeds. When means that you are already in the most eco- the warning lamp switches off, you can con- Note nomical gear. tinue driving in a normal manner. The display disappears from the instrument  Gearbox: press the brake and en- Vehicles with a manual gearbox panel when you press the clutch pedal. gage a gear again. The following display symbols ››› Fig. 219 If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a mean: high temperature, this driver message will be ●  Changing to a higher gear: the sugges- displayed when the gearbox has cooled ted gear appears to the right of the current again. gear when a higher gear is recommended. ●  Changing to a lower gear: the suggested gear appears to the left of the current gear when a lower gear is recommended. 208 Start and driving

Steering CAUTION  It lights up yellow

Turning the steering wheel fully in either di- The operation of the electromechanical steering is Information relating to vehicle rection when the vehicle is stationary and limited. steering the engine is in gear puts the electrome- See a specialised workshop immediately and have chanical steering under great stress. This the steering checked. If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again af- Electro-mechanical power steering assists could lead to noise. Never leave the steering wheel turned fully in either direction for ter the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travel- the driver when steering. more than 15 seconds. Risk of damage to led a short distance, you do not need to take it to a specialised workshop. Electro-mechanical power steering adapts the electromechanical steering system! electronically to the speed of the car, torque Or: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and has and turning angle. Note been connected again. Drive for a short time at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph). If the power steering should fail at any time or The ignition of the vehicle being towed the engine is switched off (for instance when must be switched on to prevent the steering  It flashes yellow being towed), the car can still be steered, as wheel from locking and also to allow the long as the key remains in the ignition. How- use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen The steering column is tight. ever, more effort than normal will be required wipers and washers. Turn the wheel a little to both sides. to turn the steering wheel. Or: Not unlocked or blocked steering column. Remove the key from the ignition and then switch the WARNING Control lamp ignition back on. If necessary, check the messages If the power steering does not work, you displayed on the instrument panel display. will need much more strength to turn the Do not drive on if the steering column remains  It lights up red locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek wheel. This has a considerable effect on specialist assistance. vehicle safety. The electromechanical steering is damaged. Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle safely and ● The power steering only works when the The control lamp should light up for a few as soon as possible. engine is running. Have the steering checked immediately by a special- seconds when the ignition is switched on. It ● Never allow the vehicle to move when the ised workshop. should go out once the engine is started. engine is switched off. ● Never remove the key from the ignition WARNING while the vehicle is moving. The steering If the warning lamps and the corresponding lock could be engaged and vehicle steer- messages are ignored when they light up, ing would not work. the vehicle may stall in traffic. It could case »

209 Driving

damage to the vehicle and cause acci- the engaged gear, i.e. the maximum permit- New tyres dents and severe injuries. ted engine speed. New tyres must be submitted to “running in”, ● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- During its first few hours of running, the inter- given that initially their grip is not yet at the sages. nal friction in the engine is greater than later maximum level. During the first 500 km (120 ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity on, when all the moving parts have bedded miles) drive very carefully. and in a safe place. in. How the vehicle is driven over approximately the first 1,500 kilometres (900 miles), New brake pads determines the success of the process of run- New brake pads do not yet provide maximum ning in the engine. friction capacity. First they must be “run in”. Run-in and economical driv- During the first 200 km (120 miles) drive very Even after running in, the vehicle should not carefully. ing be unnecessarily driven at high engine speeds. The maximum permitted engine CAUTION The first 1,500 km speed is marked at the start of the red zone on the rev counter dial. The gear must be All the information for speed and engine Over the first 1,500 kilometres the engine changed up when the red area is reached in speed refers to an engine that operates at must be run in. vehicles with a manual gearbox. Extremely operating temperature. Do not run the en- high engine speeds when accelerating are gine at high engine speeds, neither when Up to 1000 kilometres automatically limited, however the engine is stopped or while driving. not protected against high engine speeds – Do not drive at more than 3/4 of the maxi- produced by incorrectly changing to a lower mum speed corresponding to the engaged For the sake of the environment gear, which could cause the engine to run at gear, i.e. up to 3/4 of the maximum permit- Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine revs above the maximum permitted amount, ted engine speed. speeds; changing to a higher gear sooner and consequently result in damage to the contributes to saving fuel, reduces operat- – Do not drive at full speed. engine. ing noise and protects the environment. – Avoid high engine speeds. Additionally, vehicles with a manual gearbox must also bear the following in mind: do not – Do not tow a trailer. drive at excessively low speeds. Change Environmental compatibility down to a lower gear when the engine no From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to longer runs smoothly. Observe the recom- 900 miles) Environmental protection is a top priority in mendations for changing gear ››› page 208. the design, choice of materials and manufac- – Slowly increase the engine speed until ture of your new SEAT. reaching the maximum permitted speed of

210 Start and driving

Constructive measures to encourage re- ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are recycling ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- duced to zero (disconnection due to inertia). ● Joints and connections designed for easy tems. Change gear early to save energy dismantling. ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- dues (RDF). An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears. Running the en- tling. ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. gine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an ● Increased use of single-grade materials. ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual unnecessary amount of fuel. ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and etc.). Manual transmission: shift up from first to second gear as soon as possible. We recom- ISO 1629. ● The use of water-soluble paints. mend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Fol- Choice of materials low the “recommended gear” indication that ● Use of recycled materials. Economical and environmentally- appears on the instrument panel ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part friendly driving ››› page 208. if its components are not easily separated. ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials Fuel consumption, environmental pollution Avoid driving at high speed and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- originating from renewable sources. We advise you not to drive at the top speed pends in large part on your driving style. By ● permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, Reduction of volatile components, including adopting an economical driving style and an- exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- odour, in plastic materials. ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving ● Use of CFC-free coolants. easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. at moderate speeds will help to save fuel. Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu- Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions tion while saving money are listed below. dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive Avoid idling 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, Drive anticipating the traffic situation It is worthwhile switching off the engine when hexavalent chromium. waiting in a traffic jam, at level crossings or at A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel When you anticipate situations, you have to Manufacturing methods saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greater brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it ● than the amount of fuel needed to restart the Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear en- engine. protective wax for cavities. gaged, for example, if you see a red light ● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- ahead. The braking effect achieved in this The engine takes a long time to warm up cle transport. way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and when it is idling. Mechanical wear and » 211 Driving

pollutant emissions are also especially high is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too low, fuel fan at high speeds, the rear window heating during this initial warm-up phase. It is there- consumption can increase by as much as 5%. and the seat heaters*. fore best to drive off immediately after start- Due to the greater rolling resistance, under- ing the engine. Avoid running the engine at inflation also increases tyre wear wear and Note high speed. impairs handling. ● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec- The tyre pressures should always be checked ommended to switch this function off. Periodic maintenance when the tyres are cold. ● It is recommended that you close the Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, windows when driving at more than Do not use winter tyres all year round as before beginning a journey, you will not con- 60 km/h (37 mph). they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. sume more than the required amount of fuel. ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the Avoid unnecessary weight of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can mum reliability and an enhanced resale val- Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- burn the clutch plate lining, causing a seri- ue. crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to ous fault. always check the luggage compartment to A badly serviced engine can consume up to ● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- 10% more fuel than necessary. clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, ing transported. using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the Avoid short journeys A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is no longer nee- clutch plate from being damaged. To reduce the consumption and emission of ded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and ● On descents, use the engine brake, polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use about changing to the gear that is more suitable exhaust gas filtration systems should reach 12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind re- for the slope. Fuel consumption will be the optimum operating temperature. sistance caused by the roof rack even when it “zero” and the brakes will not suffer. With the engine cold, fuel consumption is pro- is not in use. portionally higher. The engine does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise Save electricity until having driven approximately four kilome- The engine activates the alternator, which tres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend produces electricity. With the need for elec- avoiding short trips whenever possible. tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be- cause of this, always turn off electrical devi- Maintain the correct tyre pressures ces when you do not need them. Examples of Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ade- devices that use a lot of electricity are: the quate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressure 212 Start and driving

Engine management and  It lights up Catalytic converter 3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine emission control system Particulate filter blocked ››› page 214. To maintain the useful life of the catalytic Introduction  It lights up converter

Fault in the management of the petrol engine. ● Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- WARNING Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop gines, as lead damages the catalytic con- ● Because of the high temperatures which as soon as possible. verter. can occur in the exhaust purification sys- The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Control) ● Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank. tem (catalytic converter or diesel particu- lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys- ● For engine oil changes, do not replenish late filter), do not park the vehicle where tem operation is being verified. It should go out once with too much engine oil page 247. the exhaust can come into contact with the engine is started. ››› flammable materials under the car (e.g. on ● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump grass or at the forest edge). Fire hazard!  It lights up leads if necessary ›››  page 54. ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss around the area of the exhaust system: Fire Diesel engine glow plug system. hazard! The engine glow plug system has been activated. of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce The engine can be started straight away when the speed immediately and have the vehicle in- lamp switches off. spected at the nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light Control lamps  Flashes up when any of the described symptoms occur ››› page 213. If this happens, unburnt fuel Fault in the management of the diesel engine. can enter the exhaust system and escape in-  It lights up Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible. to the environment. The catalytic converter Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faulty can also be damaged by overheating. lambda sensor). Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- Note cialised workshop to have the engine checked. CAUTION While the control lamps are on , ,  Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- or  there might be faults in the engine, cause the irregularity of the fuel supply  Flashes fuel consumption may go up and the en- may cause ignition problems. This allows gine might lose power. Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, converter. which could cause overheating and dam- Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- age the catalytic converter. » cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

213 Driving

For the sake of the environment ● Maintain the engine speed at approximate- Driving tips ly 2,000 rpm. Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of The rise in temperature causes the soot on Driving through flooded roads sulphur from the exhaust gas under some the filter to burn. On completion of the clean- conditions. This depends on the sulphur ing the warning lamp will switch off. If the content of the fuel used. Quite often the warning lamp does not switch off, go immedi- problem can be solved by changing to an- ately to a specialised workshop to rectify the other brand of fuel. problem.

CAUTION Particulate filter While the warning lamp  is lit up, the fuel 3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine consumption is high, and in certain conditions, the engine power is reduced. The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Fig. 220 Driving through water. Note Under normal driving conditions, the filter To prevent the vehicle from being damaged cleans itself. The particulate filter is cleaned ● In order for the particulate filter to burn when driving through water (i.e. flooded automatically without need for indication by off soot in a correct manner, avoid carrying roads), please observe the following: the warning lamp . This may be noticed out frequent short journeys. because the engine idle speed increases and ● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur ● Determine the depth of the water before an odour may be detected. count can considerably reduce the useful entering. Water can reach a maximum height life of the particulate filter. The specialised of below the door sill ››› Fig. 220. If automatic filter purification cannot be car- service provides information about the ● Drive at a maximum pace of walking speed. ried out (because only short trips are taken, countries where fuel with a high sulphur Driving at a higher speed can cause a wave for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- content is used. in front of the vehicle, which can cause water ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will to enter the engine air intake system or other  switch on. parts of the vehicle. Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc- ● Never stop in the water, never reverse and ess by driving in the following manner: never stop the engine. ● Drive for approximately 15 minutes at a ● Before driving through water deactivate the minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or Start-Stop system ››› page 215. 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range).

214 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Note Driver assistance systems ● Driving through water, dirt and mud can After driving through water we recommend reduce braking capability and prolong the that you contact a specialised service for Start-Stop system* braking distance – Risk of accident! an inspection. ● Do not carry out any sudden or strong Control lamps braking manoeuvres after driving through water. Preventing damage to the vehicle ● Clean and dry the brakes as soon as pos-  It lights up sible after driving through water by break- In order to prevent damage to the vehicle, The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic ening intermittently. Carry out braking in or- take special care: gine shutdown is active. der to dry the brakes and clean the brake ● on roads that are in poor condition, discs only if traffic so permits. Do not put It lights up other drivers at risk. ● when mounting kerbs, . ● when approaching very steep ramps, etc., The Start-Stop system is not available. CAUTION ● with the parts of the vehicle situated on the ● In the event of driving through water, lower part of the vehicle, i.e. the spoiler, the parts of the vehicle can be seriously dam- exhaust pipe. Description and operation aged, such as the engine, gearbox, catalytic converter, suspension or the electrical This applies especially to vehicles with a very system. low suspension (sport) and when the vehicle is fully loaded. ● Oncoming vehicles that drive through water can cause waves that exceed your vehicle's permitted level for driving through water. ● There may be pot-holes mud or rocks under the water that can hinder or prevent driving through water. ● Do not drive through salt water. The salt can cause rust. All components that are ex- Fig. 221 Instrument panel: Start-stop button. posed to salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water. The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and

reduce harmful and CO2 emissions. »

215 Driving

The system is automatically switched on ev- essary conditions for the correct operating of Conditions for engine start up (Start ery time the ignition is switched on. the Start-Stop system are indicated below. phase) The system automatically switches off the ● Clutch pedal pressed. Conditions for automatic engine shut engine when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. ● Max./min. temperature set. down (Stop phase) waiting at traffic lights. ● Windscreen defrost function switched on. ● Selector lever in neutral. The current status of the Start-Stop system is ● High blower speed. displayed on the general instrument panel ● Clutch pedal not pressed. ● Start-Stop button pressed. display. ● Driver with seat belt fastened.

● Driver door closed. Conditions for automatic engine start up Automatic engine shut down (Stop phase) ● The bonnet closed. without driver involvement ● Stop the vehicle (if necessary using the ● Vehicle stationary. ● Vehicle moving at a speed of over 3 km/h (2 handbrake). ● The factory-fitted towing bracket is not mph). ● Shift to neutral. electrically connected to a trailer. ● Difference between outside temperature ● Release the clutch pedal. ● Engine at operating temperature. and interior temperature is too great ● Vehicle's battery insufficiently charged. Automatic engine start up (Start phase) ● Vehicle's battery sufficiently charged. ● Insufficient brake system pressure. ● Press the clutch. ● Vehicle not on a very steep slope ● Engine speed below 1,200 rpm. If the driver seat belt is unfastened for more Switching the Start-Stop system on and ● Vehicle battery temperature is neither too than 30 seconds in Stop phase, the engine off high nor too low. must be started using the ignition key. Please observe the messages on the general instru- The Start-Stop system can be switched on ● Sufficient brake system pressure. and off by pressing the  button ment panel display. ● Difference between outside temperature ››› Fig. 221. and set interior temperature not too great Warnings on the instrument panel display The warning lamp in the button will light up ● Vehicle speed since the last time the engine (valid for vehicles not fitted with an infor- when the system is switched off. started was above 3 km/h (2 mph). mative display) If the vehicle is in Stop phase when the button ● Particulate filter not being cleaned FAULT: Start-Stop Fault in the Start-Stop is pressed, the engine will start immediately. ››› page 214. system The Start-Stop system works under complex ● Front wheels not overly turned (steering START-STOP IMPOS- Engine cannot be auto- driving conditions that are difficult to detect wheel turned less than three quarters of a SIBLE matically shut down without specialist technology. The set of nec- turn) 216 Driver assistance systems

START-STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shut Cruise control (CCS)* Cruise control operation down (Stop phase)

SWITCH OFF IGNI- Control lamp Switch the ignition off TION

START MANUALLY Start the engine manual-  It lights up green ly The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and active. WARNING ● If the engine is switched off, neither the Several warning and control lamps light up brake servo nor the power steering will for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- work. ed on, signalling that the function is being ● Do not move the vehicle when the engine verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Fig. 222 Turn signal and main beam headlight is switched off. onds. lever: cruise control buttons.

WARNING Read the additional information carefully CAUTION  page 34 Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ››› Switch off the Start-Stop system trol and warning lamps on page 103. The cruise control system allows you to drive ››› page 214 before driving through a pool at a constant speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or of water on the road. higher without having to press the accelerator. However, the speed is only maintained Note within the margin permitted by the engine ● The battery temperature may reflect power and the braking effect of the engine. changes in outside temperature after several hours. If the vehicle has been stopped Setting speed outside at temperatures below zero or in di- ● Move knob 1 ››› Fig. 222 to the  position. rect sunlight, for example, the battery temperature may take several hours to reach ● Briefly press rocker switch 2 in  position the values required for the correct operat- when you have reached the speed you wish ing of the Start-Stop system. to set. » ● If the Climatronic system is operating automatically, this could impair automatic engine shut down under certain conditions.

217 Driving

On releasing rocker switch 2 from , the the switch when the required speed is to ice, aquaplaning, loose grit, snow) - Risk current speed is stored and will remain con- reached. The speed is stored. of accident! stant without having to press the accelerator ● On releasing the switch at speeds of less ● The programmed speed can only be re- pedal. than 30 km/h (19 mph), no speed will be set established if it is not too high for current and the memory will be deleted. The vehicle traffic conditions. Increasing speed by pressing the acceler- must be moving at a speed of over 30 km/h ● Always switch the cruise control system ator pedal (19 mph) and switch 2 pressed again to  off after using it in order to avoid involunta- ● Press the accelerator to increase the speed for it to be set. ry use. of the vehicle. The speed can be reduced by pressing the ● Release the accelerator and the previously brake pedal, which temporarily switches off CAUTION programmed speed will be resumed. the cruise control. ● The cruise control cannot maintain a If, when pressing the accelerator, the vehicle constant speed when the vehicle is moving exceeds the programmed speed by more Temporary deactivation of cruise control downhill. The vehicle tends to accelerate than 10 km/h (6 mph) for more than 3 mi- Cruise control is switched off temporarily under its own weight. Therefore, shift down or use the brake pedal in good time to slow nutes, the set speed will be deleted. The by pressing switch 1 ››› Fig. 222 the vehicle. speed will have to be stored again. ››› page 217 in  or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal. Increasing speed by pressing switch 2 Note The set speed is stored. ● Press rocker switch 2 ››› Fig. 222 ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, To recover the set speed, briefly press the ››› page 217 in position . the cruise control system cannot be button 2 in  position once you have re- switched on if the selector lever is in posi- ●  If the button is held down in the position, leased the brake pedal. tion P, N or R. the speed increases continuously. Release ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, the the switch when the required speed is Turning off the cruise control system cruise control cannot be switched on if first reached. The speed is stored. ● Move knob 1 ››› Fig. 222 ››› page 217 to gear or reverse gear is engaged. the  position. Setting a lower speed ● The set speed can be reduced by pressing WARNING switch 2 ››› Fig. 222 ››› page 217 in . ● For safety reasons the cruise control sys- ● If the button is held down in the  position, tem must not be used in dense traffic or the speed decreases continuously. Release where roads conditions are poor (e.g. due

218 Driver assistance systems

Emergency braking assis- lane travelling in the same direction. It may the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a fail to activate in other danger situations. possible emergency braking ››› . tance system (Front Assist)* The Front Assist function is active within a Critical warning range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) Topic introduction and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour, (advance warning), the system may actively some of the sub-functions described below intervene in the brakes and generate a brief are omitted in order to optimise the system’s jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger general behaviour. of a collision. The Front Assist is a driving assistance Automatic braking function that can never replace the driver’s attention. If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independent Safety distance warning emergency braking by progressively increasing the braking effect in accordance with how If the system detects a situation of danger critical the situation is. Fig. 223 On the instrument panel display: ad- because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle vance warning indications. ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an Driver emergency braking assistance sys- indication on the instrument panel display tem The objective of the emergency braking as- . sistance system is to prevent head-on colli- Faced with an imminent collision, the system The timing of the warning varies depending sions against objects that may be in the vehi- may detect that the driver is not braking hard on driver behaviour and the traffic situation. cle’s path or minimise the consequences of enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it such impacts. will automatically increase the braking effect. Advance warning Within the limitations imposed by the environ- Due to certain driving circumstances and the If the system detects a possible collision with mental conditions and by the system itself, limitations of its operation, there are some the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by the function acts in staggered fashion, de- cases in which the system cannot prevent a means of an audible warning and an indica- pending on how critical the situation is. Initial- collision, although it can significantly mini- tion on the instrument panel display ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac- mise the consequences by reducing the ››› Fig. 223. tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti- speed and the force of the impact. » vates an independent emergency braking. The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At The function is intended to prevent collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same 219 Driving

WARNING tem may issue unnecessary warnings and Radar sensor intervene inopportunely in the braking. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 103. ● The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane. WARNING ● The Front Assist does not react to pedes- The Front Assist system cannot change the trians walking in the same direction or ap- laws of physics or replace the driver in proaching head-on down the same lane. terms of keeping control of the vehicle and ● The driver must always be ready to take reacting to a possible emergency situation. over the control of the vehicle.

WARNING Note Fig. 224 On the front bumper: radar sensor. Following a Front Assist emergency warn- ● When the Front Assist is connected, the ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- indications on the instrument panel screen A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- tion and try to avoid the collision by brak- may be concealed by warnings from other er to determine the traffic situation ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica- functions, such as an incoming call. ble. ››› Fig. 224 1 . ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired the brake pedal is “harder”. scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the sist on the brakes may be interrupted by ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to Front Assist does not work. The instrument pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit panel displays the following message: Front the wheel. visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary tions. ● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle clean the radar sensor ››› . until it stops completely. However, the ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- brake system does not halt the vehicle per- When the radar sensor begins to operate dents and serious injuries. manently. Use the foot brake! properly again, the Front Assist will automati- ● In complex driving situations, occasional- cally be available again. The message will ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and disappear from the instrument panel display. scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex- several times unnecessarily), switch it off. ample at traffic islands. Front Assist operation may be affected by a Have the system checked by a specialised strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a cur, for example, in a closed car park or due paired, for example, by dirt or because the SEAT dealership. radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys- 220 Driver assistance systems to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails that is curved or warped can cause the ra- Switching the Front Assist on and off on the road or sheets used in road works). dar to malfunction. With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist The area in front of and around the radar ● Clean away the snow with a brush and can be switched on and off as follows: sensor should not be covered with adhesives, the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- ● Select the corresponding menu option us- additional or similar headlights, as this may icer spray. ing the button for the driver assistance sys- negatively affect Front Assist operation. tems ›››  page 27. If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- ● OR: switch the system on and off in Easy paired or structural modifications are made Operating the Emergency braking Connect using the  button SETTINGS but- to it, for example if the suspension is lowered, assistance system (Front Assist) ton and Driver assistance button Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT ›››  page 24. recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose. When Front Assist is switched off, the instrument panel will inform that it has been CAUTION switched off with the following indicator  ››› Fig. 225. If you have the sensation that the radar sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, Activating or deactivating the pre-warning disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoid possible dangerous situations caused by a (advance warning) system malfunction. If this occurs have it The pre-warning function (advance warning) adjusted. can be switched on or off in the Easy Con- ● The sensor may become damaged or Fig. 225 On the screen of the instrument panel nect system with the  button and the lose its settings when knocked, for exam- Front Assist switched off message. SETTINGS and Driver assistance function but- ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may tons ›››  page 24. compromise the system's efficacy or dis- The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- The system will store the setting for the next connect it. tion is switched on. time the ignition is switched on. ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- When the Front Assist is switched off, so too SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT are the advance warning function (pre warn- recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for function switched on at all times. ing) and the distance warning. this purpose. Depending on the infotainment system instal- SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- ● A registration plate or plate holder on the led in the vehicle, the advance warning func- ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 222, front that is larger than the space for the tion may be adjusted as follows: registration plate, or a registration plate Switching the Front Assist off temporarily in the following situations. ● Advance » 221 Driving

● Medium ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. ● If the ASR has been disconnected or the ● Delayed ● When the radar sensor is damaged. ESC activated in Sport mode manually ››› page 201. ● Deactivated ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for example in a rear collision. ● If the ESC is controlling. SEAT recommends driving with the function in ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- “Medium” mode. trically connected trailer are damaged. ● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. Switching distance warning on and off with some kind of accessory, such as an additional headlight or the like. ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle road or sheets used in road works. in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will ● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, appear on the instrument panel display ferry or train. ● If the vehicle is reversing. . In this case, increase the safe distance. ● If the vehicle over-accelerates. The distance warning can be switched on ● In case of snow or heavy rain. System limitations and off in the Easy Connect system using the ● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-  button and the SETTINGS and The Front Assist has certain physical limita- bikes. Driver assistance function buttons tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain ● Misaligned vehicles. ›››  page 24. circumstances, some of the system's reac- ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. The system will store the setting for the next tions may be inopportune from the driver's ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- time the ignition is switched on. standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter- tion. vene if necessary. SEAT recommends keeping the distance ● Special loads and accessories of other ve- warning switched on at all times. The following conditions may cause the hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards Front Assist not to react or to do so too or over the top. late: Switching the Front Assist off tem- ● In the first few instants of driving after porarily in the following situations switching on the ignition, due to the system’s Parking aid initial auto-calibration. In the following situations the Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's ● On taking tight bends or complex paths. General information limitations: ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. Assorted assistance systems – which vary ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- ● When the vehicle is to be towed. depending on the equipment fitted in the car aged. – will help you when parking or manoeuvring. 222 Driver assistance systems

The rear parking aid is an audible assistant ● Under certain circumstances, the system function. Have the function checked by a that warns about obstacles located behind does not detect or display certain objects: specialised workshop. the vehicle ››› page 224. – Objects such as chains, trailer draw During parking, Parking System Plus assists bars, fences, posts and thin trees. Note the driver by visually and audibly warning – Objects that are located above the ● In certain situations, the system can give them about obstacles detected in front and sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. a warning even though there is no obstacle behind the vehicle page 224. ››› – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- in the detected area, e.g: tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- WARNING – with rough or cobbled floors or ground der snow. with long grass; ● Always pay attention, also when looking ● Certain surfaces of objects and gar- – with external ultrasound sources, such straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles; surroundings. The assistance systems are sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at not a replacement for driver awareness. least correctly, these objects or people – In downpours, intense snow or dense When inserting or removing the vehicle wearing such clothes. exhaust gases; from a parking space, or when performing ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- – if the registration plate (front or rear) is similar manoeuvres the driver always as- ted by external sound sources. In certain not properly affixed to the bumper sur- sumes the responsibility. circumstances this may prevent them from face; ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all detecting people or objects. – or in locations such as the brow of a times to suit visibility, weather, road and ● Please note that low obstacles detected hill. traffic conditions. by the system may no longer be registered ● In order to guarantee good system oper- ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots by the sensors as the car moves closer, so ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, in which obstacles and people are not reg- the system will not give any further warn- free of snow or ice, and do not cover them istered. Pay special attention to children ing. In certain circumstances, objects such with adhesives or other objects. and animals. as high kerbs that could damage the bot- ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ● Always keep visual control of the sur- tom of the vehicle are not detected either. ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap- roundings: use the mirrors for additional ● If the first warning from the Parking Aid is ply it directly only very briefly and always help. ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- from a distance of more than 10 cm. ble damage. ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, CAUTION ● The knocks or damage on the radiator such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un- the operation of the Parking Aid. Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- derbody can adjust the orientation of the fected by different factors that may lead to ● In order to familiarise yourself with the sensors. This can affect the parking aid damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- system, it is advised that you practice park- rounds: ing in an area or car park that is free from » 223 Driving

traffic. There must be good weather and side area 0.90 m Parking aid plus* light conditions. central area 1.60 m ● The volume and tone of the warnings can be modified, in addition to the indications As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- ››› page 227. val between the audible warnings will be re- ● In vehicles without a driver information duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the system, these parameters can be modified warning will be constant: Do not continue to in a SEAT Official Service or in a special- move forward (or backward) ››› in General ised workshop. information on page 223, ››› in General ● Please observe information on towing a information on page 223 ! trailer ››› page 227. If you maintain separation from the obstacle, ● The display on the Easy Connect screen the volume of the warning begins to reduce Fig. 226 Represented area. shows a slight time delay. after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning). Parking system plus assists you audibly and visually when parking. Rear parking aid* Activating/Deactivating There are sensors integrated in the front and When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in park- rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle, is automatically switched on. This is con- ing by means of audible warning sounds. you are alerted by audible warnings and vis- firmed with a short warning. ually on the Easy Connect system. Description On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid In the event of danger of a frontal collision, system is disconnected immediately. There are sensors integrated in the rear the audible warnings come from the front of bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta- the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of cle, you are alerted by audible warnings. a rear-end collision they come from the rear. Make particularly sure that the sensors are Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues and the not covered by adhesives, residues and the like, as this could affect the system's opera- like, as this could affect the system's operation. Cleaning instructions ››› page 267. tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 267. The approximate measurement range of the The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is: sensors is:

A 1.20 m

224 Driver assistance systems

B 0.90 m Manual disconnection of Parking Aid Change from reduced view to full view C 1.60 m ● Press the  button again. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector D 0.90 m lever to position R. Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- play (the audible sounds remain active) val between the audible warnings will be re- ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im- duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the tory-assembled infotainment system. age (Rear View Camera “RVC”) warning will be constant: do not continue to move forward (or backward)! ● OR press the BACK function button. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to position R. If you maintain separation from the obstacle, Automatic connection of Parking Aid ● OR press the RVC function button. the volume of the warning begins to reduce ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector after four seconds (does not affect the tone A short confirmation signal will be heard and lever to position R. of the constant warning). the button symbol will light up yellow when ● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle the system is switched on. that is in its forwards path at a speed below Parking aid operation 10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 225, Automatic activation. The obstacle is detected from a distance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic Automatic activation connection is activated in the infotainment system. A reduced display is shown.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ● Move the selector lever to position P. ● OR: accelerate to approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- Fig. 227 Centre console: parking aid button. ing Aid ● Press the  function button. Fig. 228 Miniature indication of automatic ac- Manual connection of Parking Aid tivation. ● Press the  button once. When the Plus Parking Aid connects automatically, a miniature of the vehicle and the » 225 Driving

segments will appear on the left of the dis- If the system has been activated automati- White segments: a white segment is display ››› Fig. 228. cally, an audible sound warning will only be played when the obstacle is not within given when obstacles in front are at a dis- the vehicle's trajectory or the direction of Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap- tance of less than 50 cm. travel is in the opposite direction to its lo- proaching an obstacle located in front of the cation. vehicle. It only operates every time the speed CAUTION is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6 Yellow segments: obstacles located in the mph) for the first time. The automatic connection of the Parking vehicle's trajectory and which are more Aid only works when you are driving slowly. than 30 cm away from the vehicle are  If the parking aid is switched off using the If driving style is not adapted to the circum- displayed in yellow. button, the following actions must be carried stances, an accident and serious injury or Red segments: obstacles that are less than out in order for it to automatically switch on: damage may be caused. 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on played in red. again. Moreover, with the SEAT Media System ● Segments of the visual indication OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi- fore reducing speed below this number again. cates the vehicle's expected journey based ● OR: place the selector lever in position P on the steering wheel angle. and then move it from this position. Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- ● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa- cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding tion in the Easy Connect system menu. audible warning will sound. The automatic activation with parking aid As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the miniature indication can be switched on and segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. off from the Easy Connect system menu When the penultimate segment is displayed, ›››  page 24: this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- Fig. 229 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- ● Switch the ignition on. cles are represented in red, including those nect system screen. ● Select:  button > Settings > Parking out of the path. Do not continue to move for- and manoeuvring. The distance of separation from the obstacle ward (or backward) ››› in General infor- ● Select the Automatic activation option. can be estimated using the segments around mation on page 223, ››› in General infor- When the function button check box is activa- the vehicle. mation on page 223 ! ted , the function is on. The optical indication of the segments works as follows:

226 Driver assistance systems

Adjusting the display and audible Error messages Parking System Plus warnings The distance to possible obstacles at the rear When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is of the vehicle will not be displayed on the The settings for the display and audible switched on, if a continuous warning can be screen and nor will it be indicated by means warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- heard for several seconds (additionally, in the of audible sound signals. nect*. case of Parking system Plus, the LED of the  button flashes), there is a fault in the sys- The Easy Connect system screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the Automatic activation tem. vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.  on – activates the Automatic activa- Parking System Plus* tion option ››› page 225. If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is  off – deactivates the Automatic acti- displayed on the Easy Connect display in Rear Assist “Rear View Cam- vation option ››› page 225. front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas A and era”* Front volume* B are displayed ››› Fig. 226. If a front sensor Volume in the front and rear area. is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas C Operating and safety warnings and D are displayed. WARNING Front sound settings/sharpness* Have the fault corrected by a specialised Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front workshop without delay. ● The Rear Assist does not make it possible area. to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor Rear volume* Towing bracket can it overcome the system's own limits, hence using it may cause serious accidents Volume in the rear area. and injuries if used negligently or without In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket due care. The driver should be aware of device from the factory, when the trailer is Rear sound settings/sharpness* his/her surroundings at all times to ensure connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear safe driving. Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear sensors will not be activated when reverse ● The camera lens expands and distorts area. gear is engaged, when the selector lever is the field of vision and displays the objects turned to position R or when the button  is on the screen in a different, vague manner. Adjust volume pressed. The perception of distances is also distor- With the parking aid switched on, the active ted by this effect. » audio/video source volume will be reduced to the intensity of the selected setting. 227 Driving

● Due to the screen resolution or insuffi- of the vehicle of the luggage compartment Instructions for use cient light conditions, some items may be is carrying a heavy load. displayed in an unsatisfactory manner or ● In the following situations, the objects or not at all. Take special care with thin posts, other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- fences, railings or trees that might not be tem display appear to be further away or displayed on screen and could damage the closer than they really are: Pay special at- vehicle. tention: ● The rear assist has blind spots where it is – On moving from a horizontal plane to a not possible to represent people or objects slope. (small children, animals and certain objects cannot be detected in its field of vi- – On moving from a slope to a horizontal sion). Monitor the vehicle's surrounding plane. area at all times. – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the Fig. 230 rear. On the rear bumper: location of the ● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice rear assist camera. and snow, and do not cover it. – When the vehicle approaches objects ● The system is not a replacement for driv- that are not on the ground surface or A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver er awareness. Supervise the parking oper- are jutting out from it. These objects during reverse parking or manoeuvring ation at all times, as well as the vehicle's may also be outside the camera's an- ››› Fig. 230. The camera image is viewed to- surrounding area. Adapt your speed and gle of vision when reversing. gether with orientation lines projected by the driving style at all times to suit visibility, system on the Infotainment system screen. weather, road and traffic conditions. Note The bottom of the screen displays part of the ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by ● It is important to take great care and pay bumper corresponding to the number plate looking at the screen. special attention if you are not yet familiar area that will be used as reference by the ● The images on the rear assist screen are with the system. driver. only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa- ● Rear assist will not be available if the ve- tial depth, protruding parts or holes in the hicle's rear lid is open. Rear assist settings road, for example, are more difficult to de- Rear assist offers the user the possibility to tect or may not be seen at all. change the image's brightness, contrast and ● Vehicle load modifies the representation colour settings. of the orientation lines displayed. The width represented by the lines diminishes To change these settings: with vehicle load. Pay special attention to ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. the vehicle's surroundings when the inside ● Apply the parking brake. 228 Driver assistance systems

● Switch the ignition on. vring with the rear assist in a place without Parking and manoeuvring with the ● If necessary, switch on the Infotainment too much traffic or in a car park when there rear assist system. are good weather and visibility conditions. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector Cleaning the camera lens lever to position R. Keep the camera lens clean and clear of ● Press the  function button displayed on snow and ice: the right of the image. ● Make the desired adjustments on the menu ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by based glass cleaning product and clean the moving the corresponding scroll button. lens with a dry cloth. ● Remove snow using a small brush. Necessary conditions for parking and ma- ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. noeuvring with the rear assist Fig. 231 Display on the Infotainment system The system should not be used in the follow- CAUTION screen: guidance lines. ing cases: ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to Switching the system on and off ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or clean the camera lens. ● The rear assist will switch on when the igni- is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove tion is on or the engine running, on engaging lens. ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- could damage the camera. ● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- played very clearly or is incomplete. matic gearbox). ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. ● The system switches off 8 seconds after ● If the position and installation angle of the disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- or removing the selector lever from the R po- end collision. Have the system checked by a sition (automatic gearbox). The system will specialised workshop. also disconnect immediately after the ignition is switched off. Familiarising yourself with the system In combination with the Parking System Plus To familiarise yourself with the system, the ››› page 222, the camera image will cease to orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- be transmitted immediately when reverse ommends practising parking and manoeu- gear is engaged or when the selector lever is »

229 Driving

moved from the R position, and the optical in- 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in Fatigue detection (break formation provided by the Parking Aid system green ends approximately 2 m behind the will be displayed. vehicle on the road surface. recommendation)* Also in combination with the system, the rear 3 Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi- assist image can also be concealed: mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road Introduction surface. ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system The Fatigue detection informs the driver when 4 Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis- buttons on the display. their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue. tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear ● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that of the vehicle on the road surface. WARNING appears on the left of the screen (which switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- Parking manoeuvre Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- ing System Plus's optical system). gue detection system tempt you into taking ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, If you wish to display the rear assist image space and engage reverse gear (manual sufficient in length when making long jour- again: gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi- neys. tion (automatic gearbox). ● The driver always assumes the responsi- ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel bility of driving to their full capacity. lever's position, engage reverse again or so that the side orientation lines lead towards move the selector lever to position R. ● Never drive if you are tired. the parking space. ● OR: Press the RVC function button1) ● The system does not detect the tiredness ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so of the driver in all circumstances. Consult that the side orientation lines run parallel to it. the information in the section ››› page 231, Meaning of the orientation lines System limitations. ››› Fig. 231 ● In some situations, the system may incor- 1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the rectly interpret an intended driving ma- approximate width of the vehicle plus the noeuvre as driver tiredness. rear view mirrors) on the road surface. ● No warning is given in the event of the effect called microsleep!

1) WARNING: the RVC function button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R. 230 Driver assistance systems

● Please observe the indications on the in- sound and an optic warning is shown with a tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- strument panel and act as is necessary. symbol and complementary message on the vent it from functioning. instrument panel display ››› Fig. 232. The message on the instrument panel display is ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) Note shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) ● Fatigue detection has been developed pending on the case, is repeated. The system ● When cornering for driving on motorways and well paved stores the last message displayed. roads only. ● On roads in poor condition The message on the instrument panel display ● ● In unfavourable weather conditions If there is a fault in the system, have it can be switched off by pressing the  checked by a specialised workshop. button on the windscreen wiper lever or the ● When a sporty driving style is employed button  on the multi function steering ● In the event of a serious distraction to the wheel ›››  page 27. driver Function and operation The message can be recalled to the instru- Fatigue detection will be restored when the ment panel display using the multifunction vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, display ›››  page 27. when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and Conditions of operation opened the door. Driving behaviour is only calculated on In the event of slow driving during a long peri- speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- around 200 km/h (125 mph). tem automatically re-establishes the tiredness calculation. When driving at a faster Switching on and off speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- ted. vated in the Easy Connect system with the Fig. 232 On the screen of the instrument pan-  button and the SETTINGS function button el: fatigue detection. ›››  page 24. A mark indicates that the ad- Fatigue detection determines the driving be- justment has been activated. haviour of the driver when starting a journey, making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- System limitations stantly compared with the current driving be- The Fatigue detection has certain limitations haviour. If the system detects that the driver is inherent to the system. The following condi- tired, an audible warning is given with a 231 Driving

Towing bracket device Trailer weight Due to lower air density, engine power decreases depending on the increase in alti- Trailer weight tude, this also reduces climbing ability, which requires a reduction of the weight of the vehi- Driving with a trailer The combined vehicle and trailer must be cle with a trailer by 10% for every 1000 m in- balanced. To do so use the maximum permit- crease in altitude. The weight of the assembly Technical requirements ted towing bracket load. An insufficient is calculated by adding the vehicle weight weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the (loaded) to the trailer weight (loaded). Al- If your vehicle has a factory-fitted towing ball joint of the towing bracket will have a ways drive with special care when towing a bracket or is equipped with a selection of negative impact upon the response of the ve- trailer. SEAT Original Accessories, it meets all the hicle-trailer assembly on the road. relevant technical and legal requirements. The towed load and support load information In vehicles with a towing bracket it is possible Weight distribution that is displayed on the towing bracket man- to remove the ball joint, situated (together Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ufacturers label are only values for the verifi- with the special assembly instructions) in the objects are as near to the axle as possible. cation of the device. The correct figures for housing for the spare wheel in the vehicle Ensure that the objects do not move. your specific vehicle, which are usually lower luggage compartment ››› page 78, Vehicle than these figures, are given in the documen- tool kit*. If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer tation of your vehicle. loaded then the load distribution is incorrect. Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power However, if these conditions cannot be avoi- WARNING socket for the electrical connection between ded, drive very slowly. the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer you are ● Exceeding the maximum established load going to use has a 7-pin connector, the cor- per axle and the maximum towing bracket Tyre pressure values load in addition to the maximum permitted responding adaptor, acquired from the SEAT Correct the tyre pressure in your vehicle to load or the load of the vehicle + trailer as- Original Accessories Catalogue, can be “total load” page 256, Service life of sembly can cause accidents and serious used. ››› tyres. injuries. If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to the ● A sliding load can considerably affect car, it must be done according to the instruc- Trailer weight the stability and safety of the vehicle + tions of the towing bracket manufacturer. trailer assembly, resulting in accidents and Never exceed the authorised trailer weight serious injuries. under any circumstances page 275, Note ››› Technical specifications. Any queries that may arise can be directed to an authorised SEAT dealer. The trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level.

232 Towing bracket device

Driving with a trailer Brakes Engine overheating Brake in due course! If the trailer has an over- In the event that the coolant temperature Exterior mirrors run brake, apply the brakes gently at first gauge needle moves to the right section of Check whether you can see enough of the and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking the scale or to the red area, immediately re- road behind the trailer with the standard rear that can be caused by locking of trailer duce speed. If the control lamp  flashes on vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you wheels. Change to a lower gear in good time the general instrument panel, stop the vehicle should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. before descending a slope in order to take and switch off the engine. Wait several mi- Observe the relevant statutory requirements advantage of the engine brake. nutes and check the coolant level in the tank of the country you are in. ››› page 249. The trailer is incorporated into the vehi- Please observe the following indications cle's anti-theft alarm system: Headlights ››› page 248. The front part of the vehicle may be raised ● When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti- The coolant temperature can be reduced by when the trailer is connected and the light theft alarm and a towing bracket. switching on the heating. may dazzle the rest of the traffic. ● When the trailer is electrically connected to Adapt the height of the headlights using the the vehicle via the towing bracket socket. WARNING 1) headlight range adjuster ››› page 121 . ● When the vehicle electrical device and the ● Adjust your speed to suit the road and towing bracket are operational. traffic conditions. Driving speed ● When the vehicle is locked and the vehicle's ● An electrical installation that is connec- For your own safety do not drive faster than anti-theft alarm device is activated. ted incorrectly or by non-specialised per- the maximum permitted speed indicated on sonnel can prevent the connection of the the trailer. Once the electrical connection is interrupted current to the trailer and cause faults in the with the vehicle trailer locked, the alarm operation of the electrical system through- At all times, immediately reduce speed if you sounds. out the entire vehicle, leading to accidents detect the slightest swaying movement of the and serious injury. trailer. Never try to “return the trailer to a Always switch off the vehicle anti-theft alarm ● All electrical work must be carried out straight position” by accelerating. device before connecting or disconnecting a trailer. The vehicle anti-theft alarm device only by specialised services. could cause the alarm to sound ››› page 116, ● Never directly connect the trailer electri- Anti-theft alarm*. cal device to the electrical sockets of the »

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights. 233 Driving

reverse driving lights or other sources of SEAT accessory, it meets all national techni- Description electrical current. cal and legal requirements for towing. Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power sock- CAUTION et for the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip- ● Avoid corners, and sudden and sharp ped with a 7-pin connector, you can use the braking. corresponding adaptor, which is available as ● Once the trailing arm has been removed, a genuine SEAT accessory. place the corresponding cover on the hole of the fastening point. This prevents dirt The towing device has a maximum vertical from entering the hole – see the trailer sys- load of 50 kg. tem assembly manual. WARNING Note ● Before driving with the ball-headed bar fitted, verify its correct assembly and ● In the event of frequent journeys with a placement in the clamping bush. trailer, we recommend also having the vehicle inspected in between the service in- ● Do not use the ball-headed bar if it is not tervals. correctly placed and fixed in the clamping bush. ● When connecting and disconnecting the trailer, the handbrake must be applied. ● Do not use the towing device for towing if it is damaged or has missing parts. ● For technical reasons, trailers with LED reverse lights cannot be incorporated into ● Do not modify or adapt the towing device the vehicle anti-theft alarm system. connection. Fig. 233 Towing bracket device support for hitching/ball-headed bar. ● Never disengage the ball-headed bar with the trailer still hitched. The ball-headed bar is detachable. It is loca- Towing bracket device ted in the spare wheel well or in the spare CAUTION wheel compartment in the boot ››› page 78, Vehicle tool kit*. Introduction Be careful not to damage the paint on the bumper when handling the ball-headed Key to ››› Fig. 233 If the vehicle is equipped with a towing brack- bar. 1 13-pin socket et device from the factory or is a genuine 2 Safety flange

234 Towing bracket device

3 Clamping bush Placing in service position 4 Clamping bush cap 5 Ball head cover 6 Ball-headed bar 7 Locking balls 8 Centred 9 Red marking on the manual regulator

10 Manual regulator

11 Key

12 Key slot cover

13 Red marking on the manual regulator

14 White marking on the ball-headed bar

Note Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you lose your key.

Fig. 235 Service position.

Fig. 234 Placing in service position. Before assembling, place the ball-headed bar in service position.

– Turn key A fully in the direction of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 234. – Hold the ball-headed bar with your left hand.

– Pull manual regulator B outward in the direction of arrow 2 and turn it fully in the direction of arrow 3 . »

235 Driving

The manual regulator will remain in this posi- Assembly of the ball-headed bar tion.

Service position ››› Fig. 235

● Key C is in an open position – the key arrow points to the “unlocked” symbol. The key cannot be removed from the key slot. ● The D locking balls may be fully inserted into the body of the ball-headed bar by applying some pressure. Fig. 237 Placing the key slot cover. ● The red E marking on the manual regulator points towards the white marking on the – Remove the cap from the clamping bush 4 ball-headed bar. ››› Fig. 233 by pulling downwards. ● Between the manual regulator and the – Place the ball-headed bar in the service body of the ball-headed bar there is a clearly position ››› page 235. visible space of approximately 4 mm F . – Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath Once the ball-headed bar has been posi- ››› Fig. 236 and push it into the clamping tioned like this, it will be ready to be placed in bush as far as possible until you hear it click the clamping bush. into place ››› . The manual regulator A automatically WARNING Fig. 236 Placing the ball-headed bar/locking turns in the opposite direction, adjusting to Do not use the ball-headed bar if it cannot and removing the key. the ball-headed bar ››› . be correctly placed in the service position. – Switch off the manual regulator lock with key B by turning the key fully to the right in CAUTION the direction of arrow 1 – the arrow in the The key cannot be removed from the man- key displays the “locked” symbol. ual regulator key slot when it is in the serv- – Remove the key in the direction of arrow 2 . ice position. – Place cover C over the manual regulator lock in the direction of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 237.

236 Towing bracket device

– Verify the correct placement of the ball- Verification of correct placement WARNING headed bar ››› page 237. Only use the towing bracket device when WARNING the ball-headed bar is properly fitted! ● Do not hold the manual regulator with your hand when fitting the ball-headed bar since you could sustain injuries to your fingers. ● When mounting the ball-headed bar, always lock it with a key and remove the key from the slot. ● The ball-headed bar must not be in the Fig. 238 Correct placement of the ball-head- service position with the key in the key slot. ed bar. ● If the ball-headed bar is not placed in the service position you will not be able to Before using the ball-headed bar, ensure it is place it in the clamping bush. correctly fitted. Ensure that: CAUTION ● The ball-headed bar does not come out of When removing the key, always place the cover over the key slot of the manual regu- the clamping bush in a “jerky” manner. lator to prevent dirt from entering. ● The red mark A ››› Fig. 238 on the manual regulator signals toward the white mark on Note the ball-headed bar. ● The manual regulator is adjusted to the Once removed, place the clamping bush cap in an appropriate location in the boot. ball-headed bar, leaving no space between them. ● The regulator is locked and the key has been removed. ● Cover B has been placed over the manual regulator lock.

237 Driving

Disassembly of the ball-headed The ball-headed bar should be placed in the bar service position so that it is ready to be inserted into the clamping bush ››› .

– Place the cover over the clamping bush 4 ››› Fig. 233.

WARNING

● Never leave the ball-headed bar unsecured in the boot. It could be damaged in Fig. 240 Unblock the ball-headed bar. the event of sudden braking, putting the safety of passengers at risk! – A Remove cover from over the regulator ● Never disassemble the ball-headed bar key slot in the direction of arrow 1 with the trailer still hitched. ››› Fig. 239. – Insert key B in the key slot. CAUTION – Open the manual regulator lock by turning ● If you do not turn the manual regulator key B fully to the left in the direction of ar- fully, it will return to its original position row 2 . The arrow on the key points to the when the ball-headed bar is removed. The “unlocked” symbol. manual regulator will be stuck to the ball- headed bar and you will not be able to put – Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath it in the service position. Therefore, before ››› Fig. 240 and remove manual regulator you assemble it again, you must place the C with your other hand in the direction of Fig. 239 Remove the key slot cover/unlock ball-headed bar in this position. arrow 3 . with the key. ● After disassembly, place the cap on the – Turn the removed regulator fully in the di- clamping bush’s orifice. This way you will rection of arrow 4 and hold it firmly in this prevent dirt from entering the clamping position. bush.

– Remove the ball-headed bar from the clamping bush, pulling downward in the di- Note rection of arrow 5 . ● Before disassembling the ball-headed bar, we recommend placing the cover on the ball head. 238 Towing bracket device

● Clean the ball-headed bar thoroughly before returning it to the on-board toolbox.

Use and maintenance

Cover the clamping bush with the cap to prevent dirt from entering. Before hooking on the trailer, check the ball head and, if necessary, lubricate it with adequate lubricant. Place the protective cover over the ball head when storing the bar. This way, you will avoid getting the boot dirty. If it gets dirty, clean and dry the clamping bush thoroughly with an appropriate product.

CAUTION The top part of the clamping bush opening is lubricated. Be careful not to remove this lubrication.

239 Practical tips

Practical tips regulations of the highway code. More infor- The reliability, safety and compatibility mation can be obtained at an Authorised with your vehicle of SEAT original spare SEAT dealer, where all jobs required can be parts and accessories has been verified. carried out appropriately. Accessories and modifi- ● Despite the continuous observation of the market, we cannot judge nor guarantee cations to the vehicle Vehicle improvements and modifications the suitability of other products for your ve- The owner must keep the technical docu- hicle, be they authorised products or prod- Accessories and modifica- mentation regarding the modifications car- ucts approved by a state testing facility. ried out on the vehicle so it can be handed tions to the vehicle over to those responsible for processing end- Note of-life vehicles. This ensures end-of-life pro- SEAT original spare parts and accessories Accessories, replacement parts cessing of the vehicle, while protecting the can be purchased at authorised SEAT deal- environment. and repair work ers where the purchased parts can also be Work done on the electrical components and fitted. If you wish to retrofit accessories in the vehi- software can cause disruption in operations. cle, or if a part of the vehicle has been re- Due to the interconnection of electronic com- placed by a new part or technical modifica- ponents, their malfunction can also impair tions are required, the following instructions Modifications and effects of the systems that are not directly affected. This airbag system must be taken into account: can adversely affect reliability of the vehicle, and can produce excessive wear of the parts. ● Before purchasing accessories or spare In the adjustment and modification, respect parts and before making technical modifica- Damage caused by technical modifications the SEAT directive. tions, always request advice from an Author- that are not made with the consent of SEAT Modifications and corrections of the front ised SEAT dealer ››› . will be excluded from the warranty – see war- bumper, doors, front seats, roof or bodywork ranty certificate. ● In the event that technical modifications must be carried out at authorised SEAT work- are carried out on the vehicle, the instructions shops. Components of the airbag system can WARNING and regulations specified by the company, be found in these parts of the vehicle. SEAT, must be observed. ● Jobs or modifications unduly carried out on your vehicle can cause disruption to op- WARNING No damage will be caused to the vehicle if erations - Risk of accident! the established procedures are respected, ● Airbag modules must never be repaired. ● We recommend that you use only ex- which guarantees safe driving and operation. They must be replaced. pressly authorised SEAT Accessories and After the modifications are carried out, the ● Never fit components of the airbag sys- SEAT Original Spare Parts for your vehicle. vehicle will comply with the restrictions and tem removed from old vehicles or those 240 Checking and refilling levels

originating from a recycling process in the Checking and refilling lev- The correct type of fuel for your vehicle is in- vehicle. dicated on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap, along with the tyre size and pres- ● The modification of the suspension of the els sure Fig. 241 . vehicle wheels, including the use of non- ››› permitted combinations of tyres and rims Fuel can alter the operation of the airbag sys- Vehicles with a fuel cap with key tem and increase the risk of serious or fatal – Press the flap in the direction of the arrow Refuelling injuries in an accident. 1 ››› Fig. 241. ● During all jobs on the airbag system, in – Open the cover in the direction indicated addition to the removal and fitting of parts by the arrow 2 . of the system in the course of other repair jobs, parts of the airbag system can be – Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand damaged. Therefore in the event of an ac- and unlock it using the ignition key, turning it cident, this may cause the airbags to acti- anti-clockwise. vate incorrectly or not activate at all. – Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 241 . Radio and aerial reception – Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed In vehicles factory-fitted with an audio or tube as far as it will go. navigation system, the aerial may be instal- The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic led in different places: filler nozzle cuts out ››› . ● inside the rear window next to the heating – Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed elements, tube and place it back on the pump. ● on the roof of the vehicle. – Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks into place.

– Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand Fig. 241 Rear part of the vehicle, right side: and lock it using the ignition key, turning it tank lid/tank lid with unscrewed cap. clockwise.

– Press the tank flap with your hand to close Read the additional information carefully it. » ›››  page 41 241 Practical tips

– Check that the fuel flap is correctly closed. WARNING Note Observe all relevant statutory regulations The fuel tank capacity is around 55 litres, Vehicles with a keyless fuel cap (the side on transporting spare fuel canisters. For of which 7 litres are the reserve. flap will unlock using the central locking safety reasons, we do not recommend car- system) rying a spare canister in the vehicle. The – Once the vehicle has been unlocked using canister could be damaged in an accident 1) the central locking button, press the fuel and fuel may leak. Risk of fire! Identification of the fuel flap in the direction of the arrow 1 ››› Fig. 241. CAUTION – Open the cover in the direction indicated ● Switch off the auxiliary heater (heater by the arrow 2 . and independent heater) before filling the tank. – Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and place it on top of the tank flap ››› Fig. 241 ● The fuel tank is full as soon as the auto- . matic filler nozzle cuts out. Do not continue filling, as this will fill the expansion cham- – Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed ber. tube as far as it will go. ● Never completely empty the tank! An ir- The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic regular fuel supply can cause ignition Fig. 242 Identification of fuels according to filler nozzle cuts out ››› . faults, which can result in damage to a sub- European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/ stantial amount of engine parts and the ex- – Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed haust system. Fuels are identified with different symbols. tube and place it back on the pump. ● If any fuel is spilt onto the paintwork of Depending on the fuel, the different symbols – Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks the vehicle, it should be removed immedi- are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi- into place. ately. Risk of damage to paintwork! cle. The identification serves to prevent con- fusion when choosing the fuel. – Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it click into place. Note 1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha- nol). The number indicates the percent- – Check that the fuel flap is properly closed. There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means, essary, request assistance from special- for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. ised personnel.

1) Depending on country 242 Checking and refilling levels

2 Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio- Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or CAUTION diesel). The number indicates the per- normal 91 octane petrol at least centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7” ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- E30 - E100 button must not be used. The means, for example, a proportion of bio- tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91 fuel system would be damaged. Exception: diesel of max. 7%. octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 244, 3 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed loss). Ethanol fuel. Natural Gas. ● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at other metal additives entails a permanent least deterioration of the effectiveness of the Type of petrol You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 catalytic converter. 3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine AKI) at least. ● Only use fuel additives that have been approved by SEAT. The products that con- If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the tain substances to increase the octane rat- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only fuel tank flap. ing or decrease knocking may contain met- use moderate engine speeds and a light al additives that damage the engine and The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- catalytic converter. This type of products verter and must only be run on unleaded ble. must not be used. petrol. The petrol must comply with the ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or containing metals. LRP (lead replacement with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled super 95 octane petrol at least petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of (E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiated We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 metal additives. Risk of engine damage! by using the octane numbers (RON) or via octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super ● High engine speed and full throttle can the anti-knock index (AKI). 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power damage the engine when using petrol with The following pieces of text show the infor- loss). an octane rating lower than the correct mation included in the corresponding stickers grade for the engine. If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- on the tank lid (examples): mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light Note throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than the ble. one required by the engine can be used. »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 243 Practical tips

● In countries in which there is no sulphur- Diesel CAUTION free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- 3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine ● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol, phur content fuel. heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents Please note the information on the inside of as they can cause severely damage the the fuel tank flap. fuel system and the engine. Ethanol fuel We recommend you use Diesel according to ● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not 3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine standard EN 590. start the engine under any circumstances. Risk of damaging the fuel system and the The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- engine! Obtain technical assistance. tures, thus affecting the start or operation of gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with with the engine. To ensure that you can continue the marking “Petrol/ethanol”. to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with gas stations is provided -depending on the Engine compartment unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em- ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high ployee of the petrol station whether their die- Working in the engine compart- percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited led in the same way as petrol refuelling. for current and future temperatures. ment

Also consider that ››› page 243, Type of pet- Read the additional information carefully Water in the fuel filter2) rol ›››  page 13 If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is Note equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep- Always be aware of the danger of injury arator, the instrument panel may display the and scalding as well as the risk of acci- SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- dent or fire when working in the engine sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- following warning:  Water in the fuel compartment, e.g. when checking and re- crease impurities that using E100 ethanol filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to filling fluids. Therefore, always observe fuel might have left in the engine. a specialised workshop so that they can the warnings and follow all general safety drain the fuel filter. precautions. The engine compartment is a dangerous area.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 2) Valid for the market: Algeria. 244 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING ● Never touch the radiator fan when the en- ● Observe the following additional warn- gine is hot. The fan may start running sud- ings if work on the fuel system or the elec- ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, denly! trical system is necessary. smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding! Wait until ● Never cover the engine with additional in- – Always disconnect the battery from the no steam or coolant can be seen before sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of on-board network. opening the bonnet. fire! – Do not smoke. ● ● Switch off the engine and remove the key Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant – Never work near naked flames. from the ignition. expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure! – Always keep an approved fire extin- ● Engage neutral in vehicles with manual guisher immediately available. gearbox and move the selector lever to po- ● Protect face, hands and arms from any sition P in vehicles with automatic gearbox. hot steam or hot coolant released by covering the cap with a large, thick rag when CAUTION ● Apply the handbrake firmly. opening the expansion tank. ● When topping up fluids, make sure the ● Wait for the engine to cool down. ● Do not leave any objects, such as cloths correct fluid is put into the correct filler ● For safety reasons, the bonnet must al- or tools, in the engine compartment. opening. Otherwise this can cause serious ways be closed when the vehicle is moving. ● When working underneath the vehicle, malfunctions or engine damage! Therefore, after closing the bonnet always secure it so that it cannot roll away and ● Never open the bonnet using the release check that it is properly secured. support it safely on suitable supports. The catch. Risk of damage! ● Should you notice that the bonnet is not hydraulic jack is not sufficient for this pur- safely secured when the vehicle is moving, pose. Risk of injuries! stop the vehicle immediately and close the For the sake of the environment ● If any tests have to be performed with the bonnet properly. Risk of accident! Due to the environmentally-friendly dis- engine running, there is an extra safety risk posal of fluids, the equipment necessary ● Keep children away from the engine from rotating parts, such as the drive belt, and the knowledge required, let an author- compartment. alternator and radiator fan, etc., and from ised SEAT dealer change fluids during serv- ● Do not touch hot engine parts. Risk of the high-voltage ignition system. You ice inspections of the vehicle. burns! should also note the following: ● Never spill fluids on hot engine compart- – Never touch the electrical wiring of the ments. These fluids can cause a fire (e.g. ignition system. Note antifreeze in coolant)! – Keep away from moving engine parts ● Please contact an authorised SEAT deal- ● Take care not to cause short circuits in when wearing jewellery, loose clothing er with any doubts regarding fluids. the electrical system, especially when or long hair. Risk of fatal injuries! All ● Fluids of the correct specifications can working on the battery. jewellery must be removed, hair tied be acquired from the selection of SEAT back and close-fitting clothing worn. Original Accessories.

245 Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 243 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different mentioned above. These operations are de- Radiator fan fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never scribed in the ››› page 244. fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious The radiator is driven by an electric motor damage to the engine may be caused. Overview and controlled according to the temperature of the coolant. 1 Coolant expansion tank ...... 249 You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical specifica- After the engine has been stopped and the 2 Window washer water tank ...... 251 tions as of ››› page 275. ignition switched off, the radiator fan may 3 Engine oil filler cap ...... 248 continue running for around 10 minutes. 4 Engine oil level dipstick ...... 248 Note 5 Brake fluid reservoir ...... 250 The layout of the engine compartment is very similar to all petrol and diesel engines. 6 Battery ...... 251

The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the components

246 Checking and refilling levels

Engine oil Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* Warning lamp Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash General notes formation, may be used in diesel engines  Flashes red equipped with particulate filter. Using other types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- The information display shows: The engine comes with a special, multi-grade Oil pressure. Switch off the engine! oil that can be used all year round. tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- Instruction Manual! fore:  Do not carry on driving! Switch off the engine Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- and check the engine oil level ››› page 248 tial for the correct operation of the engine ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, and its long useful life, when topping up or ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the changing oil, use only those oils that comply  do not drive on. Do not even run the engine at engine oil level is too low ››› page 248 and idle speed! Go to a technical service. with VW standards. you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil We recommend that the oil change indicated  It lights up yellow in the Maintenance Programme, be per- (once) conforming to the specifications formed by a technical service or specialised VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00, The information display shows: workshop. VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l) Check oil level! ›››  page 42. Park the vehicle, stop the engine and check the engine oil level ››› page 248. If the engine oil level is too low If the bonnet stays open for over 30 seconds, the Note You can get information about the correct en- warning lamp switches off. If the engine oil is not refil- gine oil for your vehicle at your specialised Before a long trip, we recommend finding led, the warning lamp illuminates again after 100 km (62 miles). shop. If you have to change your engine oil, an engine oil that conforms to the corre- use that oil. sponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the  It flashes yellow If the recommended engine oil is not availa- correct engine oil will always be available ble, in the event of an emergency you can for a top-up if needed. The information display shows: add oil once up to a maximum of 0.5 L of the Oil sensor! Workshop !If the engine oil level sensor is faulty, The warning next oil until the next oil change: lamp  flashes various times after the ignition is switched on and an audible warning is given. Go to a ● Valid for vehicles with petrol engines: technical service. standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C or API SN.

247 Practical tips

Checking engine oil level It is normal for the engine to consume a cer- Changing engine oil tain amount of oil. Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle Engine oil must be changed with the frequen- is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 li- cy indicated in the Maintenance Programme tres per 1,000 km. Oil consumption can also or according to the service interval indicator be higher for the first 5,000 km (3000 miles). ›››  page 33. You should therefore check the oil level at CAUTION regular intervals, ideally every time you fill the tank or before setting off on a long trip. Do not mix engine oil with additives. Risk of damage to the engine! Damage caused by CAUTION these products is not covered by the warranty. ● The oil level must never exceed area A . Fig. 244 Engine oil dipsticks. Risk of damaging the exhaust system! Note Read the additional information carefully ● If the engine oil cannot be topped up un-  ›››  page 42 der the given conditions, do not drive on! Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into Stop the engine and seek the professional contact with engine oil. The dipstick shows the engine oil level. assistance of an Official Service, as this ››› Fig. 244. could cause serious damage to the engine.

Checking oil level Coolant – Park the vehicle on a level surface and en- Topping up engine oil sure the engine is at operating temperature. Control lamp – Check the engine oil level ››› page 248, – Switch the ignition off. Checking engine oil level.  It lights up blue – Open the bonnet. – Unscrew the cap from the filler opening. The engine has not yet reached service tempera- – Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow a) – Put in the specified grade of oil 0.5 litres at ture . back to the sump and remove the dipstick. Avoid high engine speeds, hard acceleration and a time page 247. ››› subjecting the engine to high loads. – Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and in- – Check the oil level ››› page 248. sert it again as far as it will go. a) This does not apply to vehicles equipped with an in- – Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push formative display. – Then pull the dipstick out again and check the dipstick all the way in. the oil level.

248 Checking and refilling levels

 It lights up or flashes red Checking coolant level Coolant fluid loss Any loss of coolant normally indicates a leak. The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant It is not sufficient merely to top up the cool- level too low.  Do not carry on driving! Switch off the engine ant. The cooling system should be inspected and check the coolant level ››› page 249, and fill it if by an Official Service without delay. necessary ››› page 249. The information display shows: CAUTION Check coolant! Instruction Manual! ● In the event of a fault that causes the en- If the coolant is situated in the prescribed gine to overheat, contact an authorised area, the high temperature may be due to a SEAT dealer immediately, as this could fault in the cooling system fan. Check the ra- damage the engine. diator fan fuse and replace it if necessary Fig. 245 Engine compartment: coolant tank. ● Anti-freeze that does not correspond to ›››  page 45. the correct specification may particularly Read the additional information carefully affect corrosion protection considerably. If the warning lamp  (red) remains lit up, de- ›››  page 43 ● Faults caused by corrosion may lead to spite both the coolant level and the radiator coolant leaks. Risk of serious engine faults! fan fuse being in correct condition,  stop The coolant expansion tank is located in the the vehicle! engine compartment of the vehicle.

Go to a technical service. – Switch the ignition off. Topping up the coolant level – Open the bonnet ››› page 244. WARNING – Switch the ignition off. – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- ● Take care when opening the coolant res- pansion tank Fig. 245. When the engine – Wait for the engine to cool down. ervoir. When the engine is warm or hot, the ››› system is pressurised – Danger of burns! is cold, the coolant should be between – Cover the cap on the coolant expansion Wait for the engine to cool before opening marks B (min.) and A (max.). When the tank ››› Fig. 245 with a cloth and carefully the cover. engine is hot, it may be slightly above mark unscrew the cap. A (max.). ● Do not touch the fan. The fan can switch – Refill the level of coolant. on automatically regardless of whether the If the coolant fluid level in the reservoir is too – Screw the cap on again until it clicks into ignition is switched on. low, this will be indicated by the  red warn- place. ing lamp illuminating on the general dash panel ››› page 248. However, we recom- Do not use a different type of additive if the mend checking the coolant level directly in prescribed anti-freeze additive is not » the tank. 249 Practical tips

available, in the event of an emergency. In Brake fluid brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low, this this case, use only water and bring the cool- will be indicated by the warning lamp illumi- ant concentration back up to the correct lev- nating on the instrument panel  el as soon as possible at an Official Service. Checking brake fluid level ››› page 200, Control lamps. Always top up with unused coolant. WARNING Never fill the coolant tank above mark A ● If the fluid level has dropped below the (max.) ››› Fig. 245 ! Excess coolant is forced MIN mark,  do not continue driving. Risk of out of the cooling system through the over- accident! Go to a technical service. pressure valve in the filler cap of the expan- ● Heavy use of the brakes may cause a va- sion tank when the engine heats up. pour lock if the brake fluid is left in the brake system for too long. This would seri- WARNING ously affect the efficiency of the brakes ● The anti-freeze additive and, therefore, and the safety of the vehicle. the entire coolant, are a health hazard. Fig. 246 Engine compartment: coolant tank. Avoid touching the coolant. Coolant fumes are also a health hazard. For this reason, Read the additional information carefully Changing the brake fluid always store the coolant additive in a safe ›››  page 43 place out of the reach of children. Risk of Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, it poisoning! The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- gradually absorbs moisture from the atmos- ● gine compartment of the vehicle. If splashed into eyes, rinse immediately phere. If the water content in the brake fluid is with clean water and seek immediate med- – Switch the ignition off. too high, the brake system could corrode. The ical attention. – Open the bonnet ››› page 244. water content also reduces the boiling point ● Seek immediate medical attention if the of the brake fluid. coolant is accidentally ingested. – Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir ››› Fig. 246. It should be between the “MIN” The brake fluid must comply with one of the CAUTION and “MAX” marks. following standards or specifications: ● VW 50114 If the coolant cannot be topped up under The fluid level drops slightly after a period of the given conditions,  do not drive on. We time due to automatic compensation for ● FMVSS 116 DOT4 recommend contacting an authorised SEAT brake pad wear. This is quite normal. dealer, as this can damage the engine. CAUTION However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark, Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. there may be a leak in the brake system. If the 250 Checking and refilling levels

Window washer system Plain water on its own is not enough to clean could contaminate the fluid hoses and lead the glass and the headlights properly. We to a windscreen washer malfunction. therefore recommend using clean water with Topping up windscreen washer flu- a glass cleaning product to eliminate any id stubborn dirt (with an anti-freeze additive in winter). Battery Although your vehicle has heated windscreen washer jets, anti-freeze should always be Introduction added to the water in winter. Read the additional information carefully Ethanol can be used where glass cleaner ›››  page 44. with anti-freeze is unavailable. The concentration of ethanol must be no greater than 15 Warning symbols on the battery %. However, remember that anti-freeze in this proportion only protects down to -5°C  Always wear safety glasses! (+23°F). Fig. 247 Engine compartment: windscreen Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Always  wear gloves and hearing protection! cleaning fluid tank. CAUTION ● Never mix the windscreen washing water Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered lights Read the additional information carefully and lit cigarettes away when working on the with anti-freeze used for the cooling sys-  ›››  page 44 battery! tem or other additives. The container for the windscreen washer ● If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen  washer system, only mix in with the water a leased when the battery is under charge! or rear window and the headlight washer detergent that does not damage polycar-  Keep children away from the battery! system. The container is located in the engine bonates. compartment. Incorrect handling of the vehicle battery The capacity of the reservoir is approximate- Note could lead to damage. We therefore recom- ly 3.5 litres; in vehicles with a headlight wash- When topping up the fluid, do not move the mend all work on the vehicle battery be per- er system, it is approximately 5.4 litres1). filter from the container opening, as this formed by an authorised SEAT dealer. »

1) Valid only for certain countries. 5.4 litres for both versions. 251 Practical tips

Always be aware of the danger of injury and ● Hydrogen is released and a highly explo- CAUTION scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire sive mixture of gases is generated when the ● Never disconnect the battery when the when working on the battery and the electri- battery is under charge. Sparks when dis- ignition is switched on, as the electrical cal system. Therefore, always observe the connecting or releasing cable terminals system (electronic components) of the ve- warnings and follow all general safety pre- with the ignition switched on could also hicle could be damaged. When discon- cautions. cause an explosion. necting the battery from the vehicle elec- ● A short circuit is produced if the battery trical system, disconnect its negative ter- WARNING terminals are bridged, e.g. using metal ob- minal (-) first. Only then may the positive ● Battery acid is very corrosive, therefore, jects, cables, etc. Possible consequences terminal (+) be disconnected. in the event of a short-circuit: melting of the battery must be handled with the ut- ● When connecting the battery, first con- lead plates, battery explosion and fire, most care. Wear protective gloves and pro- nect the positive terminal (+) and then the splashing acid. tect your eyes and skin when handling bat- negative terminal (-). The battery cables teries. The corrosive fumes in the air irritate ● The following is forbidden during work: must never be connected to the wrong bat- and inflame the respiratory tract and cause fire and open flames, smoking and activi- tery terminals. Risk of burning the electrical conjunctivitis. It corrodes tooth enamel. ties that could produce sparks. Avoid caus- installation! Causes deep and difficult-to-heal wounds ing sparks when handling cables or electri- ● Make sure the battery acid does not when it comes in contact with the skin. Re- cal apparatus. Risk of injury in the event of come into contact with the bodywork. Risk peated contact with diluted acids causes large sparks. of paintwork damage. skin disease (inflammation, ulcers and fis- ● Before working on the electrical system, sures). When in contact with water, acids ● Do not expose the battery to direct sun- you must switch off the engine, the ignition dilute and develop a great deal of heat. light to protect it from ultraviolet radiation. and all electrical components and discon- ● Do not tilt the battery, as acid could leak nect the cable from the negative terminal ● If the vehicle is not used for 3 or 4 weeks, out of the vapour vents. Protect your eyes (-) of the battery. To change a bulb, simply the battery could run flat. This is because with glasses or a protective helmet! Risk of switch off the corresponding light. some components use electricity even in blindness! If acid should splash into the standby mode (e.g. control units). Prevent ● Never charge a frozen or thawed out bat- eyes, rinse the affected eye immediately the battery from running flat by discon- tery. Risk of explosion and acid burns! Re- for several minutes using clean water. Then necting its negative terminal or leave it place a frozen battery. seek medical care immediately. charging at a low current. ● Never use the jump leads on batteries in ● Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin ● If you frequently use the vehicle for short which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk or clothing with soap solution as quickly as trips, the battery may not fully charge and of explosion and acid burns! possible and rinse off with plenty of water. could run flat. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a ● Never use a damaged battery. Risk of ex- doctor immediately. plosion! Replace a damaged battery immediately. ● Keep children away from the battery.

252 Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment vehicle and switch off the engine – Risk of Checking the battery electrolyte engine damage! A flat battery is particularly harmful waste level for the environment. It must therefore be disposed of according to current local law. Lifting the battery cover Note Replace a battery once it is older than 5 years.

Warning lamp

Fig. 249 Battery: electrolyte level indicator.  It lights up

Alternator fault. We recommend you have the acid level regularly checked at an official technical service, Fig. 248 Battery: opening the cover. The control lamp lights up when the ignition is particularly in the following cases. switched on. It should go out when the engine The battery is located beneath a plastic cov- ● At high outside temperatures. has started running. er in the engine compartment. ● On long daily trips. If the control lamp  lights up while driving, – Open the battery cover in the direction indi- ● Whenever the vehicle is loaded the alternator is no longer charging the bat- cated by the arrow ››› Fig. 248. ››› page 254, Charging the battery. tery. You should immediately drive to the – The positive terminal (+) of the battery is nearest specialised workshop. In vehicles equipped with a battery with col- connected in reverse order. our indicator, the so-called magic eye You should avoid using electrical equipment ››› Fig. 249 changes colour to indicate the that is not absolutely necessary because this acid level. will drain the battery. Air bubbles can influence the colour of the in- CAUTION dicator. Therefore, carefully knock the indica- Additionally, if the warning lamp  lights tor before checking the acid level. up while driving, the warning lamp  also ● Black – the acid level is correct. » lights up (cooling system fault). Stop the

253 Practical tips

● Colourless or light yellow – acid level too – Switch off the ignition and all electrical edge. Fast charges should be performed by low, battery must be changed. equipment. an official technical service.

– Only in the case of “fast charge”: discon- The battery caps should not be opened while Note nect both battery connection cables (first the battery is being charged. ● The battery acid level is also regularly the “negative” terminal and then the “posi- checked during servicing at authorised tive”). CAUTION SEAT dealers. – Connect the charger cables to the battery In vehicles fitted with the “Start-Stop” sys- ● The electrolyte level on “AGM” batteries terminals (red = “positive”, black = “nega- tem, the charger cable cannot be directly cannot be checked for technical reasons. tive”). connected to the negative terminal of the ● Vehicles equipped with the “Start-Stop” vehicle battery but must be attached to the system include a battery control unit to – Plug in the battery charger and switch on. engine ground point ›››  page 54. control the battery level for repeated en- – At the end of the charging process: turn off gine starting. and unplug the charger.

– Remove the charger cables. Disconnecting and connecting the battery Winter service – If necessary, reconnect both battery cables to the battery (first the “positive” cable, The following functions will either be inopera- At low temperatures the battery provides only then the “negative” cable). tive or will not work properly after discon- a fraction of the starting power it has at nor- necting and reconnecting the battery: mal temperatures. When charging with a low current (e.g. with a small battery charger), the battery does not A flat battery can also freeze at tempera- normally have to be disconnected. The in- Function Installation tures slightly below 0°C (+32°F). structions of the battery charger manu- Setting the clock ››› page 99 We therefore recommend you have the bat- facturer must be followed. The multifunction display tery checked and, if necessary, charged at ››› page 101 Use a current equivalent to or lower than 10% data is deleted an official SEAT technical service before the of the battery capacity to fully charge the start of winter. battery. Note Before “fast-charging” the battery however, We recommend having the vehicle checked both battery cables must be disconnected. Charging the battery by an authorised SEAT dealer to guarantee “Fast-charging” a battery is dangerous and the correct working order of all electrical systems. A fully-charged battery is essential for relia- requires a battery charger and special knowl- ble starting.

254 Wheels and tyres

Changing the battery engine is switched off, the key is turned in Wheels and tyres the ignition for a long period or the side A replacement battery must have the same lights or parking lights are switched on. The capacity, voltage, current rating and size as switching off of certain electrical compo- Tyres the original. The appropriate types of battery nents does not impair driving comfort and can be acquired from authorised SEAT deal- often the driver will not even notice. Introduction ers. We recommend having the battery changed WARNING by an authorised SEAT dealer, where the new ● During the first 500 km, new tyres do not battery will be correctly installed and the give maximum grip, therefore you should original disposed of in line with regulations. drive carefully. Risk of accident! ● Never drive with damaged tyres. Risk of accident! Automatic disconnection of elec- ● Only use wheels and tyres that been au- trical equipment thorised by SEAT or your vehicle model. Failure to do so could impair road safety. When heavily-charging a battery, the pro- Risk of accident! gramme selected by the electrical system ● Never exceed the maximum speed per- control unit prevents the battery from auto- mitted for your tyres. Risk of accident due matically discharging. This may result in the to tyre damage and loss of vehicle control! following: ● Under-inflated tyres are submitted to ● Increase in idling speed so that the alterna- greater rolling resistance. This means that they can overheat at high speeds. This can tor can supply more current to the electrical cause tread separation and even tyre system. blow-out. ● The performance of certain electrical com- ● For driving safety, tyres should be re- ponents could be limited or some may switch placed at least in pairs according to the off temporarily, e.g. the heated seats, the axle and not individually. The tyres with the heated rear window, the 12 V power socket. deepest tread should always be used on the front wheels. Note ● Never fit used tyres of an unknown age or Despite any measures taken by the control prior use. » unit, the battery could drain. e.g. with the 255 Practical tips

● Tyres must be immediately changed at ● The prescribed tightening torque for Service life of tyres the very latest when they have worn down wheel bolts on steel and alloy wheels is to the tread wear indicators. 120 Nm. ● Worn tyres reduce the necessary grip at ● Protect your tyres from coming into con- high speeds on damp surfaces. This could tact with oil, grease and fuel. lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled vehi- ● Replace any lost valve caps immediately. cle movement –“skidding” on damp surfaces). For the sake of the environment ● Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately. Under-inflated tyres increases fuel con- ● Do not use summer or winter tyres that sumption. are more than 6 or 4 years old respectively. Fig. 250 Side view of tyres with tread wear in- ● Wheel bolts should be clean and screw Note dicators. easily. However, they must never be trea- ● We recommend having all work on tyres ted with grease or oil. and wheels carried out by an authorised ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts SEAT dealer. is too low, they could loosen while the vehi- ● We recommend using wheels, tyres, hub cle is moving. Risk of accident! If the tight- caps and snow chains from the SEAT Origi- ening torque of the wheel bolts is too high, nal Accessories programme. the bolts and threads could be damaged, leading to the permanent deforming of the rim support surfaces. ● Incorrectly handled wheel bolts could lead to a wheel coming loose while the vehicle is moving. Risk of accident! ● Observe the national legal requirements regarding the use of snow tyres and chains.

CAUTION ● Where a spare wheel that is not compatible with the wheels fitted is used, follow the Fig. 251 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. instructions ››› page 259.

256 Wheels and tyres

Tread wear indicator driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con- Unusual vibration or the car pulling to one The base of the side of the original tyres on sumption may increase slightly. side may indicate that one of the tyres is your vehicle show 1.6 mm high tread wear in- damaged. Reduce speed immediately and dicators ››› Fig. 250. The position of these in- Driving style stop if you suspect that a wheel may have been damaged! Check the tyres for damage dicators is given on the tyre sidewalls by the Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard (blisters, cracks, etc.). If no external damage letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other braking all increase tyre wear. symbols. is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest Official Service and have the vehicle Wheel balancing inspected. The useful life of the tyres depends pri- The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. marily on the following factors: Various factors encountered when driving Low profile tyres can cause them to become unbalanced, Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and Tyre pressure values which results in vibration of the steering tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and Under-inflation or over-inflation will consider- wheel. a greater rim diameter along with a lower ably reduce the useful life of the tyres and im- The wheel must be rebalanced if a new tyre is height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a pair the vehicle's handling. Therefore, check fitted or if a tyre is repaired. more agile driving behaviour. However, on the tyre pressure, including the spare wheel, roads that are in poor condition, this might af- at least once a month and before any long Incorrect wheel alignment fect comfort and cause more noise. journey. Incorrect front or rear wheel alignment cau- Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- Inflation pressures for summer tyres are lis- ses excessive tyre wear, frequently on one ly than standard tyres, for instance due to ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap side, and also impairs vehicle safety. If tyre strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and ››› Fig. 251. The pressures for winter tyres are wear is very irregular, contact an Official kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) above the summer Service. pressure is particularly important values. ››› page 257. Always check the pressure when the tyre is Tyre damage To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive cold. Do not reduce over-pressure in warm To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, only with special care when driving on roads in tyres. The tyre pressures must be altered to drive over kerbs or similar obstacles slowly poor condition. suit notable changes in the load being car- and at a right angle if possible. ried. Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re- Check tyres and wheels regularly for dam- garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can age (punctures, cracks, blisters, deformities, the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded the rims. » ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When in outside of the treads.

257 Practical tips

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy Storing tyres 195 Tyre width in mm impact or have been damaged, have them When you remove the tyres, mark them in or- 55 Height/width ratio in % checked and, if required, replaced at a speci- der to maintain the same direction of rotation alised workshop. when they are installed again. R identifying tyre construction letter – Radial Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- When removed, the wheels and/or tyres ly than standard tyres. should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably 15 Rim diameter in inches dark location. Store tyres in a vertical posi- 85 Load rating code tion, if they are not fitted on wheel rims. Interchanging tyres H Speed rating code letter

New tyres or wheels The tyres are subject to the following maximum speed limits: All four wheels must be fitted only with tyres of the same type, size and the same tread Speed rating code Maximum speed lim- pattern. letter it The correct tyre/wheel combinations speci- Q 160 km/h (99 mph) fied for your vehicle are listed in its documen- R 170 km/h (106 mph) tation. S 180 km/h (112 mph) Understanding the tyre designations makes it Fig. 252 Interchanging tyres. easier to choose the correct tyres. The tyre T 190 km/h (118 mph) designation is marked on the sidewall. For ex- Changing wheels around U 200 km/h (124 mph) ample. If the wear is visibly greater on the front tyres, H 210 km/h (130 mph) 195/55 R 15 85 H they should be exchanged for the rear tyres as shown in the diagram ››› Fig. 252. All the This contains the following information: V 240 km/h (149 mph) tyres will then last for about the same time. W 270 km/h (168 mph) To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres and maintain their optimum useful life, they The manufacturing date is also indicated on should be changed around every 10 the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer 10,000 km. side of the wheel). DOT … 27 16…

258 Wheels and tyres means, for example, that the tyre was pro- Spare wheel breakdown and drive with the corresponding duced in the 27th week of 2016. care ››› . Follow the instructions ››› page 259 if you on- Spare wheel location* It must be replaced as soon as possible for ly have a temporary spare wheel. a wheel with a normal size and finish.

Note Temporary spare wheel A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary to find out whether wheels or tyres of dif- spare wheel, there will be a warning sign on ferent sizes to those originally fitted by the rim of the wheel. SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the combinations allowed between the Follow the instructions below when driving front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). with this wheel fitted. ● After fitting the wheel, the warning sign must not be covered. Tyres with directional tread pattern Fig. 253 Boot: spare wheel. ● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with the spare wheel and take great care The spare wheel is housed in a well under the while driving. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard The direction of rotation is indicated by the floor panel in the luggage compartment and braking and fast cornering. arrows on the tyre sidewall. The direction of is secured by a special bolt ››› Fig. 253. rotation indicated must be respected. This ● The tyre pressure is the same as that of the guarantees optimum grip and helps avoid ex- Take out the tool box before removing the standard tyres. spare wheel. cessive noise, wear and aquaplaning. ● Only use this spare wheel to reach the In the event of a flat tyre, a spare wheel with The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must be nearest Official Service, as it is not designed an undetermined tread pattern or an oppo- checked (preferably whenever the tyre pres- for permanent use. site tread pattern must be used and you must sure is checked – see sticker on fuel tank flap drive carefully, as in these cases the tyres no ››› page 256) to ensure the spare wheel re- WARNING mains ready for use. longer offer maximum performance. ● Under no circumstances must damaged If the spare wheel is not the same size or de- spare wheels be used. sign as the tyres that are mounted on the car ● If the spare wheel is different in size or (for example if the car has winter tyres or design to the tyres currently fitted, never tyres with direction tread), only use the spare drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid tyre for a short period of time in the event of heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. » 259 Practical tips

CAUTION ● Under certain conditions (e.g. sporty ● One wheel on the axle has been changed driving style, driving on loose surfaces or in Follow the instructions given on the tempo- winter) the warning lamp  may take a Basic system settings rary spare wheel label. while to light up or may remain switched Should the tyre pressure change or if one or off. more wheels are changed or the position of Note the wheel on the vehicle is changed, e.g. The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must Note changing round the front and rear wheels, or always correspond to the highest pressure If the battery is disconnected the warning where a warning lamp lights up when driving, prescribed for the model of vehicle in ques- lamp  lights up when the ignition is the system must be adjusted as follows: tion. switched on. This warning lamp must switch ● Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressures off after covering a short distance. ››› page 256. ● Switch the ignition on. Tyre monitoring system ● Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy Tyre pressure* Connect system with the  button and the Control lamp SETTINGS function button ›››  page 24. The tyre pressure monitoring system uses ABS sensors to compare the revolutions and the ● In vehicles without a radio: press and hold It lights up  circumference of each wheel. Should the cir- down the  button , with the ignition on, until an acoustic signal is heard. The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the cumference of any wheel change, the warn- value set by the driver ››› . ing lamp  on the general instrument panel will light up and an audible warning will be WARNING  Flashes heard. Despite the tyre pressure monitoring system, the driver remains responsible for Fault in the tyre pressure gauge. Contact a special- Tyre circumference may change if: maintaining the correct tyre pressure. You ised service to have it fixed. ● Tyre pressure is too low must therefore check the tyre pressure often. ● Tyre structure is damaged WARNING ● Vehicle load not evenly distributed ● If the warning lamp  lights up, slow Note down immediately and avoid any severe ● wheels on one axle are subjected to great- ● The tyre pressure monitoring system is braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop and er load, (e.g. driving with trailer, uphill, down- not a replacement for regularly checking check the tyres and their pressure as soon hill); the tyre pressure, as it is unable to recog- as possible. ● Snow chains are fitted nise an even drop in pressure. ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted 260 Wheels and tyres

● The tyre pressure monitoring system is will not be exceeded, even if the maximum unable to warn of a sudden drop in tyre speed limit for the vehicle is higher. pressure, e.g. a puncture. In this case, try to stop the vehicle carefully with no severe For the sake of the environment braking or steering manoeuvres. Summer tyres should be fitted again in ● To ensure the tyre pressure monitoring time, as they give better handling on roads system works correctly, the basic setting free of snow and ice and at temperatures must be performed every 10 000 km (6000 over +7°C (+45°F). Summer tyres have a miles) or once a year. shorter braking distance, produce less rolling noise and do not wear as quickly. They also reduce fuel consumption. Winter service

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will significantly improve handling of the vehicle in winter road conditions. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip at temperatures below +7°C (+45°F), on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or high speed tyres (code letters H or V on the sidewall). In order to preserve the performance of the vehicle as much as possible, winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels, the minimum depth of the tread must be 4 mm and the maximum age must be 4 years. You can use winter tyres of a lower speed rating if the maximum speed limit of these tyres

261 Maintenance

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- authorised service or specialised workshop alised workshop. Service documents the following information: CAUTION ● When each one of the services was carried Service intervals out. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of ● Whether a specific repair has been sugges- lack of availability of spare parts. Servicing and Digital Maintenance ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near Plan future. Note ● If you have expressed a special request for Log of services performed (“Digital Main- the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will Regular services on the vehicle not only tenance Plan”) write the work order. maintain its value, but also its correct operation and road safety. For this reason, con- The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- ● The components or fluids that were shop records Service receipts in a central duct the services in accordance with SEAT changed. guidelines. system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- ● The date of the next service. mentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service the next inspection. This information is docu- Fixed Service or Flexible Service receipt after every service carried out con- mented in all checks performed. taining all the services carried out on the sys- Services are classified as oil change service tem. The type and the volume of the service may and inspection. The service interval display vary from one vehicle to another. A special- on the instrument panel display serves as a Whenever there is a new service the receipt is ised workshop will be able to provide specific reminder of the next service. replaced with a current one. information on the jobs for your vehicle. Depending on the features, the engine and The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- the conditions of use of the car, either the able in some markets. In this case, your WARNING Fixed service or the Flexible service will be SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- If the services are insufficient or not per- applied for an oil change service.. rent documentation of the work. formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised How to know which type of service needs in traffic cause an accident and severe in- to his vehicle juries. ● Check the tables below:

262 Service

Oil change servicea) you have to carry out this service, take into If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- account the individual conditions of use and verse conditions of use, some of the work Type of personal driving style. A major component of must be carried out before the next service PR No. Service interval service the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- period or even between service intervals. stead of conventional engine oil. Every 5000 km or after Conditions of use adverse include: QI1 1 yearb) Bear in mind the information about the specifications of the engine oil according to the ● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Every 7500 km or after QI2 VW standard page 42. ● Frequent short trips. 1 yearb) ›››  Fixed If you do not want to the flexible service ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of Every 10000 km or after QI3 time, as in the case of taxis. 1 yearb) you can select the fixed service However, a fixed service may affect service costs ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Every 15000 km or after QI4 The Service Advisor will gladly advise you. 1 yearb) ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment). According to the service in- Service intervals display QI6 Flexible ● terval display Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). a) ted by the service interval display on the in- The data are based on normal conditions of use. ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter. strument panel  page 33 or in the Ve- b) Whatever happens first. ››› hicle settings menu of the infotainment This applies especially for the following system  page 24. The service interval Inspection Servicea) ››› parts (depending on equipment): display gives information for service dates According to the service interval display that involve an engine oil change or an in- ● Dust and pollen filter spection. When the time for the correspond- a) ● Air Care allergen filter The data are based on normal conditions of use. ing service comes, additional work required, ● Air filter Bear in mind the information about the speci- such as the change of brake fluid and the fications of the engine oil according to the spark plugs, can be carried out. ● Toothed chain VW standard ›››  page 42. ● Particulate filter ● Engine oil Particular characteristics of the Flexible Information on the conditions of Service use The Service Advisor of your specialised Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil workshop will gladly inform you about the change service only has to be performed The service intervals and groups are usually need of performing service work between » when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when based on normal conditions of use.

263 Maintenance

normal service intervals, always considering Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- These parts are, approved parts, and are the the conditions of use of your vehicle. opment of components) the sets of services same as the factory parts, which are also ap- may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or proved spare parts. WARNING specialised workshop is always receiving up- If the services are insufficient or not per- dates in time. formed and if the service intervals are not Original accessories observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe We recommend you only use SEAT Original injuries. Additional service offers Accessories and SEAT approved accessories ● Have the services conducted at author- for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and ised SEAT services or specialised work- Approved spare parts suitability of these accessories have been in- shops. spected specifically for this type of vehicle. Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and ceived for their vehicles and approved by suitability of parts from other manufacturers. CAUTION SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage These parts correspond exactly to the manu- to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of facturer's requirements in terms of design, SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT lack of availability of spare parts. accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been Service Mobility) conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this Since the moment you purchase your SEAT Sets of services reason, we always recommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service. Sets of services include all the maintenance held liable for the safety and suitability of works needed to ensure the safety and the parts from other manufacturers. For the first two years after the purchase, smooth running of the vehicle (depending on your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- the conditions of use and the features of ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or Approved spare parts ditional costs. operating fluids). Maintenance services are If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- Approved spare parts, following the manu- divided into inspection and review services. od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as facturer's requirements, are an additional Consult the details of the jobs required for you carry out the recommended Inspection service to you, offering the possibility of re- your vehicle at: and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- placing complete sets, such as: light engine, ised Service. ● Your SEAT authorised service gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical ● Your specialised workshop components, etc. 264 Vehicle maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a Vehicle maintenance Washing the vehicle fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving. The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Maintenance and cleaning or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the Service differs depending on the country in more damage it can cause to the surface. which the vehicle was purchased. For further Basic considerations High temperatures, for instance strong sun- information ask your SEAT dealership or the light, further intensify the damage. SEAT website in your country. Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may Before washing the car, soften the dirt using become a prerequisite to demand the war- plenty of water. ranty in the event of corrosion damage and Warranty deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird work. droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth. Fault-free operation warranty Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect for application on the packaging. ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter. condition of new vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or complementary addi- WARNING High pressure cleaners tional documentation provided by your Tech- ● When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- nical Service to see the conditions and the Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- health if misused. structions for the equipment. This applies mation in this regard in your SEAT Official particularly to the operating pressure and the Service. ● Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger distance between the spraying water. Do not of poisoning! aim the jet directly to the side window gas- kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- For the sake of the environment ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or ● When purchasing car care products, camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least chose products that are compatible with 40 cm. the environment. Do not remove snow and ice with a high- ● The waste from car-care products should pressure cleaner. » not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

265 Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To view mirrors must always be folded/de- in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do ployed electrically! jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job! 60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household bre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Automatic car wash tunnels Risk of damaging the surface! Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint: wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of Make sure that the windows and the panor- damaging the surface! WARNING amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen – Never select washing programs that in- wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint. especially if your vehicle has detachable tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them ● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint. Use of car washes without brushes if possible. side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment Washing by hand cut! The car should only be washed in special Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a ● After cleaning the brakes could act more wash bays. These places are prepared to soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice prevent oily water from getting into the ing products that do not contain solvents. on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- public drains. dent! In this case the brakes should be Washing vehicles with a matte paint by dried by pressing the brake pedal several hand times. Cleaning and maintenance instruc- To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and CAUTION tions dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- The cleaning and maintenance of individual fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner matic car wash, please make sure to re- components of the vehicle can be checked in for matte paint. tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them the following tables. The contents should be from being damaged. Electric exterior rear- understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have 266 Vehicle maintenance special questions or parts that are not listed. Wheels Problem Solution Take he general considerations into account Problem Solution Have your specialised work- ››› in Take special care with... on Corrosion page 270. Anti frost salt Water shop take care of this

Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning The water does dust product not create drop- Maintain with hard wax (at Exterior cleaning lets on the clean least 2 times a year) paint End exhausts Windscreen wipers Treat with suitable wax and ap- Problem Solution Problem Solution No shine de- ply paint preservative after- Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- spite sober main- wards if the wax used does not Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required tenance/paint contain preservative ingredi- ents

Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims Tanks, e.g. insect Immediately soften with water remains, bird Problem Solution and remove with a microfibre Problem Solution droppings, tree cloth sap, road salt Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a a) solution steel cleaning product is re- Fat-based dirt, Delete immediately with a neu- quired e.g. cosmetic a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in tral soap solutiona) and a soft products or 1 litre of water a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in cloth sunscreen 1 litre of water Sensors / Camera lenses a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Paint Problem Solution 1 litre of water Problem Solution Sensors: soft cloth with clean- Carbon fibre parts ing product which does not Check the paint's colour code Problem Solution contain solvents Flaws in the paint in an authorised service and re- Dirt Camera lenses - soft cloth with store with a touch-up pencil Dirt Clean the same way as pain- cleaning product with no alco- ted parts ››› page 265 » hol content Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Hand brush/Anti frost spray Apply rust remover and then Snow/ice with no solvents Environmental rust apply hard wax. Go you your tank specialised workshop if you have any queries

267 Maintenance

Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution Grease-based Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal dirt, e.g. oil, make- Absorb the dissolved grease solutiona) display cleaner up, etc. and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you a) must treat it with water after- Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Control panels 1 litre of water wards Problem Solution Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with pens, nail polish, an absorbent cloth, if applica- Interior cleaning neutral soap solutiona) dispersion paint, ble, apply neutral soap solution shoe cream etc. afterwardsa) Windows a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water Problem Solution 1 litre of water Seat belts Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Natural leather Problem Solution then dry with a cloth Problem Solution a) Covers / Trims Dirt Neutral soap solution , allowed to dry before retracting Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona) Problem Solution a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth a) 1 litre of water Dirt Neutral soap solution e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: leather cleaner blood etc. a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather 1 litre of water Problem Solution Grease-based Recent stains: absorbent cloth dirt, e.g. oil, make- and leather cleaner Plastic parts Dirt particles ad- Vacuum cleaner up, etc. Dry stains: grease dissolving Problem Solution hered to the sur- spray face Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for Dirt Damp cloth Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral pens, nail polish, leather Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) dispersion paint, sible solvent-free plastic clean- blood etc. shoe cream etc. er

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water 268 Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice moved through friction. Risk of damaging the Care Apply preservative cream regu- or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of paint job! larly to protect from sunlight. cracking the lens! ● Use a colour preservative if re- Remove cosmetic products and sunlight quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! sive cleaning products or products with alco- a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel 1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of ● Remove snow and ice from windows and scratches! Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To ● Make sure that the instrument panel is Dirt Clean like plastic parts avoid scratches, the scraper should only be switched off and cooled down before clean- pushed in one direction and not moved to ing. and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the Take special care with... ● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age! Risk of cracks on the windows! Headlights/tail lights Control panels ● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with ● To prevent damage to the heating of the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- a dry cloth or sponge. rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage! ● Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts ● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Wheels based cleaning agents. ● Seat belts and their components must nev- ● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive er be cleaned with chemical products, nor products. Paint should they be allowed to come into contact ● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of ask your specialised workshop to replace the damaging the paint job! belt in question. »

269 Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- longed period in the bright sun, it is best to er cover the leather. ● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara leather with leather cleaning products, sol- WARNING vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers Do not use water-repellent coatings on the or similar products. windscreen. In bad visibility conditions ● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the such as humid weather, darkness or when vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may removed there. This will prevent damage. be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard blades to make noise. sponges, etc. to clean. ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the Note seats. ● Remains of insects can be removed much ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- more easily with previously treated paint. ets or belts can damage the surface. ● Regular car care treatments can prevent ● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage deposits of ambient rust. the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Natural leather Remove the vehicle from traffic ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, If you want to leave your vehicle stationary spot removers or similar products on leather. for a long period of time, contact a qualified ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. sponges, etc. to clean. Also take into account instructions regarding ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the the vehicle's battery ››› page 251. seats. ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

270 Information for the user

Information for the user The full text of the EU compliance declaration Features of the Name of the device is available online at the following address: vehicle according to the declaration of compli- Information for the user www.seat.com/generalinfo  ance Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit Important information Table of correspondences A580 / A270 Keyless Access Sys- MQB-B B Recycling of electrical or electron- The table of correspondences will help you to tem ic devices associate the name of the device in the declaration of compliance with the features of Radar sensors for as- ARS4-B All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that the vehicle and the terminology used in the sistance systems MRRevo14F are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must on-board documentation. be marked with the following symbol: BSD3.0 Features of the Name of the device Central control unit 5WK50254  vehicle according to the dec- This symbol indicates that EED must not be laration of compli- 5WK50474 discarded as home waste but through selec- ance Infotainment system MIB2 Entry tive waste collection. Radiofrequency re- FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477, mote control (vehicle) FS94 MIB Standard 2

Radio frequency re- Sender STH SEAT - MIB2 Main-Unit mote control (auxili- 50000914 Information about the EU Di- A580 / A270 ary heater) Telestart rective 2014/53/EU Wireless charging WCH-183 Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW Simplified EU compliance declara- WCH-185 Telestart tion 5G0.980.611 Bluetooth MIB2 Entry Connection to the ex- UMTS/GSM-MMC Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- MIB Standard 2 ternal antenna of the ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- car UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2 » clare that they comply with Directive MIB2 Main-Unit 2014/53/EU when legally required. A580 / A270 271 Information for the user

Features of the Name of the device Addresses of the manufacturers vehicle according to the declaration of compli- According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all ance relevant components must include the address of the manufacturer. Instrument panel eNSF The address of the manufacturers of compo- Immobilizer integrated in nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot dashboard module include a sticker are listed below, as long as it instrument cluster is legally required: Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base Radioelectrical Addresses of the Antennas MQB27 Small/Big equipment fitted family manufacturers in the vehicle Antennas KSA Small Fam III Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. 5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna Radiofrequency remote Rixbecker Straße 75 control key 59552 Lippstadt, GNSS Antenna VAG GERMANY 720166002 Digades gmbH 8S7.035.503.B Äußere Weberstraße 20 02763 Zittau, GERMANY Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225 Radio frequency re- 6F9.035.225 mote control (auxiliary Webasto Thermo & 3V5.035.577.A heater) Comfort SE 7N0.035.552.J Friedrichshafener Str. 9 7N0.035.552.K 82205 Gilching, GERMANY 7N0.035.552.Q 5F4.035.225 ADC Automotive Distance 5F4.035.225.A Control Systems GmbH 5F4.035.225.B Peter-Dornier-Straße 10 5F9.035.225 Radar sensors for as- 88131 Lindau, GERMANY 5F9.035.225.A sistance systems 5F9.035.225.B Robert Bosch GmbH 575.035.225 Postfach 16 61 575.035.225.A 71226 Leonberg, 575.035.225.B GERMANY

272 Information for the user

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) All SEAT models 868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra Auxiliary heating 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm Bluethooth All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm Connection to the external antenna of the car Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra 76 GHz-77 GHz Radar sensors for assistance systems 35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca » 273 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

274 Technical specifications Technical data Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- Chassis number fications section The VIN is located in the Easy Connect and kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. under the windscreen, on the driver side Technical specifications ››› Fig. 254. Additionally, the chassis number Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly PS is located in the engine compartment, on the used to denote engine power. Important information right-hand side. The number is engraved on rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed. the top side rail, and is partially covered.

Important Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. Type plate Cetane number, indication of the die- CZ The model plate is located at the bottom of The information in the vehicle documentation sel combustion power. always takes precedence over the informa- the B pillar, between the front and rear doors, Research octane number, indication of on the right-hand side. tion in this Instruction Manual. RON the knock resistance of petrol. All technical specifications provided in this The type plate indicates the following documentation are valid for the standard weights: model in Spain. Vehicle identification data ● Total permitted weight of the vehicle when The figures may be different depending loaded whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif- ● Maximum authorised weight of the vehicle ferent models, for special vehicles and for with a trailer, when the vehicle operates as a other countries. tractor ● Maximum permitted load of the front axle ● Maximum permitted load of the rear axle

Weight in running order The weight in running order only has one approximate value. This value corresponds to Fig. 254 Chassis number. the minimum operative weight of the vehicle without additional equipment that increases VIN in the Easy Connect its weight, i.e. air conditioning, spare wheel, towing bracket. » ● Select:  button > function button SET- TINGS > Service > Chassis number.

275 Technical data

The running order weight also includes 75 kg WARNING tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- of the weight of the driver and service fluids, cle at the time of purchase. in addition to a fuel tank at 90% capacity. The maximum permitted weight values must not be exceeded – Risk of an accident Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- From the difference between the total permit- and damage to the vehicle! pend on the equipment/features of each indi- ted weight in running order the approximate vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, carrying capacity can be calculated ››› . Note road conditions, traffic conditions, environmental conditions, load or number of passen- The carrying capacity must include: ● If you wish to calculate the exact weight gers. ● occupants, of your vehicle please contact a SEAT dealer. ● all pieces of equipment and other weights, Note ● Depending on the volume of equipment, In practice, and considering all the factors ● roof loads including the roof rack, driving style, road conditions, weather con- mentioned here, consumption values can ● ditions and the condition of the vehicle, equipment that is not included in the run- differ from those calculated in the current consumption values can differ from the ning order weight, European regulations. theoretical values stated here. ● when using the towing bracket, the drawbar load (max. 50 kg). Weights Calculating fuel consumption and CO2 Information on fuel con- emissions according to the ECE regula- Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a tions and the EU specifications sumption fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without Calculation of fuel consumption for urban optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 driving begins when cold-starting the engine. Fuel consumption kg to allow for the weight of the driver. Then, normal city driving is simulated. Approved consumption values are derived Special versions, optional equipment fittings In calculating extra-urban driving fuel con- from measurements performed or supervised or retro-fitting accessories will increase the sumption, braking and acceleration is done in by certified EU laboratories, according to the weight of the vehicle ››› . all gears, as in daily use of the vehicle. Driving legislation in force at the time (for more infor- speed varies within a range of 0 and 120 mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- WARNING km/h (75 mph). ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- ● Please note that the centre of gravity The consumption value in combined driving is ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and may shift when transporting heavy objects; composed of 37% of the value of urban driv- apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Always adjust your speed ing and 63% of the value of extra-urban driv- The values relating to fuel consumption and ing. CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- 276 Technical specifications

and driving style to suit road conditions In the interest of road safety, we recommend Wheels and requirements. that you always tow approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trail- ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rat- er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar Tyre pressure, snow chains and ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the wheel bolts permissible axle load or the permissible to- load is too small. tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac- If the maximum permissible drawbar load Tyre pressure teristics of the vehicle may change, which cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and could lead to accidents, injuries and dam- light-weight single axle trailers or tandem The sticker with the tyre pressure values can age to the vehicle. axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer The tyre pressure values given there are for weight is legally required for the drawbar cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres ››› . Driving with a trailer load. The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar WARNING (2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer Trailer weights ● For safety reasons, you should not drive tyres. at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when Trailer weight towing a trailer. This also applies in coun- Snow chains The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- tries where higher speeds are permitted. Snow chains may be fitted only to the front proved are selected in intensive trials accord- ● Never exceed the maximum trailer wheels. ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- weights or the drawbar load. If the permis- proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in sible axle load or the permissible total Consult the section “wheels” of this manual. the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 weight is exceeded, the driving character- mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 istics of the vehicle may change, leading to Wheel bolts km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi- After the wheels have been changed, the in other countries. All data in the official vehicle. tightening torque of the wheel bolts should cle documentation takes precedence over be checked as soon as possible with a torque these data at all times ››› . wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. Drawbar loads The maximum permitted drawbar load on the WARNING ball coupling of the towing bracket must not ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per exceed 50 kg. month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or » 277 Technical data

too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds. ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note We recommend that you ask your Techni- cal Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

278 Technical specifications

Engine data

Petrol engines

1.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 81 (110)/5,000-5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1,500-3,500 200/2,000-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 3/999

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 189 (4) 204 (5) 206 (6)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 6.7 6.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.1 9.9 10.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,630 1,650 1,675

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,170 1,190 1,215

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) a) a) a)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) a) a) a)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580 590 600

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,200 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,100 1,000 a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

279 Technical data

Petrol engines

1.4 TSI Start-Stop 1.4 TSI Ecomotive 1.6 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 92 (125)/5,000-6,000 92 (125)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000 200/1,400-4,000 155/3,800-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,395 4/1,395 4/1,598

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox DSG DSG manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 208 (6) 208 (6) 191 (5) 191 (6)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.3 6.4 6.7 7.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9 9 10.3 11.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,696 1,687 1,635 1,675

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,236 1,227 1,175 1,215

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 880 880 820 860

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 830 830 840 840

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 610 580 600

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,100 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,000 1,000

280 Technical specifications

Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 255 Dimensions.

TOLEDO

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 876/1,004

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,602

D Length (mm) 4,482

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,463/1,500

G Width (mm) 1,715

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,466

Turning radius (m) 10.2 a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. 281

Index

introduction ...... 146 cruise speed ...... 217 Index operation ...... 149 EDL ...... 203 Alarm system ...... 116 emergency braking assistance (Front As- A Alcantara leather: cleaning ...... 268 sist) ...... 219 ABS Alternator fatigue detection ...... 230 control lamp ...... 202 warning lamp ...... 253 parking aid ...... 222, 224 see also Anti-lock brake system ...... 201, 202 Ambient lighting ...... 127 Start-Stop ...... 215 Accessories ...... 138, 240 Anchoring tyre monitoring system ...... 260 Adjust the front tow line...... 82 Assisted starting ...... 54 CAR menu ...... 24 Android Auto™ ...... 167, 169 Audible warning signal Adjusting Anti-block system ...... 201 control and warning lamps ...... 103 front head restraints ...... 61 Anti-freeze ...... 43 unfastened safety belt ...... 63 seats ...... 58 Anti-lock brake system ...... 202 Automatic air conditioning Adjusting the head restraints Anti-puncture ...... 47, 79 climatronic ...... 151 front head restraints ...... 132 Anti-puncture kit ...... 47, 79 Automatic car wash tunnel ...... 266 Adjustment check after 10 minutes ...... 81 Automatic dipped beam control ...... 123 front head restraints ...... 132 Anti-slip regulation ...... 202 Automatic gearbox lights ...... 121 Anti-theft alarm ...... 116 driving programmes ...... 207 rear head restraints ...... 62 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow emergency program ...... 207 Airbag covers ...... 16 protection ...... 117 instructions for use ...... 203 Airbags ...... 68 Anti-theft security system ...... 11 kick-down ...... 205 Airbag system ...... 16, 68 Anti-theft system ...... 112 manual release of the selector lever ...... 36 activation ...... 70 Anti-tow protection ...... 117 parking ...... 204 control lamp ...... 73 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 167, 169 selector lever lock ...... 206 deactivation of front airbag ...... 72, 73 Armrests selector lever positions ...... 205 description ...... 69 front seats ...... 133 starting ...... 204 front airbags ...... 16, 70 rear seats ...... 134 stopping ...... 204 functioning ...... 70 Ashtrays ...... 138 tiptronic ...... 203, 206 head-protection airbags ...... 18, 71 Aspects to note before setting off ...... 57 Automatic transmission side airbags ...... 18, 71 ASR control lamp ...... 204 Air conditioning ...... 37, 38 control lamp ...... 202 AUX-IN ...... 195 air vents ...... 147 see also Traction control system . . . . . 201, 202 external audio source ...... 176 economic use ...... 147 Assistance systems faults ...... 147 ABS ...... 202 ASR ...... 202 283 Index

B Central locking ...... 108 Checking levels anti-theft alarm ...... 116 engine compartment ...... 246 Back seat central locking button ...... 113 Child-proof locking ...... 116 folding down and raising the back seat closing ...... 112 electric windows ...... 119 backrest ...... 134 individualised settings ...... 111 Child seat ...... 19, 76 Ball coupling keyless Access ...... 113 Child seats disassembly ...... 238 locking ...... 112 categorisation into groups ...... 76 Battery ...... 110 locking manually ...... 12 ISOFIX system ...... 20 Before setting off ...... 57 opening ...... 111 safety instructions ...... 19, 75 Belt tightening ...... 67 unlocking ...... 111 securing with the seat belt ...... 19 Biodiesel ...... 244 Central locking system ...... 110 Top Tether system ...... 20 Bluetooth® Cetane number (diesel fuel) ...... 244 Cigarette lighter ...... 137 connect audio source ...... 176 Changing a wheel ...... 48, 78 Cleaning Bonnet ...... 244, 246 subsequent work ...... 51 Alcantara leather ...... 268 opening the bonnet ...... 13 Changing bulbs ...... 86 carbon fibre ...... 267, 269 Brake assist ...... 201 daytime driving light ...... 89 control panels ...... 268 Brake fluid ...... 43 dipped beam ...... 88 decorative sheets ...... 268 checking ...... 250 double headlight bulbs ...... 87 exhaust tail pipes ...... 267 Brakes fog light ...... 90 exterior ...... 267 brake fluid ...... 250 main beam headlight ...... 88 fabrics ...... 268 control lamp ...... 200 side light ...... 88 headlights / tail lights ...... 267 handbrake ...... 200 turn signal ...... 89 high pressure cleaners ...... 265 running in ...... 210 Changing bulbs on the number plate ...... 94 Interior ...... 268 Brake servo ...... 200 removing the bulb holder ...... 94 leather ...... 268 Braking Changing bulbs on the side panel ...... 91 paint ...... 267 brake assist ...... 201 fitting the rear light ...... 92 plastic parts ...... 268 Bulb failure removing the bulb holder ...... 91 seat belts ...... 268 control lamp ...... 120 removing the rear light ...... 90 sensors/camera lenses ...... 267 Changing lights on the side panel ...... 90 special care ...... 269 C Changing rear lights on the rear lid the radio screen ...... 268 Capacities ...... 41 changing bulbs ...... 93 trims/covers ...... 267, 268 Carrier system ...... 145 fitting the bulb-holder ...... 93 washing the vehicle ...... 265 Catalytic converter ...... 213 removing the bulb holder ...... 92 wheels ...... 267 malfunction ...... 213 Charging the battery ...... 54 windows ...... 268 CCS ...... 34, 217 windscreen wipers ...... 267 284 Index

Climatronic ...... 37 disabling airbag ...... 72 Correct sitting position adjusting the temperature ...... 152 EDS ...... 201 driver ...... 58 air recirculation ...... 152 emission control ...... 213 front passenger ...... 59 automatic mode ...... 152 engine management ...... 213 rear seat passengers ...... 60 blower selection ...... 152 engine oil ...... 247 Cruise control ...... 34, 217 windscreen defrost ...... 153 ESC ...... 201 control and warning lamps ...... 217 Close ...... 108 fuel level ...... 102 operation ...... 217 Closing gearbox malfunctions ...... 207 temporary deactivation ...... 218 central locking ...... 112 handbrake ...... 201 turning off the cruise control system ...... 218 vehicle with Keyless Access ...... 113 instrument panel ...... 34 windows ...... 119 lights ...... 120 D Coat hooks ...... 140 particulate filter ...... 213 Damage to the vehicle ...... 215 Coming Home and Leaving Home ...... 124 power steering ...... 209 Dash panel ...... 34 Coming Home and Leaving Home Function . . 124 seat belt ...... 63 Data transfer ...... 163 Communication between the Infotainment Start-Stop ...... 215 Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 17 system and mobile devices ...... 163 transmission ...... 204 Deactivation of front airbag ...... 72, 73 Compartments ...... 135 tyre pressure ...... 260 Defective bulbs Connectivity ...... 163 tyres ...... 260 changing bulbs ...... 86 Full Link ...... 163 windscreen washer fluid level ...... 128 Defrosting rear window ...... 127 Control and warning lamps ...... 34, 103 Controls and displays Diesel ABS ...... 202 general instrument panel ...... 97 engine oil ...... 247 ABS anti-blocking system ...... 201 Controls for the windows ...... 14, 119 particulate filter ...... 214 airbags ...... 73 Controls on the steering wheel Preheating ...... 196 alternator ...... 253 without voice control ...... 106 refuelling ...... 244 ASR ...... 201, 202 with voice control ...... 104 Diesel fuel audible warning signal ...... 103 Coolant level particulate filter ...... 214 blocking of the steering column ...... 209 control lamp ...... 248 Digital clock ...... 100 brakes ...... 200 Coolant temperature Dimensions ...... 281 break recommendation ...... 231 control lamp ...... 248 Direction of rotation coolant ...... 248 Cooling tyres ...... 51 coolant temperature ...... 101 coolant temperature gauge ...... 101 Display ...... 98, 99 cruise control system (CCS) ...... 217 Cooling system Disposal deactivating the airbag ...... 17 checking coolant ...... 248 belt tensioners ...... 68 depress the brake ...... 219 topping up coolant ...... 248 Door cylinder ...... 11 diesel preheating system ...... 213 Correct position ...... 58 Door handle ...... 11 285 Index

Door lock ...... 11 Electronic immobiliser ...... 11 Engine and ignition Doors Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 201 starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . 197 child-proof locking ...... 116 Emergencies ...... 78 Engine breakdown opening and closing ...... 11 automatic gearbox emergency program . . 207 Control lamp ...... 213 Drink holder bulbs ...... 46 Engine compartment ...... 244, 246 centre console ...... 137 changing a wheel ...... 48, 78 battery ...... 251 rear seat armrest ...... 137 emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 52 brake fluid ...... 250 Driver hazard warning lights ...... 125 coolant ...... 248 see Correct sitting position ...... 58, 59, 60 jump leads ...... 54 engine oil ...... 247, 248 Driver information system puncture ...... 46 opening the bonnet ...... 13 operation through the windscreen wiper replacing a blown fuse ...... 45 safety notes ...... 244 lever ...... 27 Emergency windscreen washer fluid ...... 251 Driving fuses ...... 45 Engine coolant ...... 43 driving abroad ...... 125 Emergency braking assistance system checking level ...... 248 economical ...... 211 indications on the display ...... 219 G12 plus-plus ...... 43 safe ...... 57 malfunction ...... 220 G13 ...... 43 Driving abroad operating ...... 221 specifications ...... 43 headlights ...... 125 radar sensor ...... 220 topping up ...... 249 Driving data switching off temporarily ...... 222 Engine data ...... 279 data summary ...... 29 system limitations ...... 222 Engine identification letter ...... 275 memory ...... 28 Emergency operation Engine management ...... 213 Driving through water ...... 214 front passenger door ...... 12 control lamp ...... 213 Driving with a trailer ...... 232, 277 Selector lever ...... 36 Engine oil ...... 42, 247 Dynamic headlight range control ...... 121 Emission control system changing ...... 247, 248 control lamp ...... 213 checking oil level ...... 248 E Emissions data ...... 276 consumption ...... 248 E10 Engine dipstick ...... 248 see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 244 assisted starting ...... 54 inspection service ...... 247 Easy Connect ...... 24 preheating ...... 196 maintenance intervals ...... 247 EDL run-in ...... 210 oil properties ...... 42 see Electronic differential lock ...... 201, 203 Start-Stop System ...... 215 specifications ...... 247 Efficiency program starting ...... 196 topping up ...... 248 saving tips ...... 32 starting the engine ...... 198 Engine oil pressure Electric windows ...... 14, 119 switching off the engine ...... 199 control lamp ...... 247 Electronic differential lock ...... 201, 203 286 Index

Environment Fog lights with cornering light function ...... 124 Fuses ...... 83 ecological driving ...... 211 Frequency band identifying blown fuses ...... 45 environmental compatibility ...... 210 AM ...... 171 identifying by colours ...... 45 Environmental tips change ...... 171 in the dash panel ...... 84 refuelling ...... 241 DAB ...... 171 in the engine compartment ...... 85 Equipment ...... 138, 240 FM ...... 171 in the instrument panel ...... 45 ESC Front airbags ...... 16, 70 preparation before replacing ...... 45 electronic stability control ...... 201 Front Assist replacing ...... 45 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 244 indications on the display ...... 219 Exhaust filtering system Front passenger front airbag G catalytic converter ...... 213 control lamp ...... 73 Gauge particulate filter ...... 214 deactivating ...... 17 fuel level ...... 102 Extending deactivation ...... 73 Gear-change indicator ...... 208 the luggage compartment ...... 134 Front seats ...... 131 Gearbox lever ...... 36 Exterior lighting heating ...... 132 Gear change ...... 36 changing bulbs ...... 86 manual adjustment ...... 14 automatic ...... 36 Exterior mirrors Fuel ...... 41, 241 engaging the gears (manual gearbox) . . . . 203 adjustment ...... 15 diesel ...... 244 manual ...... 36 exterior ...... 130 ethanol ...... 244 manual gearbox ...... 203 heated ...... 130 fuel level gauge ...... 102 Gear engaged ...... 36 Exterior view ...... 7, 8 identification ...... 242 Gear recommendation ...... 208 External aerial ...... 241 petrol ...... 243 General instrument panel refuelling ...... 241 control and warning lamps ...... 34 F saving ...... 211 controls and displays ...... 97 Fabrics: cleaning ...... 268 Fuel consumption GRA Fastening rings ...... 141 engine cut-off due to inertia ...... 211 see Cruise control ...... 217 Fatigue detection ...... 230 Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 213 Filling up the tank ...... 241 Fuel tank flap H Fire extinguisher ...... 78 opening and closing ...... 41 Handbrake ...... 199, 200 First-aid kit ...... 78 Full-LED Headlights ...... 86 control lamp ...... 201 Floor mats ...... 62 Full Link ...... 163 Hazard warning lights ...... 22, 125 Fluid level control ...... 41 pairing ...... 167 HBA ...... 201 Fog setup ...... 167 Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . 65 lights with cornering light function ...... 124 Function buttons ...... 159 Fog light bulb ...... 90 287 Index

Head-protection airbags Indications on the display ...... 99 general panel ...... 157 description ...... 18 assistance systems submenu ...... 30 Images main menu ...... 177 safety instructions ...... 71 compass ...... 100 infotainment knobs ...... 158 Headlight range control ...... 121 distance travelled ...... 99 initial configuration ...... 162 Headlights doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 31 Media mode ...... 172 driving abroad ...... 125 driving data ...... 28 memory buttons ...... 172 Headlight washers ...... 130 ECO ...... 100 mute ...... 159 Head restraints ...... 14 Emergency braking assistance system navigation ...... 178 adjustment ...... 132 (Front Assist) ...... 219 proximity sensors ...... 162 front head restraints ...... 61 identifying letters of the engine ...... 100 Radio mode ...... 171 rear head restraints ...... 62 recommended gear ...... 100 rotary knobs ...... 158 Headrests ...... 14 second speed display ...... 100 safety instructions ...... 154 adjustment ...... 132 selector lever position ...... 100, 205 scroll knob ...... 160 front ...... 61 service intervals ...... 33 scroll (display) ...... 160 Heated rear window ...... 127 speed warning ...... 100 search in lists ...... 160 Heating ...... 148 Start-Stop ...... 100 standby ...... 158 air recirculation ...... 148 time ...... 100 station logos ...... 172 introduction ...... 146 warning and information messages ...... 32 switch on and off ...... 158 rear window ...... 127 Indications on the screen Telephone mode ...... 189 Heating and fresh air ...... 39 Outside temperature ...... 100 touchscreen ...... 159 HHC ...... 201 Infotainment knobs ...... 158 USB ...... 175 Hill hold control ...... 201 Infotainment system ...... 24 Vehicle menu ...... 188 Horn ...... 97 CD player ...... 175 verification boxes ...... 159 How to jump start ...... 54 function buttons ...... 159 Inspection ...... 247, 262 description ...... 54 general instructions for use ...... 158 Inspection service ...... 247 general panel of the device ...... 156 Instrument panel ...... 98 I input mask ...... 161 control and warning lamps ...... 103 Identification of the fuel ...... 242 memory card ...... 175 display ...... 98, 99 Ignition ...... 20, 196, 197 on-screen keypad ...... 161 instruments ...... 98 Ignition lock ...... 20, 196, 197 text input ...... 161 odometer ...... 101 Immobiliser ...... 197 update navigation data ...... 179 service interval indication ...... 33 Incorrect position ...... 60 Infotainment System ...... 154 Instruments ...... 98 indications on the display AUX-IN ...... 176 Interference from a mobile telephone ...... 158 driver information system ...... 27 Bluetooth® audio ...... 176 Interior changing the volume ...... 159 lighting ...... 126 288 Index

Interior lights ...... 22 L Loading the vehicle ...... 141 Interior view luggage compartment ...... 12 Lever left-hand drive ...... 9 Locking main beam headlights ...... 122 steering wheel on the right ...... 10 central locking ...... 112 turn signals ...... 122 ISOFIX ...... 20 remote control ...... 108 Lifting the vehicle ...... 50 ISOFIX system ...... 20 Locking and unlocking Lighting of the instrument panel ...... 121 in the door cylinder ...... 11 Lights ...... 21, 120 J with Keyless Access ...... 113 AUTO ...... 123 Jack ...... 48, 78 with the central locking button ...... 113 changing bulbs ...... 86 mounting points ...... 50 Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 12 coming home and Leaving Home ...... 124 Journey data ...... 27 Luggage compartment ...... 12 control and warning lamps ...... 120 Jump leads ...... 54 automatic locking ...... 118 cornering light ...... 124 category N1 vehicles ...... 143 daytime running lights ...... 122 K hook ...... 143 dipped beam ...... 121 light ...... 127 Key-operated switch ...... 73 fog lights ...... 124 manual release mechanism ...... 12 Keyless Access glove box ...... 127 opening and closing ...... 117 go ...... 197 hazard warning lights ...... 22 retaining elements ...... 143 keyless-Entry ...... 114 headlight flasher ...... 123 retaining nets ...... 143 keyless-Exit ...... 114 headlight range control ...... 121 shelf ...... 144 Keyless-Go ...... 114 interior lights ...... 126, 127 special characteristics ...... 115 lighting of the controls ...... 121 M starter button ...... 197 lighting of the instruments ...... 121 Maintenance unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 113 light switch ...... 120 see Service ...... 262 Keyless Access lock and ignition system: luggage compartment ...... 127 Maintenance intervals ...... 247 see Keyless Access ...... 113 main beam headlights ...... 122 Malfunction Keys main beams ...... 21 catalytic converter ...... 213 remote control ...... 109 parking lights ...... 125 emergency braking assistance system replacing the battery ...... 110 parking lights on both sides ...... 125 (Front Assist) ...... 220 unlocking and locking ...... 11 rear fog light ...... 124 gearbox ...... 207 vehicle key ...... 109 rear interior light ...... 126 particulate filter ...... 214 side lights ...... 121 Manual air conditioning ...... 149 switch ...... 21 air recirculation ...... 150 turn signals ...... 122 Manual gearbox gear lever ...... 203 289 Index

Manual release mechanism split screen ...... 185 Parking aid ...... 222 rear lid ...... 12 traffic reports (TRAFFIC) ...... 186 adjusting the display and audible warn- Media Navigation announcements ...... 181 ings ...... 227 changing the Media source ...... 174 Number of seats ...... 63 automatic activation ...... 225 copyright ...... 173 malfunction ...... 227 main menu ...... 173 O operation ...... 225 messages and symbols ...... 174 Octane rating (petrol) ...... 243 parking aid plus ...... 224 playback sources ...... 174 Odometer ...... 98, 101 rear parking aid ...... 224 playing modes ...... 173 reset button ...... 101 sensors and camera: cleaning ...... 267 Memory card ...... 175 Oil change ...... 248 surrounds warning ...... 224 Mirror Oil properties ...... 42 towing bracket ...... 227 vanity mirror ...... 128 On-board computer visual indication ...... 226 MirrorLink ...... 168 see Driver information system ...... 27 Parking aid system Mobile ...... 241 Open and close ...... 108 see Parking aid ...... 222, 224 Mobile telephones ...... 241 Opening ...... 108 Parking distance warning system Model plate ...... 275 bonnet ...... 13 see Parking aid ...... 222, 224 Multi-function display ...... 27 fuel tank flap ...... 241 ParkPilot Multi-function steering wheel ...... 103 vehicle, with Keyless Access ...... 113 see Parking aid ...... 222, 224 Multimedia ...... 195 windows ...... 119 Particulate filter Multimedia compartment ...... 139 Opening and closing ...... 11 malfunction ...... 214 bonnet ...... 13 Parts ...... 240 N central locking ...... 111 Passenger Navigation ...... 178 fuel tank flap ...... 241 see Correct sitting position ...... 58, 59, 60 change view ...... 184 in the door cylinder ...... 11 Pedals ...... 62 entering the destination ...... 180 rear lid ...... 12 Petrol importing vCards ...... 187 windows ...... 119 Petrol ...... 243 main menu ...... 180 with the central locking button ...... 113 preheating ...... 196 messages and symbols ...... 180 Original SEAT Spare Parts ...... 264 Positioning seat belts my destinations ...... 182 Outside temperature during pregnancy ...... 66 navigation announcements ...... 181 display ...... 100 seat belts ...... 66 Navigation with images ...... 188 Power ...... 138 points of interest (POI) ...... 184 P Power socket, 12 V ...... 138 Power socket, 5 V ...... 138 predictive navigation ...... 187 Paint Power steering ...... 209 route ...... 182 code ...... 275 select the destination on the map ...... 181 Control lamp ...... 209 290 Index

Preheating ...... 196 Rear view mirror Running in Preheating system adjusting the exterior mirrors ...... 130 brake pads ...... 210 control lamp ...... 213 anti-dazzle ...... 130 the tyres ...... 210 Products for vehicle maintenance ...... 265 interior anti-dazzle ...... 130 Puncture Rear window wiper blades S action ...... 46 changing ...... 56 Safe ...... 112 cleaning ...... 56 Safety R refuelling child safety ...... 75 Radar sensor ...... 220 Petrol additives ...... 243 child seats ...... 75 Radiator fan ...... 246 Refuelling ...... 241 deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . 17 Radio opening the fuel tank flap ...... 241 safe driving ...... 57 changing frequencies ...... 171 Remote control ...... 108 Safety equipment ...... 57 information and symbols ...... 171 synchronisation ...... 109 Safety instructions main menu ...... 171 Repair work ...... 240 belt tensioners ...... 68 memorise station logos ...... 172 Replacement head-protection airbags ...... 71 memory buttons ...... 172 parts ...... 240 side airbags ...... 71 Radio DISPLAY: clean ...... 268 Replacement parts ...... 240 use of seat belts ...... 64 Raising the vehicle ...... 50 Replacing the battery using child seats ...... 19, 75 Rear of the vehicle key ...... 110 Saving tips (efficiency program) ...... 32 headrests ...... 62 Reset the trip recorder ...... 101 Seat belt position Rear Assist ...... 227 Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) ...... 205 for pregnant women ...... 15, 66 instructions for use ...... 228 Revolution counter ...... 98, 99 seat belts ...... 15, 66 parking ...... 229 Rims Seat belt release ...... 66 screen ...... 228 changing a wheel ...... 48 Seat belts ...... 63 special characteristics ...... 229 Roll-back function adjustment ...... 15, 66 Rear Assist system ...... 227 windows ...... 119 control lamp ...... 63 Rear fog light Roof carrier ...... 145 height adjustment ...... 67 control lamp ...... 120 attachment points ...... 145 protective function ...... 63 Rear lid ...... 12, 117 roof load ...... 146 safety instructions ...... 64 see also Luggage compartment ...... 118 Roof rack ...... 145 unfastened ...... 65 Rear seat passengers Rotary knobs ...... 158 Seat belt tensioners ...... 15, 67 see Correct sitting position ...... 58, 59, 60 Run-in Seat heating ...... 132 Rear View Camera ...... 227 new engine ...... 210 SEAT Service Mobility ...... 264 new tyres ...... 255 Selector lever the first 1,500 km ...... 210 positions ...... 205 291 Index

Selector lever lock ...... 206 Starter button ...... 197 display and symbols ...... 193 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Starting the engine ...... 196, 198 enter telephone number ...... 194 malfunction ...... 206 Starting the vehicle ...... 20 general information ...... 189 manual release mechanism ...... 36 Steering main menu ...... 192 Service control lamp ...... 209 pairing a mobile phone ...... 191 conditions of use ...... 263 steering lock ...... 196 places with special regulations ...... 190 digital maintenance plan ...... 262 Steering wheel Temperature selection fixed service ...... 262 adjustment ...... 16, 59 heating ...... 148 flexible service ...... 262 Storage compartment Tightening torque of wheel bolts ...... 277 oil change service ...... 262 passenger side ...... 135 Timer ...... 30 service ...... 262 Storage compartments ...... 135 lap times ...... 30 Service proof ...... 262 front seats ...... 136 menu ...... 30 services ...... 262 glasses ...... 139 statistics ...... 30 servicing ...... 262 in front door ...... 140 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) ...... 203, 206 sets of services ...... 264 in the centre console ...... 140 Top speed ...... 32 Service interval indication ...... 33 in the luggage compartment ...... 140 Top Tether ...... 20 Service intervals display ...... 263 reflective vest ...... 136 Top Tether system ...... 20 Service warning: check ...... 33 Sun visors ...... 128 Tow-starting ...... 53 Side airbags Switch Tow-starting the engine ...... 81 description ...... 18 hazard warning lights ...... 125 Towing bracket device ...... 232 safety instructions ...... 71 Switch-off delay (Infotainment system) ...... 158 Towing the vehicle ...... 52, 81 see also Airbag system ...... 18 Switching off the engine Towline anchorages ...... 53 Signal lever ...... 21 with the key ...... 199 Traction control ...... 202 Snow chains ...... 52, 277 Switching off the lights ...... 120 Traction control system ...... 201 Spanner symbol ...... 33 Switching on the lights ...... 120 Trailer ...... 232 Spare wheel ...... 259 Switching the ignition on and off ...... 196 ball coupling ...... 236 Special features Switch on ...... 196 correct placement ...... 237 Lowering the volume ...... 158 driving with a trailer ...... 233 Speed warning device ...... 32 T parking aid ...... 227 Start-Stop Tailgate locking time extension service position ...... 235 operation ...... 215 see Luggage compartment ...... 118 towing device ...... 234 Start-Stop system ...... 215 Technical specifications ...... 275 trailer weights ...... 232 Start-Stop System Telephone use and maintenance ...... 239 driver instructions ...... 215 Bluetooth® profiles ...... 190 Trailer weight ...... 277 lamps ...... 215 call lists ...... 194 292 Index

Transporting U Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys- luggage compartment ...... 142 tem Unfasten the seat belt ...... 15 Transporting children ...... 75 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow Unlocking Transporting items system ...... 117 central locking ...... 111 carrier system ...... 145 Vehicle maintenance ...... 265 remote control ...... 108 roof carrier ...... 145 Vehicle paint Unlocking and locking ...... 11 Trip recorder ...... 98 maintenance ...... 267 with Keyless Access ...... 113 Tyre Mobility Set ...... 47 Vehicle seats ...... 63 with the central locking button ...... 113 components ...... 80 Vehicle tool kit ...... 48, 78 USB ...... 195 inflating a tyre ...... 80 Ventilation slits ...... 141 connecting an external data storage de- sealing a tyre ...... 80 vice ...... 175 Tyre Mobility System W USB/AUX-IN Port ...... 195 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 79 Warning symbols Tyre monitoring system ...... 260 V see Control and warning lamps ...... 103 Tyre pressure ...... 277 Warning triangle ...... 78 Tyre pressure monitoring Vehicle Warranty ...... 265 control lamp ...... 260 chassis number ...... 275 Washing the vehicle Tyre Profile ...... 256 identification data ...... 275 external vehicle maintenance ...... 265 Tyre repair ...... 79 identification number ...... 275 high pressure cleaners ...... 265 Tyre repair kit raising ...... 50 special characteristics ...... 115 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 79 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 113 Weights ...... 276 Tyres Vehicle battery ...... 44, 251 Wheel bolts ...... 277 changing ...... 48 assisted starting ...... 54 caps ...... 49 dimensions ...... 258 automatic disconnection of electrical loosening and tightening ...... 49 equipment ...... 255 interchanging ...... 258 Wheel cover ...... 48 changing ...... 255 new tyres ...... 258 Wheels ...... 255, 277 checking electrolyte level ...... 253 pressure ...... 260 anti-theft wheel bolts ...... 49 connecting and disconnecting ...... 251 service life ...... 256 chains ...... 277 disconnect and connect ...... 34 wear indicators ...... 256 changing ...... 48, 51, 78 lifting the cover ...... 253 with compulsory direction of rotation ...... 51 new wheels ...... 258 winter conditions ...... 251 with directional tread pattern ...... 259 snow chains ...... 52 winter service ...... 254 Tyre tread depth ...... 256 spare wheel ...... 259 Vehicle care Tyre wear ...... 256 wheel bolts ...... 79 windscreen wipers service position ...... 56 wheel cover ...... 48 Vehicle data ...... 281

293 Index

Wheel trim removing ...... 49 Windows electric ...... 14, 119 Window wiper blade ...... 23 Windscreen washer ...... 44 Headlight washers ...... 130 Windscreen washer fluid checking ...... 251 control lamp ...... 128 winter ...... 251 Windscreen washers ...... 128 jets ...... 129 Windscreen washer water checking ...... 251 topping up ...... 251 Windscreen wipers ...... 23, 128 cleaning ...... 267 control ...... 129 lifting the wiper blade ...... 56 replacing the wiper blade ...... 56 service position ...... 56 windscreen washer fluid ...... 251 Winter conditions battery ...... 251 diesel ...... 244 snow chains ...... 52 tyres ...... 261 Winter service battery ...... 254 disconnecting and connecting ...... 254 Winter tyres ...... 261 Wipe interval ...... 129

294

Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18 6JA012720BL

Owner’s manual

Toledo Inglés (11.18) SEAT Toledo

6JA012720BL (11.18)

Inglés SEAT